JP7139032B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine (generally called a "pachinko machine") or a reel-type game machine (generally called a "pachislot machine").

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a game machine that sets a plurality of setting states such as the probability of a win-lose lottery and the execution probability of various effects by a setting change operation by a game center manager.

JP-A-6-91049

The setting function described above can change the performance of the gaming machine with respect to the prize balls won by the player, and the setting function can change the performance of the gaming machine in accordance with the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, since the game profit obtained by the player changes depending on the setting change, if the setting operation is easy, there is a possibility that the setting is changed by mistake.

An object of the present invention is to suppress erroneous operations related to settings of a game machine.

An example of the invention disclosed in this specification is as follows.
A game control means for controlling a game;
A storage means capable of storing and holding set values related to control performed by the game control means;
power-on means for powering on;
external output means capable of outputting various signals to the outside;
setting state generation means for generating a setting state in which the setting value can be set based on a first administrator operation being performed when the power is turned on by the power-on means;
When the power is turned on by the power-on means, a confirmation state is generated for generating a confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed based on a second administrator's operation different from the first administrator's operation being performed. means and
with
A signal is output from the external output means not only when the setting state is started but also when the confirmation state is started,
Further, the predetermined display section for displaying the set values is provided on the back side of the gaming machine and is also used for displaying predetermined error information,
The display of the set value and the display of the error information are different in display mode ,
Further, when the power is turned on again by the power-on means after the setting state is stopped due to occurrence of a specific abnormality during the setting state, the previous set value is set when the power is turned on again. Therefore, after the power is turned on again, an unset state occurs in which the setting values are not set by the administrator.
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, erroneous operations regarding settings can be suppressed.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. 1 is a plan view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is the front view which cut|disconnected the front structural member and front unit in a game board in the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure in main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the arithmetic circuit in main-control MPU. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a serial communication circuit; FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of initialization processing; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 21; FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of character product ratio calculation and display processing. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the role product ratio calculation/display processing of FIG. 24; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning of the program (code|code) stored in ROM and RAM which were built in main control MPU, and data. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the character product ratio calculation area|region. It is a figure which shows the structure of a character thing ratio display. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a driver circuit; FIG. 4 is a timing diagram of data input to the driver circuit; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of main-control MPU and a character-object ratio display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a load register selection table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table; It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a role product ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a role product ratio. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation/display processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a diagram showing another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. It is a diagram showing another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. It is a diagram showing another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. It is a diagram showing another example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the structure of data stored in a base calculation area; It is a front view showing another example of the game board. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display selection table; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation/display processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation area update processing; FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 1; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 2; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 1; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 2; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 3; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 4; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base display processing; 10 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 3; 10 is a flowchart showing another example of base calculation processing 4; 9 is a flowchart showing another example of base display processing; It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge|emission ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the arrangement|positioning of the frame side discharge|emission ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the connection example of an ejection|emission ball sensor and a main-control board. It is a front view showing an example of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a main control input circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a main control I/O port; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a main control I/O port; FIG. FIG. 98 is a timing chart in the configuration example of the main control I/O port shown in FIG. 97; It is a figure which shows the change of the state (interval) concerning calculation of a base value. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on a base display; 5 is a flowchart showing an example of initialization processing; FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 101; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the configuration of a base calculation area 13128. FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of base calculation processing; 106 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the base calculation processing of FIG. 105; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of base display data generation processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a modified example of base calculation processing; It is a figure which shows calculation of a base when a game state switches. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recorded on a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the example of an error screen. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an error signal; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an error; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an error; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an error; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; It is a figure which shows an example of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of game history. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a peripheral control board and its periphery; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the peripheral configuration of a peripheral control SRAM; FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows the modification of game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of game history. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which has a setting part from the back in the open state. 127 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126 with the door closed; FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a setting section of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126; FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a setting part. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from the back. 132 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko machine mounted with the game board shown in FIG. 131; FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of initialization processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing; It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a special symbol variation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special design variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a loss. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big win. 140(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). FIG. FIG. 140(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). FIG. 140(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). FIG. 140(A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the loss variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of a main control board. It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of a main control board. FIG. 147B is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A' in FIG. 147(B); It is a figure which shows another example of mounting of a main control board. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of initialization processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting confirmation processing; FIG. 4 is a timing diagram of security signals; It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front in which the center accessory and the display effect unit of the front unit of the game board are disassembled. FIG. 10 is a front view showing a state in which the display effect unit luminesces the first pattern; FIG. 10 is a front view showing a state in which the display effect unit luminesces the second pattern; It is a figure which shows the structure of a light-guide plate. 4A and 4B are diagrams showing the structure of a reflective portion provided on the light guide plate; FIG. 4A and 4B are diagrams showing the structure of a reflective portion provided on the light guide plate; FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light-guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on a light-guide plate. It is a figure showing a mode that the pattern seen planarly by a light-guide plate is displayed. It is a figure showing a mode that the pattern seen planarly by a light-guide plate is displayed. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing how a pattern viewed stereoscopically by a light guide plate is displayed; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing how a pattern viewed stereoscopically by a light guide plate is displayed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display performed using a light guide plate; 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine with a front member opened; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. provided in the slot machine; FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of a storage area provided by ROM, RAM, etc., and a ROM area in this embodiment; It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area|region in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the character product ratio calculation area|region. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area|region of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining the procedure of system reset start-up processing that is executed when the slot machine is reset; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a procedure of regular processing; 4 is a flowchart showing the procedure of information signal N output processing;

A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. As shown in FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and viewed from the front. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from behind;

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. 20 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 .

The outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 . The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a door frame base unit 100 attached to the front lower part of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side portion attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball stored in the upper dish 201 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 through the tray unit 200. A handle unit 500 that a player can operate to hit the ball into the game area of the game board 5, and a plate unit 200 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and receives the game ball that fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower tray 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and feeds the game balls on the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher 680, and the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped body frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 attached to the right side of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. , and a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out game balls to the player side. A letter-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. and a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game played on the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with a character ratio indicator 1317 . The character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The character ratio indicator 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device. Note that the character product ratio display 1317 may be provided in the payout control board unit 950 instead of the main control unit 1300 .

Also, the character product ratio may be displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 without separately providing a display device for displaying the character product ratio. In this case, if the role ratio is always displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114 and 244, the player can be notified of the role ratio and the player can check the condition of the pachinko machine.

As will be described later, the role ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls won by the total number of balls won. Since it is obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has few jackpot games and few prize balls during the jackpot, so it can be said to be in poor condition. Therefore, the player can select the pachinko machine to play in consideration of the value of the accessory ratio.

As a mode for notifying the player of the role ratio, the numerical value of the role ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 . For example, if the character ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinked in red, and if it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit or blinked in green. do. It is preferable to display the numerical value of the character ratio in such a manner that it is not mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative pattern when it does not fluctuate, or the size of the number indicating the role ratio may be made smaller than the decorative pattern. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Also, the aspect of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be changed according to the numerical value of the role ratio to notify the player of the role ratio. For example, when the role ratio is 70% or more, the decorative pattern is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinked in red, and when it is 69% to 30%, the decorative pattern is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit in green. or blink. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Alternatively, the information may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 provided on the door frame 3 . In that case, the above-described display mode may be changed, and not only the role item ratio but also other information may be displayed. The other information includes the number of big wins, the number of consecutive big wins (so-called number of consecutive wins), the number of balls in possession, the remaining money, and the like.

Further, not only the character product ratio, but also a continuous character product ratio, a base value, and the like, which will be described later, may be displayed by changing the mode as described above. The character product ratio, the continuous character product ratio, and the base value may be displayed in different ways.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin-made main control board box 1320 which is sealed in such a way that once it is closed, it cannot be opened without being destroyed, and is placed on a printed circuit board. The finished parts can be seen from the outside. Furthermore, for example, when the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the character ratio indicator 1317 provided in the main control unit 1300 can be used for pachinko. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1 . By enclosing the character ratio display 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the character ratio display 1317 to make the game machine 1 look less gambling, and the game machine 1 can be displayed accurately. It can display the gambling nature.

If the back cover 980 is made of an opaque resin, the back cover 980 at the position of the character ratio indicator 1317 may be perforated or the position of the character ratio indicator 1317 may be made transparent. The character product ratio indicator 1317 may be viewed from the back side of the machine 1 .

Further, even when the back cover 980 is made of transparent resin, the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the character ratio indicator 1317 can be flattened or the back cover 980 can be made thin. The ratio indicator 1317 may be made easy to see from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

At the bottom of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, a discharge port is provided for collecting the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a via the out port 1111 and the prize winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharging them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 for detecting game balls discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a character ratio display switch 1318 . The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the character ratio display switch 1318 can be operated. It is preferable to display (print, engrave, seal, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the character ratio display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320 that it is a switch for operating the display of the character ratio. It is desirable that the character ratio display switch 1318 be provided near the character ratio display 1317. However, even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, It may be provided on the control board 4700, the power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, or the front member 4200. It may be provided in the peripheral control unit 1500, a relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, the power board in the power board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Also, as will be described later, the character product ratio display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the role product ratio display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the top of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right to open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. It is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side, and the game ball guided by the ball guiding unit 820 is instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. a payout device 830 which pays out one by one based on the base 801 and guides downward the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 which is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. An upper full ball path unit 850 that releases game balls from either a normal outlet or a full ball outlet according to the above, and an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 From the normal outlet of the upper full ball path unit 850 A normal guiding path guides the discharged game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3, and guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge opening forward and guides the game balls forward and guides them from the front end of the door frame 3. and a lower full ball path unit 860 having a full guideway leading to the full ball receptacle 530 .

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front and having a bass speaker installed therein. 921, a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a power supply board box 930 attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside the box. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 which is attached across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of game balls is housed inside. A payout control board unit 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and shoots game balls shot from the ball launching device 680 into the upper part of the game area 5a. A front structural member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide to the front structural member 1000, a flat plate-like game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, and the game panel 1100 It has a box-shaped substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control substrate 1310 attached to the rear side of the substrate holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 and a front unit (not shown) having a plurality of winning holes attached in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving game balls hit into the game area 5a ) and a back unit 3000 attached to the upper side of the board holder 1200 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 .

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 201, the ball shooting device 680 plays a game with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 . Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are accepted by the winning openings (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning openings. . Since the payout of the game balls can enhance the interest of the player, the game balls in the upper tray 201 can be hit into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. 11 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. Also, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. Furthermore, FIG. 16 is a front view of the front constituent members and the front unit of the game board, cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction within the game area.

The game board 5 of this embodiment has a game area 5a into which game balls are struck by the player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. FIG. The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front structural member 1000 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to cover the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is played by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) for controlling game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加A main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit 3000 and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 .

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by this, and the first special lottery that is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a first big winning hole 2005 and a second big winning hole 2006 which can accept game balls either according to the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery. The second big winning hole 2006 is composed of two big winning holes, a second upper big winning hole 2006a and a second lower big winning hole 2006b, which are arranged in one channel through which game balls circulate (Fig. 16).

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005. A lower side unit 2200, which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning slots 2001, and is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A side unit top 2300 and a frame-shaped frame that is attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006 A center accessory 2500 is provided.

The rear unit 3000 is arranged at a predetermined position in the rear box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. A plurality of general prize winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably mounting the main liquid crystal display device 1600. a mechanism 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 attached to the right end in the front view inside the back box 3010 and for discharging game balls received in the general prize winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500; A lower right ball passage unit is attached near the front end of the lower right corner in the front view inside the back box 3010 and is used to discharge the game balls received in the second big winning port 2006 or the second out port 2543c of the center accessory 2500. 3035 and .

The rear unit 3000 includes an upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010, an upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and rotatably mounted to the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A box-shaped production drive board box 3042, a production drive board 3043 housed in the production drive board box 3042, a panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a panel relay board 3044. and a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side of the .

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper center attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

A shot ball sensor 1020 for detecting a game ball hit into the game area 5a is provided on the back side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing the backflow prevention member 1007). For example, the shot ball sensor 1020 is composed of a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and flowed into the game area 5a is detected. Note that the shot ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position through which the game ball must pass within the game area. By fixing the position of the shot ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, specifications can be shared among a plurality of models, and inspections at manufacturing sites and after installation in halls are facilitated.

A shot ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects an out ball before the winning opening sensor detects a winning game ball. That is, since game balls are detected in the order of out balls and prize balls, the base value can be accurately calculated without detecting prize balls caused by game balls not counted as out balls.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. FIG. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 from the rear side. In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and positioning holes formed on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 , the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guide section 1003 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 .

[2-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 can be received. 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, payout of game balls, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a, as shown. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and two LEDs based on the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. A normal pattern display device for displaying these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the normal lottery after the normal pattern is variably displayed by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal pattern related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003 Among them, a normal holding indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the condition for starting the variable display has not yet been established, and acceptance of game balls into the first start port 2002 (start winning Based on the result of the first special lottery drawn by generation), the eight LEDs are controlled to blink based on the result of the first special lottery, so that the eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery after the first special symbol is variably displayed. The holding number, which is the number of variable displays for which the condition for starting the variable display has not yet been established, among the variable displays of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 and the first special symbol display device. Eight LEDs blink based on the first special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs to be displayed and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball into the second start port 2004 (occurrence of start winning prize) A second special symbol indicator for displaying the eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the second special lottery after the second special symbol is variably displayed by controlling, and acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004. A second special pending number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the pending number, which is the number of variable displays for which the condition for starting variable display has not yet been established, among the variable displays of the second special symbols related to the first special When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like, a round indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing patterns of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006. and are mainly provided. In addition, some indicators (for example, the first special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 may be configured with 7-segment LEDs.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back case 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling effect images (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main liquid crystal display device]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . In more detail, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center thereof. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece 1601 protruding outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. 1602 and . The main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion of a back case 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward to insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is pushed downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it inwards.

[2-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. FIG. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are located within the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball A second starting port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first big winning hole 2005 and a second big winning hole 2006 are provided in which a game ball can be accepted in either one according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Three of the plurality (here, four) of the general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right in the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially directly below the impact portion 1006 on the upper right side in the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 to the right in front view. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning opening 2001 arranged near the upper right in the front view in the game area 5 a is arranged directly above the second starting opening 2004 . The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111 . The second big prize winning opening 2006 is arranged above the first big winning opening 2005 on the right side of the first start opening 2002 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second large winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes a second upper large winning opening 2006a and a second lower large winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which game balls circulate. It is composed of As for the second big winning opening 2006, the second upper big winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right in the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower big winning opening 2006b is arranged in the front view of the second upper big winning opening 2006a. It is positioned downwards on the left side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a first big winning port 2005. A lower side unit 2200, which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the mouth unit 2100 when viewed from the front and has three general winning slots 2001, and is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A side unit top 2300 and a frame-shaped frame that is attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second big winning opening 2006 A center accessory 2500 is provided.

[2-8a. starting unit]
Next, starter unit 2100 of front unit 2000 will be described. The starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out port 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. This starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2002 and a first big winning opening 2005 .

The starting port unit 2100 includes a flat plate-like unit base 2101 having a first grand prize winning port 2005 which is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in the left and right direction and which penetrates in the front and back direction. A ball receiving portion 2102 protruding forward from the upper part of the left-right direction approximately center above the big winning opening 2005 and forming the first starting opening 2002, and the first starting opening attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101. A ball guide portion 2103 that guides the game ball received in 2002 downward, a first start port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guide portion 2103 and detects the game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the main prize winning opening 2005 .

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big prize winning port 2005 from behind, and the front end is opened forward with substantially the same size as the first big prize winning port 2005. A box-shaped unit case 2111 and a flat plate-shaped first big prize door with a horizontally elongated rectangular shape whose lower side is rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111 so as to be able to open and close the first big prize gate 2005. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 for opening and closing the first big prize winning opening door member 2112, and a first attacker solenoid 2113 mounted in the unit case 2111 and received by the first big winning opening 2005. A first large winning opening sensor 2114 that detects a game ball, a first starting opening sensor 2104 attached to the upper surface of the unit case 2111, a first attacker solenoid, and a first large winning opening sensor 2114 and a main control board 1310 and a starter unit relay board 2115 for relaying the connection with the starter unit, and a starter unit decoration board (not shown) attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 for decorating the first grand prize winner 2005 with light. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 opens upward to a size that allows only one game ball to be received at a time. The first big prize winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 opens forward with a size capable of receiving a plurality of (for example, 4 to 6) game balls at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, a first starting port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is guided by a ball guiding portion 2103 to the unit base. After being guided downward at the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the first attacker unit 2110 can be penetrated and discharged downward. In this embodiment, two first starting hole sensors 2104 are provided, and in the main control board 1310, when the two first starting hole sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first starting hole At 2002, it is determined that the game ball has been accepted. This makes it possible to detect a fraudulent act by inserting a fraudulent tool into the first starting opening 2002 .

In the starting opening unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first big winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 opens to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the opening 2005 from behind to close the first big winning opening 2005 . This first big prize winning opening door member 2112 is in an upright state that closes the first big winning opening 2005, and both left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111, and the upper side is forward and The first big prize winning port 2005 can be opened from the closed state by rotating so as to move downward.

The first large prize winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (the state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first large winning prize opening 2005 . Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the game state, the first big prize winning opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be in position. In other words, the first big prize winning opening door member 2112 is inclined forward from the lower side of the first big winning opening 2005 so as to be higher.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first big prize winning port 2005 and contacts the first big prize winning port door member 2112, the inclination of the first big prize winning port door member 2112 causes the game ball to flow from below. It changes to the rear, is received by the first big winning opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111 . After being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2114 , the game ball received in the first big winning hole 2005 is ejected downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 .

[3. control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various production devices during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device based on the command from the peripheral control section 1511. and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the display of effect images on the display device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of game balls and a launch control unit 953 that controls launch of game balls by rotating the handle lever 504 .

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311, which is a microprocessor in which a ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, etc., and an input/output device (I /O device), a main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, a main control and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311 . The main control MPU 1311 has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 includes the first starting hole sensor 2104 that detects the game ball accepted in the first starting hole 2002, and the second starting hole sensor that detects the game ball accepted in the second starting hole 2004. 2551, a general winning hole sensor 3015 that detects a game ball received in the general winning hole 2001, a gate sensor 2547 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate part 2003, and a game ball that has been received in the first big winning hole 2005. 1st big prize winning hole sensor 2114, second big winning hole 2006a as second big winning hole 2006 and second big winning hole sensor 2554 for detecting the game ball accepted in the second big winning hole 2006b and Detected signals from the second lower grand prize opening sensor 2557, the discharged ball sensor 3060, the fired ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are sent through the main control I/O port 1314, respectively. is entered.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the starting opening solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, the second upper attacker Output a drive signal to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, or from the main control I / O port 1314 to the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, the second special symbol display device, the first special symbol storage A drive signal is output to an indicator, a second special symbol memory indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal symbol memory indicator, a game state indicator, a round indicator, and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the second starting opening sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper big winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning opening The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, while the general winning hole sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 2104, the second starting hole sensor 2551, And detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2547 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starter sensor 2104, the second starter sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. FIG. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened (or enlarged) and the game balls are frequently released. Since the ball enters, the game ball is frequently detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper big winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning hole sensor 2557. For this reason, the first big winning hole sensor 2114, the second upper big winning hole sensor 2554, and the second lower big winning hole sensor 2557 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3015 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch.

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various commands related to the control of game effects executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314. For example, it transmits to the peripheral control unit 1511 . In addition, when the main control MPU 1311 receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 , the various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power board in the power board box 930 . The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. do.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various information in the RAM 1312 during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I/O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

A character ratio indicator 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 . The character product ratio display 1317 displays the character product ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311 .

Also, the main control board 1310 is provided with a character ratio display switch 1318 . The role item ratio display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be of another type. When the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the role ratio is displayed on the role ratio display 1317 . Note that the character ratio display 1317 may always display the character ratio, and the displayed content may be switched by operating the character ratio display switch 1318 .

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the main control MPU 1311. As shown in FIG.

The main control MPU 1311 includes a CPU 13111, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, a random number generation circuit 13112, a parallel input port 13113, a serial communication circuit 13114, a timer circuit 13115, an interrupt controller 13116, an external bus interface 13117, a clock circuit 13118, a verification block 13119, a unique It has information 13120 , an arithmetic circuit 13121 and a reset circuit 13122 .

The CPU 13111 executes programs stored in the ROM 1313 . A RAM 1312 stores data necessary for program execution.

One or more random number generation circuits 13112 are provided in the main control MPU 1311 . The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery results of the variable display game results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect contents of the variable display game. The random number generating circuit 13112 is a so-called hard random number generating means that outputs a random number updated at the timing of, for example, the clock period supplied to the main control MPU 1311 (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock period). The hard random numbers generated by the random number generating circuit 13112 are used for special symbol winning lotteries, special symbol variation display game winning symbol lotteries, and normal symbol winning lotteries.

A parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315 .

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits/receives various commands regarding the control of game effects and various commands regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 to/from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port 1314 . In addition, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits/receives various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to the payout of game balls to/from the payout control board 951 via the main control I/O port 1314 . Furthermore, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the character product ratio to the character product ratio display device 1317 . A detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

A timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts to the CPU 13111 (general interrupts, NMI that cannot be masked by software). That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the vector table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the vector table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 with external devices. The external bus interface 13117 can input/output an I/O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0-A15), and 8-bit data (D0-D7).

A clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock for the main control MPU 1311 from an input external clock signal (eg, 32 MHz). Also, the clock circuit 13118 divides the frequency of the input clock signal by a set number and outputs the result from the CLKO terminal to the outside. For example, a clock signal to be supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the character ratio indicator 1317 may be output.

A verification block 13119 is a functional block that verifies whether or not the ROM 1313 has been illegally modified using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311, and is written in a non-rewritable manner when the chip is manufactured.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function independent of the program recorded in the ROM 1313 . This arithmetic function is permanently written into the chip when it is manufactured.

The reset circuit 13122 has an undesignated running prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address other than the predetermined address in the ROM 1313, the undesignated travel prohibition circuit presumes that the access is by an unauthorized program, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. FIG. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer time elapses and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 . The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by a reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121. As shown in FIG.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function independent of a program for the arithmetic result, and has a multiplication circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215 .

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a 32-bit product. It functions as an output conversion circuit.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores multipliers and multiplicands of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A131212 and the multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at a predetermined timing, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214 . The CPU 13111 acquires the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214 . The process from writing values to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the operation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock). , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks has passed, the multiplication result register 131214 can be referenced to obtain the multiplication result.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that divides a dividend of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) and outputs a 32-bit quotient and a 32-bit remainder. It functions as a conversion circuit that converts an input value (divisor, dividend) into a quotient and remainder by a function and outputs the result.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a dividend of 32 bits or less in the division input register A131216 and stores a divisor of 32 bits or less in the division input register B131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that values are stored in both of the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, the stored values are read out at a predetermined timing, and the quotient obtained by dividing the dividend by the divisor is obtained. The result is stored in the division result register A131218, and the remainder is stored in the division result register B131219. In addition, when the division circuit 131215 reads the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, it is preferable to erase the read values and clear the registers. Also, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start instruction is input, and store the division results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 . In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 do not have to be erased at read timing. Moreover, even if values are already stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 (without clearing the stored values), the values may be overwritten.

The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131219 . The process from writing values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the operation results in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed within a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks). After the values are stored in the registers 131216 and 131217 and a predetermined number of clocks has passed, the division result registers 131218 and 131219 can be referenced to obtain the quotient and remainder.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as will be described later, division processing is necessary to calculate the base value. It takes. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing division processing using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt processing (see FIGS. 75 and 80). . In addition, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing during the period from the writing of values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. Base calculation processing can be efficiently executed during timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 20 shows a configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114. As shown in FIG.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission/reception circuits, and each data transmission/reception circuit transmits/receives data for one channel to/from a predetermined device. In FIG. 20, only the data transmission circuit is illustrated, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is implemented) is omitted.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the serial communication circuit 13114 has, as described above, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, character ratio Three channels are used, channel 2 used to communicate with driver circuit 13171 of display 1317, channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

Data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then stored in the transmission data register 3142 . The transmission data register 3142 is composed of a FIFO with a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated for each data transmission unit by the parity generation circuit 3143 to the data to be transmitted, and stores the data in the transmission shift register 3144 .

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at the rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118 . Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

A command status register 3145 is a register referred to for checking the transmission status.

Communication setting register 3146 stores commands for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. Baud rate register 3148 stores the baud rate setting for defining the data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, transmission trigger setting level register 3147 and baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

These settings are described in detail below. A communication format for each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, whether or not to use FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, 1 xxx 1010B meaning even parity is set, and for channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317, FIFO mode, stop bit=1 bit, and 1×××1000B meaning no parity are set.

In FIFO mode, the FIFO of transmit data register 3142 is used to transmit data. In addition, since the game machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set parity when transmitting data to the outside of the main control board 1310 at high speed.

Since the character ratio display device 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the effect of noise is small compared to communication with other boards via communication wires. Also, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and there is little need to use parity. In addition, along the pattern for transmitting signals between the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, the left and right and / or thickness direction of the signal line provided on the surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board A ground pattern is provided on the layer adjacent to the signal transmission pattern), and the shielding effect of the ground pattern can reduce noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit in the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By judging the relevant bit of the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is empty, and to judge the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 .

Note that the bit in the status register can be used to determine whether there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if data is not written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period of time, if the corresponding bit of the status register is not set, the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 does not have an empty space. It may be determined that data has not been transmitted from the FIFO, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be performed.

Baud rate register 3148 defines the data transmission rate. For example, channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 is set to 19200 bps, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951 is set to 1200 bps, and the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio indicator 1317 1200 bps is set for channel 2 used for communication with.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed according to the data transmitted on each channel. This is because game balls are rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuits of the gaming machine are in an environment susceptible to noise. For this reason, the data for controlling the output of balls directly related to the profit given to the player is transmitted at a low speed to the payout control board 951 so as to be reliably transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and has nothing to do with the ball being put out. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and if it determines that it is abnormal, it does not operate the peripheral control board 1510 or executes abnormality processing (for example, communication error notification), and the command request retransmission of Then, if the resent command is determined to be normal, the normal command is used to restore the state of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, communication with the peripheral control board 1510 can transmit data at a high rate. Furthermore, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player will be able to recognize the delay from the winning of the starting gate to the start of the pattern fluctuation, which may reduce interest.

The communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 is at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). good. In addition, communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 has a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). You may adopt a rate between If the data transmission rate is increased, other circuits may malfunction due to switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio indicator 1317 or the like. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data is retransmitted at each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated. returns to normal, so there is no need to reduce the transmission rate extremely.

Command status register 3145 is a register referred to for checking the transmission status, and each bit is defined as follows, for example.
Bit 7: SnTC This is a flag indicating completion of transmission, 0 indicating that transmission is in progress, and 1 indicating completion of transmission. Bit 6: SnTDBE In normal mode (a communication mode that does not use FIFO), this is a flag indicating that transmission data is empty. That is, it is set when data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and no transmission data is stored in the transmission data register 3142 .

In the SnTFTL FIFO mode, the flag indicates the transmission FIFO trigger level. amount of transmitted data is below the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, during communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, data is written in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 .
Bits 5-2: Not used (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL Bit to clear transmit buffer, break code transmit, empty transmit data, or set transmit FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), written externally. For example, when forcibly clearing the contents of the buffer, 1 is set to the relevant bit. More specifically, it is used when a command is written to the FIFO, but transmission of the written command is canceled due to some circumstances (for example, occurrence of an abnormality). Note that even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of start-stop synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the other party of communication (the driver circuit 13171 of the character product ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. FIG. Each transmitting/receiving circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, or a serial communication circuit for asynchronous communication and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication may be provided separately.

Although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating data loading timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Payout control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine is continued. Although not shown in detail, a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls includes a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, and a launch solenoid 682 that controls shooting. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. 803, a ball guide unit 820, and a ball extracting switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 to start the ball extracting operation.

[3-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 951 is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM as well as functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the out of ball detection sensor 827, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

Detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. be.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Of the signals output from the external terminal board 784 , the signal generated by the main control board 1310 is output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310 . In addition, the signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951 .

The error LED indicator is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 951), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it informs that there is no game ball in the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball caught" (specifically, the blade Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, it is notified that the payout blade and the game ball are engaged in the payout passage of the payout device 830 and the payout blade is difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is displayed. When there is, a ``counting switch error'' (specifically, a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified, and the number "5" is displayed. When the number "6" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, "full tank (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535, the game balls stored in the foul cover unit 520 are full), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is, it informs that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection is cut off in any part from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Sometimes, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button and a prepaid card return requesting signal from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. be done. The CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display. entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control unit]
Although not shown in detail, a firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 551 has a firing control input that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, and this launch reference pulse. and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the discharge reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit, A ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to a ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle lever 504, and a stop sensor that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is to be forcibly stopped by the player's will. A detection signal from the button is input to the firing timing control circuit after being input to the firing control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle operation sensor 507, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle lever 504, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit receives a drive current for firing a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504 based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, and a firing reference pulse is input. Triggered by this, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682 . On the other hand, the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball-feeding solenoid 551 in response to the input of the ball-feeding reference pulse, thereby feeding the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. When one ball is received in the feeding unit 540 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is terminated, the output of the constant current is stopped to feed the received game ball to the ball launching device 680 side. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

In addition, the power board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 has a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power-off process even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that controls effects based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control section 1511. , and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 .

[3-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the effect driving board 3043, or the game board The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor that operates the various production units provided in 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the production drive board 3043, and the door Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the vibrating device 242 provided on the frame 3 and the door lower right drive motor 272; door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to an LED or the like; or to transmit control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244 from the serial I/O port for the liquid crystal control section to the liquid crystal display control section 1512, In addition, it outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. . Detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that indicates that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally. monitoring the action.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs music and sounds in accordance with various effects from the speaker 921 or the like provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a , 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound presentation) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It diagnoses whether or not its own system is running out of control by using it together with WDT.

A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed through a serial input/output port. k) Bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blinking command, the game board side lighting blinking command, the movable body driving command, the display command , and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

This effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting flashing command to the LED of each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, or outputs the received game board side lighting flashing command A lighting signal or blinking signal based on is output to the LED of each decoration board provided on the game board 5. - 特許庁

In addition, the effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibrating device 242 and door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. output to

[3-3b. Various control processing of the peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit as shown in FIG. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the performance control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, the hot start/cold start determination process, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for this process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect and the pachinko game output from the main control board 1310 are output. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the year, month, day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and stored in the peripheral control RAM as the current calendar information in the calendar information storage unit. , and set it in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V-blank signal, which will be described later, which is executed when a V-blank signal is input to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such determinations, a standby state is established until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 (step S1009). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by the 1 ms interrupt timer being started is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. In this case, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to perform continuous transmission to the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, the operation button 220C is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches 258 provided in the effect operation unit 220 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Based on the acquired various information, it monitors whether or not the operation button 220C is operated, and appropriately determines whether or not to reflect the operation state of the operation button 220C in the game effect.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP in the display data creation process described later is transferred to the VDP built-in sound source on the game board side decorative substrate 3053 and the door frame side. Output to the decoration board 233 . As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side decoration board 3053 and the door frame side decoration board 233 .

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation process to be described later to the speaker 921, or notifies other than the music and sound effects. It outputs sound data of sounds and notification sounds to the speaker 921 .

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, in order to indicate which screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the VDP with built-in sound source, Update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data, the number of light emission data from the head light emission data is to be used as the light emission mode of each LED. , to update the pointer.

In the scheduler update process, among the sound data such as music and sound effects arranged in time series and the sound command data indicating the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound, the first sound A pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data is to be output from the command data to the tone generator built-in VDP.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of which order from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program is information transmitted from the game board side decoration board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means) analyzes various commands received (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, furthermore, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into predetermined notification displays, the effect control program issues various abnormal notifications. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for execution, are stored in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into various commands that are classified into status displays, such as In the case of the error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling in a mode different from the normal presentation mode accompanying the presentation operation, for example, the game board side decoration board 3053 (drawing device), the door frame side A decorative substrate 233 (rendering device) and a lamp (rendering device) are used to visually warn the outside, and a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 in spite of being in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to deter fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is designated among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Peripheral control of game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data Created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the unit 1511, set it in the peripheral control RAM, and a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the screen data indicated by the pointer. is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the tone generator built-in VDP. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the game board side decoration board 3053. And drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side decoration board 233 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the tone generator built-in VDP. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP with built-in sound source extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM, and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the performance control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM externally attached to the first backup area and the second backup area, respectively. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM are copied and backed up in the first backup area and the second backup area, respectively.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing, effect control program, first step S1009 peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and starts from setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, 1 ms in step S1010 , and step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as execution completion of the peripheral controller normal processing. is set to complete. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the tone generator built-in VDP to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the VDP with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed with the . When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 61 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

If the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral controller steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer at step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 60 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 62 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

If the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is incremented by 1 (step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, pointer drives various motors, solenoids, and other electrical drive sources in accordance with the drive data indicated by , updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and executes this motor and solenoid drive process each time Update the pointer.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. From history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information (for example, operation operation history information of the button 220C, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side performance receiver IC of the door frame side decoration board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 of the door frame side decorative board 233 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. It is a signal that is output to inform the decision when it is judged.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the first backup area and the second backup area for backup, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup second area. 1 area and the backup second area, respectively, to be backed up.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. is doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt causes the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Also, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side decoration board 3053 and the door frame side decoration board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the sound source built-in VDP are mounted. In addition, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly depending on the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 as well. In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[3-4. Liquid crystal display control section]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which controls drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 in the peripheral control board 1510, is not shown in detail, but is implemented as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) for controlling the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM for storing various data of screens displayed on the display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. and have.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Drawing control of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511 . Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. schedule data corresponding to , non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command), etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the configuration of screens in time series, and defines the order of screens drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. It is The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order to define the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data is the screen data to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and displays it on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate. Rendering data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated rendering data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. FIG. When the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. do. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a method in which drawing data for one line for drawing in the horizontal direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is held in a line buffer, and the line buffer stores the drawing data. This is a method of outputting the retained drawing data for one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 , the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 .

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display device 244 cannot be ignored. This affects the drawing speed on the display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, and the top plate liquid crystal display device 244. FIG. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the top plate liquid crystal display device 244. FIG. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the top plate liquid crystal display device 244, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Thus, when displaying a plurality of persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114, or the top plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. For these sprites, the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order") are set, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are drawn.

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally 2 times vertically 3 times. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front. and sub-scanning that repeats main scanning in a direction intersecting with the one direction. The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 receive the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control section 1512, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 perform main scanning. When viewed from the front of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 or the upper liquid crystal display device 244, the signals are sequentially output to the pixels of one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and drawing data for the next line is similarly input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244 are sequentially scanned one line from left to right as viewed from the front. output to each pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, game balls are stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 by rotating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 by the player. is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more the handle lever 504 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. That is, the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and game balls are placed on the obstacle nails. By coming into contact with the game ball, the speed at which the game ball flows down is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball hit to the top of the center role 2500 enters the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500 to the left of the highest portion in front view, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are generated. While contacting the center accessory 2500, it flows down in the left area. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500, it passes through the warp passage 2521 and passes through the center role. It is supplied to the stage 2530 through the guide path 2523 from the warp exit 2522 opening in the frame of 2500 .

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right to reach the central guide portion 2531 in the center in the left-right direction, or the side guide portions 2532 on the left and right of it. is emitted backward from either When the game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the central guiding portion 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so the game released from the central guiding portion 2531 The ball is accepted into the first launch port 2002 with high probability. When a game ball is received in this first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guiding portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. - 特許庁A game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the first big winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and will enter the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200. 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters (is hit) to the right of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center role 2500. ), and enters into the upper right circulation space 2541 of the right hitting game area 2540. In the upper right circulation space 2541, although not shown, a plurality of obstructing pegs are planted, and the game ball circulates while abutting against the obstructing pegs and variously changing its flowing direction. In this upper right circulation space 3541, a gate part 2003 is provided in the upper part, and a general prize winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 normally closed by a second starting opening door member 2549 are provided in the lower part.

The game ball flowing down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enters into the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right circulation passage 2542 on the downstream side. The game ball that has entered this lower right circulation space 2543 is the second upper big winning hole 2006a and the second lower big winning hole 2006b that are arranged side by side as the second big winning hole 2006. The upper surfaces of the door member 2552 and the second lower big prize opening door member 2555 pass through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and enter the game area 5a from the left end of the lowered release plate portion 2559 on the left side in front view. released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is open so that the game ball is directed to the first large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and when the first large winning opening 2005 is in the open state , When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the second attacker path 2543a, the game ball is accepted in the first big winning hole 2005 with a high probability.

A game ball that circulates in the right circulation path 2542 and the lower right circulation space 2543 flows down while an increase in circulation speed is suppressed by a plurality of deceleration ribs 2546 . In rare cases, in the lower right circulation space 2543, it may enter the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a. It is discharged outside the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right circulation space 2541 passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, normal random numbers are updated within a numerical range predetermined in the main control board 1310. A normal lottery is performed by obtaining one normal random number from among them and comparing the obtained normal random number with a predetermined normal winning determination table. If the result of this normal lottery is "normal hit" when the time saving control described later is not executed, the second start opening door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction in the front view to open the second start opening. 2004 is opened, and it is possible to accept game balls into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period of time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time-saving control is executed, a lottery is drawn to select which of the ``first normal win'', ``second normal win'', and ``third normal win'' as the ``normal win'' in the normal lottery. Then, when the time saving control is executed, the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is either "first normal win", "second normal win", or "third normal win". By rotating in the counterclockwise direction in the front view and opening the second start port 2004, the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 over a predetermined period. By rotating in the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting port 2004, the opening and closing control is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 times). In addition, when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "first ordinary hit", the second start port 2004 is in a state where it is possible to accept game balls 5 times "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", and "0.28 seconds" as the periods of five times when the second starting port 2004 is in a state capable of accepting game balls. , "0.3 seconds", and when the ordinary lottery result of the ordinary lottery is "third ordinary win", the second start port 2004 is set to a state where it is possible to accept game balls. The period is set to "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "second normal per" and "third normal "Hit" is a hit that is more advantageous to the player than the "first normal hit" (easy acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004). In addition, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. be.

In this embodiment, in the variable display of the normal symbols performed by the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbols are displayed after starting the variable display of the normal symbols. A certain amount of time (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time) is set until the stop display (until the normal lottery result is suggested). In the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. It should be noted that during the execution of the time-saving control to be described later, control is performed to shorten the normal fluctuation time more than normal (the state in which the time-saving control is not executed). In addition, the opening time to rotate the second starting port door member 2549 to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the game state, for example, time saving control is executed. You may make it change the opening time of the 2nd starting mouth 2004 to a long time compared with the case where time saving control is performed when there is nothing.

In addition, after the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, until the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device is stopped and displayed (until the result of the normal lottery is indicated), a new game ball is placed in the gate section. After passing through 2003, it is not possible to start the variable display of the normal symbols newly on the normal symbol display device, so the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is continued until the variable display of the previous normal symbols is completed (the result of the normal lottery). I'm trying to put it on hold until the suggestion ends). Specifically, the normal random number acquired by the main control board 1310 is stored based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate part 2003 by the gate sensor 2547, and the normal symbol fluctuation display can be started. The start of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended until. It should be noted that the number of normal random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 has an upper limit of 4, and any game balls that pass through the gate section 2003 are discarded without being held. . As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 updates the numerical range predetermined. One first special random number is obtained from one special random number, and the obtained first special random number is collated with a predetermined big hit determination table to provide an advantageous game state (for example, "big hit") that is advantageous to the player. , "small win", etc.) is performed. Then, based on the first special lottery result drawn, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink over a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds). After that, the first special lottery result The result of the first special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode corresponding to (displaying the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the first special lottery after the first special symbol is variably displayed). The results of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002 include "lose", "minor win", "2R big win", "8R big win", and "10R big win". By comparing the first special random number obtained with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which one of these, and after the jackpot game, it is normal (low probability state: in this example, the probability is about 1/395 Probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as probability variable state): winning a jackpot with a probability of about 1/44 in this example) to improve the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) rather than winning a jackpot) Whether to execute (whether it is a probability variable jackpot) and whether to execute time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time than usual when at least the first special lottery result is lost (whether it is a time saving jackpot) or) and the period for executing the time saving control (the number of times of time saving: special design (number of fluctuations of the first special design and the second special design)) is also discriminated. Incidentally, the winning probability of the "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

In addition, when the game ball accepted in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated within a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310 The second special random number is acquired, and the obtained second special random number is collated with a predetermined big hit determination table to create an advantageous game state (for example, "big win", "small win", etc.) that is advantageous to the player. ) is held for the results of the second special lottery. Then, based on the selected second special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink over a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) After the second special lottery result The result of the second special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying in a lighting mode corresponding to (displaying the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the second special lottery after the second special symbol is variably displayed). In addition, the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball in the second starting port 2004 includes "loss", "2R big win", "4R big win", "5R big win", "6R big win", There are ``7R jackpot'', ``8R jackpot'', and ``16R jackpot'', and by collating the acquired second special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which one of these, and furthermore, after the jackpot game, the normal ( Low probability state: probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as variable state) to improve the probability of winning a jackpot (winning probability) than the probability of winning a jackpot with a probability of about 1/395 in this example): this example Then you will win the jackpot with a probability of about 1/44) Whether to execute (whether it is a probability variable jackpot or not), and at least if the second special lottery result is lost Time saving control that shortens the fluctuation time than usual Whether or not (time saving state) is executed (whether it is a time saving jackpot) and the period for executing time saving control (number of times of time saving: special pattern (number of fluctuations of first special hitting pattern and second special pattern))) and also discriminate It is designed to be

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state , Eight LEDs of the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) after the elapse of a predetermined fluctuation time are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and then the first big winning opening Either of 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006 will be in a state in which a game ball can be received with a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is in the open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout board cause the payout device A predetermined number of game balls from 830 (for example, 11 when the game balls are received in the first big prize opening 2005, or 15 when the game balls are received in the second big prize opening 2006) is dispensed onto the upper tray 201 . Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are capable of accepting game balls, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 to accept the game balls, many games can be played. Balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is a "small win" or "2R big win", the first big winning hole 2005 holds the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). Repeat the open/close pattern multiple times (eg, twice) to reach an acceptable open state and then close. On the other hand, if the special lottery results are "4R big win", "5R big win", "6R big win", "7R big win", "8R big win", "10R big win", and "16R big win", the first big prize opening 2005 or the second large prize winning port 2006, after it becomes an open state capable of receiving a game ball, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or it is predetermined to the first large winning prize port 2005 Either the number (for example, 7) of game balls is accepted or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted to the second big winning hole 2006, and any condition is satisfied. , an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is called one round) in which the game ball is in a closed state, is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 4 rounds for a "4R big win", 5 rounds for a "5R big win", and 16 rounds for a "16R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is a "small hit" or "2R big win" (the first big winning opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) It is difficult to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 2005 substantially in the opening and closing pattern that closes after becoming an open state that can accept the game ball. On the other hand, the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery results are "4R big win", "5R big win", "6R big win", "7R big win", "8R big win", "10R big win" and "16R big win". (After the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 becomes an open state capable of receiving a game ball, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or the first big winning hole 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted into the second big winning port 2006 or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted to the second big winning opening 2006 When this condition is satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 in the open/close pattern that makes it impossible to accept the game ball. In addition, if the special lottery result is "4R big win", "5R big win", "6R big win", "7R big win", "8R big win", "10R big win", "16R big win", the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 becomes open to accept a game ball, or the first big winning opening 2005 is preliminarily determined. Either the number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted to the second big winning opening 2006, any condition is satisfied. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening and closing pattern in which the game ball is in a closed state that cannot be accepted may be used as a substantial special lottery result, and the number (for example, , 7) game balls are accepted or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are accepted into the second big winning hole 2006, or any condition is satisfied, the game balls are satisfied. and the opening/closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is a "small win" or "2R big win" (the first big prize winning opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds 0.6 seconds), it may be provided to execute a plurality of rounds. For example, as a special lottery result, "8R jackpot with real 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted into the first big winning hole 2005, or the second big winning hole 2006, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are accepted or any condition is satisfied, after repeating the open/close pattern four times to make the game ball unacceptable in a closed state, The opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (first big winning opening 2005 for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds), An opening/closing pattern that closes after being in an open state capable of accepting game balls) may be repeated four times.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second big prize opening 2006 is composed of a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b arranged side by side. In the case of "jackpot", for example, in the first round (1st round), the second upper big prize winning opening 2006a is opened to allow the reception of game balls, and is closed when the conditions for not accepting the game balls are satisfied, making it possible to accept the next game balls. Until (during the interval), the second lower big winning hole 2006b is opened to start the next round (2Rth) in which the game ball can be accepted, and when the second lower big winning hole 2006b becomes unacceptable, In the meantime, since the period of the interval has passed, the second upper big prize winning opening 2006a is opened again and the game ball can be received. Then, the second upper big prize winning opening 2006a and the second lower big winning prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are completed. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, either the second upper big winning hole 2006a or the second lower big winning hole 2006b can receive a game ball during the "jackpot". When the game ball is circulated in the second attacker passage 2543a by hitting right with , the game ball is surely accepted in the second big prize winning port 2006, and the game ball is not left out to entertain the player. can be done.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for some of the above-described multiple types of big wins, whether or not the time saving control is executed after the end of the big win game is differentiated according to the game state at the time of winning the big win. For example, when the result of the first special lottery is an 8R normal jackpot in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big win game in a non-time saving state (a state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big win game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game. When the result of the second special lottery is a 2R normal jackpot in which the probability improvement control is not executed after the big win game in a non-time saving state (a state where the time saving control is not executed), the time saving control is not executed after the big win game. On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery is the 2R normal jackpot in the time saving state (when the time saving control is being executed), the time saving control is executed after the big win game. In addition, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result in the low probability non-time-saving state (both probability improvement control and time-saving control are not executed: normal state) Execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game In the case of the 2R probability variable jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the 2R probability improvement control is executed after the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are big hits in a state other than the normal state where the probability improvement control is executed or the time reduction control is executed. In the case of a big hit, time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display device by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002, and the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004 The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the two special symbol display devices is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device by the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) Until the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is stopped and displayed (until the second special lottery result is suggested), the first start When a new game ball is received in the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device newly start the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Because it is not possible, the start of the fluctuation display of the special design (first special design, second special design) until the end of the fluctuation display of the previous special design (first special design, second special design) (first special lottery pending the completion of the results and the suggestion of the results of the second special draw). Specifically, the first special random number obtained by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted in the first starting hole 2002 by the first starting hole sensor 2104, and the second starting hole sensor 2551 The second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball accepted by the second start port 2004 is stored, and special symbols (first special symbol, second special The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbol) can be started. In addition, the first special random number and the second special random number holding number that can be stored in the main control board 1310 are respectively up to four, and more than that are used in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. A ball is accepted but discarded instead of being held. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings. Also, of the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310, the second special random number is preferentially digested. That is, regardless of the reception timing of the game ball to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the symbol.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is repeated lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs that constitute the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) for a predetermined time. The lights are blinked and then stopped in a predetermined lighting mode, and the special lottery result is suggested by the combination of the LEDs that are lit at the time of this stop.

On the other hand, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is displayed by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative pattern rows consisting of a plurality of different patterns are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern). The variable display of the decorative pattern rows is started, and then the display is stopped sequentially (in this example, the left decorative pattern → the right decorative pattern → the middle decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in order), and finally all the decorative pattern rows are stopped. When displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of symbols stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. In other words, according to the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) obtained when the start winning occurs, the plurality of decorative pattern rows fluctuate. After being displayed, an effect image is displayed that is stop-displayed so as to suggest the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). In addition, the decorative design displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special design variably displayed on the first special design display or the second special design variably displayed on the second special design display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decoration pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 .

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates to indicate the final image). is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the result of the special lottery by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center accessory 2500 and the rear left side are displayed according to the special lottery result of the lottery. Middle decoration unit 3050, back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back top middle movable production unit 3400, back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc. , luminous effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the decline of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[5. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. Specifically, system/user reset processing executed when the gaming machine is powered on, and timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 ms in this embodiment) by a timer activated by the system/user reset processing. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure of initialization processing of the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, thereby enabling writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and "03H" indicating activation of the watchdog timer is written. Furthermore, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after turning on the power of the game machine 1 until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure notice voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit A blackout warning signal is input from In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the process is made to wait for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) while activating the watchdog timer.

If the predetermined wait time has passed, the time required for starting the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) has passed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). . When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the role product ratio calculation work area (the role product ratio calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30 ) and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power failure flag has been set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag that is set when power to the gaming machine 1 is shut off after normal processing such as when a power failure occurs (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. S30) and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48 The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may not be correct. (other than the character product ratio calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. proceed to

Subsequently, using the check code, it is determined whether or not the work area for character product ratio calculation (area for character product ratio calculation 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the role product ratio calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the role product ratio calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In addition, when one or more backup areas are provided in the character product ratio calculation area 13128, first, the main area is determined using a check code, and if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, the backup area 1 , 2, and N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal should be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area can be erased or left as is. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

As for the area for calculating the role product ratio, the data in the area for calculating the role product ratio 13128 may be erased at predetermined time intervals, separately from the check code determination result when the power is turned on. In addition, for each predetermined amount of operation (for example, each predetermined number of shot balls, each predetermined number of winning balls, each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) Data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

Thus, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are different for each type of data (the game control data 13132 and the character ratio calculation/display data 13136). Erase conditionally. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed up character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased. If the role product ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the role product ratio calculated by the gaming machine 1 can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased, thereby preventing the erasure of the character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall staff. , It is possible to prevent the concealment of an abnormal state of the character ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled to have a high or low accessory ratio.

The main control MPU 1311 executes initial setting for setting various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when power recovery setting of the RAM work area or RAM initialization processing is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, the initial setting of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) is performed and interrupts are permitted. In addition, the serial communication port and test signal output port are initialized. Start the hardware random number generator. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951 and the character product ratio display 1317 is set. Furthermore, after starting the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114, initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 is performed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes processing for setting a power-on command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command generation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . A power-on command is generated by setting the power-on state reference command as reference command data and adding command addition data corresponding to the command to be generated.

The power-on command includes a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol/electric accessory operation number command. The state buffer command at power-on is a command for notifying the game state at the time of restoration after power-off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the normal electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol/electric accessary product operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). Initial setting of the game machine 1 is completed by the processing from power-on of the game machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal (step S36), and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure warning signal is not ON (result of step S38 is "No"), that is, random number update processing is executed (step S40). In the random number update process of step S46, random numbers other than the random numbers for judging wins are mainly updated in the special lottery and the ordinary lottery. Note that random number update processing for judging winning in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery is executed by timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure warning signal is detected, and these processes are defined as the main control side main process (normal means after initial setting).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes power failure processing (power failure setting means). In the power failure process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the power failure occurred is executed. Specifically, first, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, and writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 is prevented, thereby protecting game information from being rewritten. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the devices controlled by the outputs from each port (step S44). Specifically, power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set in the solenoid/power failure clear/ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared, and for example, output ports for controlling solenoids and motors that consume a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption during the time until the main-board-side power-off process is completed, and to reliably complete the main-board-side power-off process.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up has been normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal.

Subsequently, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the role product ratio calculation work area (the role product ratio calculation area 13128) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, there is no need to calculate the check code in step S50. It should be noted that the check code may be calculated and stored each time the data is updated in the character product ratio calculation/display process instead of the main board power-off process.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the character product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the role product ratio calculation work (area for role product ratio calculation 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be performed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) in the role product ratio calculation/display process instead of the process when the power is turned off on the main board side.

By storing the data used for calculating the character ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code in this way, the data for calculating the character ratio can be retained even when the power is cut off. , the function ratio in long-term operation can be calculated.

Further, a value indicating normal backup is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register, writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S58), and the system waits until recovery from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization processing shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 . FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 to the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the registers (step S70). The main control board 1310 in this embodiment has bank 0 and bank 1, which are switched each time timer interrupt processing is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect game balls that have entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent behavior using a magnet, and prize ball control processing. The payout control board 951 notifying that the payout control board 951 has received the prize ball command sent in , respectively, is read from the payout control board 951 and stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, in the switch input process, detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the fired ball sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out balls is counted.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs timer update processing (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol indicator 1185 lights up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process to be described later, the normal determined by the normal symbol and normal electric auditors control process In addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the symbol variation display pattern, the payout control board 951 normally receives various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). Time management such as ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not an ACK signal is input is performed. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes random number update processing 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the random number for judging a big hit, the random number for a big hit design, and the random number for a small hit design are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the small hit, which are updated in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S50 in the system/user reset process (main process on the main control side) shown in the figure, The random number for design initial value determination is also updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312 . In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created, and a self-check for confirming the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is performed. create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, (see FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped when there are no prize balls to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes frame command reception processing (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 as output information. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 formats the normally received command as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, frame status display command, error cancellation notification command, etc.), and transmits the above-mentioned transmission as transmission information. Store in the information storage area. Also, in the prize ball discharge process, the number of prize ball discharges is recorded in the storage area (see FIG. 27) determined by the gaming state of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 .

The character ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the character ratio calculation/display process (step S89). .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes fraud detection processing (step S84). In the fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when it is detected that the game ball is entering the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 by the count switch when it is not in the jackpot game state, the main control program creates a prize-winning abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the above-described transmission information storage area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process, it is determined whether or not the random number value for the big hit matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Furthermore, based on the jackpot symbol random number value, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. Then, when the variable probability transition condition is established, the state is shifted to the probability variable state thereafter, and when the variable probability transition condition is not established, the state is shifted to a game state other than the probability variable state. Here, the "variable probability state" refers to a state (high probability state) in which the odds of winning the special lottery are set relatively higher than in the normal game state (low probability state).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the random number for normal symbol per determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal per symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (" “General Lottery”). Then, it is determined whether or not to open and close the second starting port door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the ordinary lottery. When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the second start opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the start winning opening 2004 becomes a game state in which game balls can be accepted, which is advantageous for the player. Move to game state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the role ratio calculation/display processing (FIGS. 24 and 25) , and refers to the number of prize balls stored in the area 13128 for calculating the role ratio to calculate the role ratio. Then, the calculated role product ratio is displayed on the role product ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, the character ratio calculation/display process is called in the timer interrupt processing to calculate the character ratio, so that the character ratio (gambling property of the gaming machine 1) based on the most recent data can be confirmed.

Regardless of whether or not the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated, if the body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the role ratio is displayed. may Also, when the main body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, and the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the role ratio display 1317 displays the role ratio. may be displayed. Since the role ratio display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, if the role ratio display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped. is doing. In this way, when the role ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division or subtraction for calculating the role ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

Details of the character product ratio calculation/display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25 . A specific example of the display method of the character product ratio will be described later. In addition, when the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (the role ratio, continuous role ratio, total, total total) may be calculated. Only the displayed value may be calculated for each operation. In addition, the role ratio is calculated regardless of whether the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and if the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated role ratio is displayed on the role ratio display 1317. may be displayed.

Note that even when the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and stops the game, the role product ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the role product ratio calculation/display process (step S89) are executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, by executing these processes, it is possible to check the role product ratio even during the fraud notification.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1311 . For example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, when normally receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 output the main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or jackpot game When it is in the state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that performs opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the large winning opening 2005, 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that performs the opening and closing operation of the starting opening (second starting opening door member 2549), information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output Various information (game information) signals related to games such as signals, information output information during time saving, start winning prize information output signals, etc. are output to the payout control board 951.

Also, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal plate 784. FIG. For example, a pulse signal of a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 every predetermined number of out balls (10, etc.).

Also, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to an inspection device connected to the gaming machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a special symbol stop symbol (information signal output means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information stores various commands created in the timer interrupt processing of this routine. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation processing of the role ratio and the continuous role ratio in the timer interrupt process. You may perform the calculation process of a material ratio. In this case, the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be sent a command for displaying the role ratio and the continuous role ratio, or from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511 A command for displaying the character product ratio or the continuous character product ratio may be transmitted.

[5-3. Character ratio calculation/display processing]
FIGS. 24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of character product ratio calculation/display processing. The main control MPU 1311 executes the role product ratio calculation/display processing. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the character product ratio calculation/display processing. When the peripheral controller 1511 calculates the character product ratio, the calculated character product ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 . For example, if the calculated accessory ratio is within (or outside) a predetermined range, the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the role product ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the notice effect may be changed to perform a notice effect that is more interesting than the normal notice effect.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is compared with the check code stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is normal, so the role product ratio calculation process is executed, and the role is calculated from the data in the main area. The product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated and stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the character ratio is calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls, and the ratio by the number of continuous acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls. It is preferable to truncate or round off the decimal part (value below the decimal point) of the calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S156, each time the character product ratio and/or the continuous character product ratio in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 is updated, the updated value may be copied to the backup area.

If the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, in the calculation of the character ratio, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted and division is performed. may be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, numerical values from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8- or 16-bit calculations, the lowest 16 bits of the number of winning balls stored in 32 bits with a value of 1 is taken out and calculated. It is preferable to divide by storing in a register (16 bits). If the number of acquired balls is less than the maximum number of bits (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits) that can be used for calculation, the lower 16 bits should be taken out and used for calculation.

Also, if the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100 (rounded down after the decimal point) and used as the dividend (divided number) to calculate the character ratio, calculation using decimal numbers can be avoided.

Also, the upper limit of the character product ratio may be set to 99, and may be set to 99 when the calculation result of the character product ratio is 100 or more.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, so calculation of the character product ratio from the data in the backup area 1 is performed. try. Specifically, the check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128. (step S146). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148 ), a role product ratio calculation process is executed, and a role product ratio and a continuous role product ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code does not match the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, so the character product ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. try. Specifically, the check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128. (step S152). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, so the data in the backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154 ), a role product ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read, and the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

If there is another backup area, similarly, it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all the backup areas are abnormal, the character product ratio calculation work area (character product ratio calculation area 13128) is initialized, and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the role product ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The reason why the check code is calculated in the character ratio calculation/display process is that if it is reset in the middle of the power failure process on the main board side, the power failure flag and checksum are not calculated. Although the backed-up data is initialized, if the check code is calculated and stored periodically in the character ratio calculation/display process, the work area for calculating the character ratio can be saved even if the pachinko machine is turned on again. This is because the data in (character product ratio calculation area 13128) can be left without being erased.

Subsequently, the backup area allocation counter value is updated by adding 1 (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area allocation counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area allocation counter value is an odd number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). It is possible to prevent an abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas by distributing the copy destinations of the data in the main area according to the backup area distribution counter value and writing the data only to a part of the backup areas.

When three or more backup areas are provided, the backup areas to which data is written may be allocated according to the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area allocation counter value by the number of backup areas.

Subsequently, the calculated role product ratio is displayed on the role product ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of role product ratio and the calculated value, a conversion table (not shown) is referenced to obtain data to be displayed on each digit of the role product ratio display 1317, The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the character product ratio display 1317 . For example, if the type of role product ratio is the role product ratio (total), A7 is displayed in the upper two digits, and if the calculated role product ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

The role ratio calculation process (step S156) of the role ratio calculation/display process reads out the data of the number of obtained balls from the role ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the role ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 27). , Data cannot be written in the storage area related to the number of winning balls in the role product ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processing of steps S156 and S172 is configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the character ratio calculation area 13128. , data can be written in the storage area of the calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio.

As described above, the data for calculating the character product ratio in the character product ratio calculation/display process is duplicated in the backup area. The data for calculating the material ratio can be protected.

It should be noted that the processes of steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of gaming machine, and thus may be configured with one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code in the main area and the check code in the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the data check and backup methods differ from model to model. However, if the data check and backup methods are shared among the models, they may be arranged in a common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. FIG.

ROM 1313 contains game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debugging (inspection function) code 13133, debugging (inspection function) data 13134, character ratio calculation/display code 13135, and character ratio calculation/display An area for storing data 13136 is included. The ROM 1313 of this embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the game machine 1 such as game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. Debugging (checking function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (checking function) of game machine 1, such as debug (checking function) data 13134 and a role product ratio calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for the purpose of calculating the role product ratio, such as the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 and the role product ratio calculation/display data 13136. is assigned.

Between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the top address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, there is provided an empty area of 16 bytes or more, and when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area and It can be easily distinguished from the debug (inspection function) area. Similarly, between the final address of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 and the leading address of the character product ratio calculation/display code 13135, there is a free area of 16 bytes or more, which is displayed in dump list format. In this case, the debug (inspection function) area and the character product ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. The value stored in the empty area should be the same fixed value, and may be set to a value different from or less frequently set to the value set in the game area and the debug area. In this way, when displayed in the form of a dump list, the game control area, debug (inspection function) area, and role product ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Also, the code 13135 for character ratio calculation/display and the data for character ratio calculation/display 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without dividing the debug (inspection function) area and the character material ratio calculation area. good. That is, it is sufficient if the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, the character ratio calculation area (the character ratio calculation/display code 13135 and character object The ratio calculation/display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that a malfunction (such as a bug) of the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 affects the game control.

The debug (inspection function) area stores programs and data for purposes not directly related to the game. A code for outputting an inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) codes are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. Further, the role product ratio calculation area stores a program for the purpose of calculating the role product ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game.

Also, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311 . In addition, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read and written in the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be performed. Thus, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area accessible only from the game control code 13131 . The processing based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed during the execution of the game control code 13131, but the game control code 13131 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the modification of the debugging (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. .

Also, the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of timer interrupt processing) and executed by the main control MPU 1311 . The character product ratio calculated by the character product ratio calculation/display code is stored in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 . As illustrated, the role product ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game area). Thus, by designing the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 is inspected and the game control code 13131 is stored. can be performed separately from the inspection of the game machine 1, and the labor for the inspection of the game machine 1 can be reduced. In addition, the code 13135 for calculating/displaying the role product ratio can be used in common for a plurality of models without depending on the model.

FIG. 26B is a diagram showing details of the character product ratio calculation area 13128. As shown in FIG. The character product ratio calculation area 13128 may include a main area for storing the calculation result of the character product ratio, and a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 for storing a copy of the data stored in the main area. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set each time the data in the main area is updated in the character ratio calculation/display process, or is set in the process when the power is turned off on the main control side (Fig. 22, steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power failure process (step S50 in FIG. 20). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Also, if the power failure flag is set to a predetermined value, it may be determined that the check code of each area has a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

Incidentally, if it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether or not the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Also, in the main control side power-off process, the values in the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Also, in the role product ratio calculation/display process, every time the value in the main area is updated, the updated data may be copied to the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

Unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2 . By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digits of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128. As shown in FIG. The data of the number of winning balls in the character ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) clocked by the main control MPU 1311, and the character ratio calculation processing (step in FIG. 24) of the character ratio calculation/display processing S156). In this way, the role ratio calculation/display process reads out the data of the number of acquired balls from the area 13128 for calculating the role ratio, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) stores the data of the number of acquired balls in the area 13128 for calculating the role ratio. By writing , the game control program and the program for calculating and displaying the character ratio can be completely separated, and the program for calculating and displaying the character ratio can be shared even on amusement machines with different specifications. .

Note that the character product ratio calculation processing (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the character product ratio calculation/display processing uses the calculated character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio as the character product ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the character product ratio calculation area 13128. Write to the ratio storage area. Data of the calculated character ratio and continuous character ratio are read in the character ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the character ratio calculation/display process when displaying the character ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio of the role product ratio calculation area 13128 .

FIG. 27A shows the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(A), the number of winning ball, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the ratio of the winning role, and the ratio of the continuous winning role are stored. The number of prize balls obtained is the number of prize balls obtained by winning prizes for the prizes in operation (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 that are open, the second start opening 2004 that the second start opening door member 2549 is open). be. The number of consecutive award winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize to a role while the role is continuously operating (for example, the winning opening is open during a series of jackpot wins). The total number of won balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The role ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls. The continuous role ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of balls acquired in a row divided by the total number of acquired balls. The number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt process, Stored.

Among the structure of the work area shown in FIG. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numeric values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data will not be erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is provided so that long-term data can be stored. Also, the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of successive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are stored. Each data storage area is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n=10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls). When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers for all the data are moved, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After the data for the predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (number of acquired balls, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol variation display games, number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, You may move the write pointer.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings are moved for each predetermined number of winning balls. Further, the read pointer also moves along with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer points to the storage area one before the write pointer. This is for calculating the character ratio using the most recent data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer. Yes, when the ring buffer is cycled and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the role ratio and continuous role ratio calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data after the ring buffer completes one cycle, the total accumulated value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(B), the number of winning character balls, the number of consecutive winning ball, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are the same as those explained in FIG. 27(A). The number of other won balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning prizes other than accessories (a winning opening that does not open and close, for example, the general winning opening 2001). The total number of won balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. The number of acquired balls, the number of other acquired balls, the number of continuous acquired balls, and the total number of acquired balls are updated in the storage area where the write pointer is located in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the percentage of the acquired role and the number of continuous winning balls are updated. The product ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 27C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), it is possible to obtain more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 27(B). , Other winning hole winning ball number, continuous role winning ball number, total winning ball number, role ratio and continuous role ratio are stored. Each data storage area is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of winning balls is When the predetermined number (6000) is reached, the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. After the data for the predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when data other than the total number of acquired balls (number of special electric accessory acquired balls, number of fired balls, number of winning balls, number of special symbol variation display games, number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number You may move the write pointer to

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer. When the ring buffer is cycled and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous component ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIGS. 27(B) and (C), the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, and the normal electric winning balls Each of the number, the number of winning balls for the special electric accessory, the number of winning balls for the starting opening, and the number of winning openings is a storage area of 2 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 65,535 in decimal. Number of winning balls, number of other winning balls, number of continuous winning balls, total number of winning balls, number of normal electric winning balls, number of special electric winning balls, number of starting balls and other winning balls The cumulative total of numbers is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the sum of data for 6000 prize balls×n (60000 prize balls when n=10), a large storage area is provided. Number of acquired balls, number of other acquired balls, number of continuous acquired balls, total number of acquired balls, ratio of role, ratio of continuous roles, number of normal electric accessories acquired, number of special electric accessories acquired, starting point The number of winning balls and the total cumulative number of winning balls are each a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16,777,215 or 4,294,967,295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not deleted unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is provided so that long-term data can be stored. Also, the sum total and total sum of the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are each a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27(C), the total acquired number of balls, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio are the same as those explained in FIG. 27(B). The number of other winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning prizes other than accessories (a winning opening that does not open and close). The number of winning balls of the normal electric accessory is the prize ball obtained by winning the normal electric accessory in operation (the second start port 2004 with the second start port door member 2549 open) according to the result of the lottery based on the normal pattern. is a number. The number of winning balls of the special electric role is the number of prize balls obtained by winning the special electric role in operation (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 that are open) according to the result of the special symbol lottery. The number of starting winning balls is the number of winning balls obtained by winning the starting winning opening (first starting opening 2002). The number of other prize-winning balls is the number of prize-winning balls obtained by winning a prize in a prize gate (general prize gate 2001) that is not an accessory (does not operate) and does not trigger a special symbol lottery. The number of normal electric accessory winning balls, the number of special electric accessory winning balls, the number of starting opening winning balls, the number of other winning opening winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls are obtained in step S81 of timer interrupt processing. The data in the storage area with the write pointer is updated, and the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of timer interrupt processing.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27A, when the stored value is determined to be abnormal, the data in the role product ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. Data will not be erased on the occasion of Therefore, the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 may be erased for each predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total accumulation in FIGS. 25B and 25C may be erased every predetermined period.

Also, the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated character product ratio is an abnormal value (for example, the character product ratio is over 100%, the calculation result of the character product ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculation value , the number of winning balls>total number of winning balls, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. All the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted in addition to the abnormal value. In addition, when the data in the character product ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated character product ratio is an abnormal value, an abnormality may be notified. Also, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the character product ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Configuration of character ratio indicator]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the character product ratio display 1317. As shown in FIG.

The character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172 . For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 consists of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are preferably housed in one package as a unit, but both may be housed in separate packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the character ratio display 1317 and signals for setting the operating state of the character ratio display 1317 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311 . The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating data loading timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311 . The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operating cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311 .

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals for lighting each LED element (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7 segment LED 13172 . The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit control signals indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 the signals transmitted by the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp are. The direction of the illustrated signal (current) differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is of the anode common type or the cathode common type, but an example of the anode common type is illustrated.

The R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171 is connected to a resistor 13174 that determines the current value to be passed through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 . By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the light emission brightness of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio indicator 1317. As shown in FIG.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A-D, an 8x4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2x8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, a driver 3179, It has a latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 , a Digit-Limit controller 3181 , a duty ratio controller 3182 , a data selector controller 3183 , a standby mode controller 3184 and an oscillator 3185 .

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16-bit data, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. The 4 bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 35), and the 4 bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting the operation mode and the corresponding register. (see FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are data for the detailed settings.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and D15 to D8 are controlled by each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section 3183, standby mode control section 3184), and send D7-D0 to 8-bit data latches 3173A-D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rise timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control section (latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control section 3181, duty ratio control section 3182, data selector control section 3183, standby mode control section 3184). Also, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at the fall timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 . A latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects an 8-bit data latch 3173 that stores display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180 selects data register 0, that is, the 8-bit Digit-A Signals to select 8-bit data latch 3173 so that data latch 3173A stores data.

The 8-bit data latches 3173 are provided for the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector/load pulse distributor 3180, take in the data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED, Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8×4 data selector 3174 .

The 8×4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D at the predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends it to the decoder 3175 and 2×8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses the character generator decode table (see FIG. 34) to convert the input data into characters to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to 2×8 data selector 3176 .

The 2×8 data selector 3176 refers to the decode setting and selects the data from the decoder 3175 when the mode is set to use the decoder, and selects the data from the decoder 3175 when the mode is set to not use the decoder. 4 Select data from data selector 3174 . The selected data is input to constant current driver 3178 .

The constant current driver 3178 uses data from the 2×8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. The current output from constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal, as described above.

Driver 3179 accepts a sink current of the current output from constant current driver 3178 to illuminate each segment of seven segment LED 13172 . Driver 3179 controls the current sink timing of terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3 to determine which 7-segment LED (digit) to display.

Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by driver circuit 13171 . That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of digits to be lit from 1 to 4 by external setting. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to XXXXXX0011B, a setting is made to use all four digits in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. is written. Note that x indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio control section 3182 controls the duty ratio when the 7-segment LED 13172 is lit. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by external setting, and controls the brightness with which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights. The duty ratio control section 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179 . Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 00100000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 can be set to 16 stages of duty from 0/16 to 15/16. Ratio settings are written.

A data selector control unit 3183 controls the setting of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not the decoder 3175 is used by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001××××B, the settings for using the decoder are written to the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000××. By inputting the data of XXB, the NO DECODER setting that does not use the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select the data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and controls the 2×8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to not be used. It controls the x8 data selector 3176 to select data from the 8x4 data selector 3174 .

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls standby mode setting and data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by external setting. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In the standby mode, the setting at that time is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is interrupted, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

In addition, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all data held therein by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all data held in registers and latches are cleared and initialized.

Oscillator 3185 generates the clocks used within driver circuit 13171 .

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIG. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is indicated by solid lines, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is indicated by dotted lines.

FIG. 31(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of the implementation example 1. FIG. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without being destroyed once closed. (sticker, engraving, printing, etc.) or tamper seal is attached. The unsealed seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310 .

Mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In implementation example 1, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1311 is preferably mounted such that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in a main control board box 1320 and constitutes a main control unit 1300 . The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that it has not been improperly remodeled. Moreover, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that it has not been improperly remodeled by arranging no parts around it.

The character ratio indicator 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the character ratio indicator 1317 should be the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the model number display of 1320 on the main control board box. Moreover, it is preferable to mount so that the longitudinal direction of the character ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same. In addition, when the main control board 1310 is mounted in the game machine in a landscape orientation, the longitudinal direction of the character ratio display 1317 or the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are the same. It is preferable to implement the character ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so that it becomes. In addition, when the main control board 1310 is installed in a game machine in a portrait orientation, the longitudinal direction of the character ratio display 1317 or the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are at 90 degrees. It is preferable to implement the character ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to be oriented.

Connectors CN1 and CN2 for drawing out signal lines from the main control board 1310 have ends along the long sides of the main control board 1310 (upper side Although it is the upper end along the side, it may be mounted on the lower end along the lower long side or the end along the left and right sides). That is, the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the character ratio display 1317, and it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged at a position where the character ratio display 1317 is not obstructed. .

Furthermore, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached to a position that does not overlap with either the main control MPU or the character ratio indicator 1317 .

By mounting the character ratio display 1317 in this way, the model number display of the character ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct direction, and the visibility of these is improved. Even in the inspection after installation, it is possible to check the ratio of accessories and whether or not the main control MPU 1311 has been modified without taking an unreasonable posture.

In another implementation example shown in FIG. 31(C), the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display of the character ratio display 1317 are mounted in the same direction, but circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 The orientation of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the orientation of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display of the character ratio indicator 1317 . Also, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the unsealing sticker attached to the main control board box 1320 . This is because the importance of circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 is low when inspecting unauthorized modification, so there is little significance in arranging them in the same orientation on the main control board 1310 .

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the character ratio indicator 1317. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 32A, the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may become unstable due to noise. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 as close as possible.

For example, as illustrated, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio indicator 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101 L1) arranged to be shorter. That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

Also, as described above, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311, as indicated by the dotted line, in order to easily confirm from the outside that no inappropriate modifications have been made. For this reason, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but the length L2 is made as short as possible.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or in different packages, and in either case, they are mounted such that L1 is greater than L2.

FIG. 32(B) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the character ratio indicator 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 32(C) is a diagram showing the implementation example shown in FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a printed circuit board; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 32B, ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the character ratio display 1317 . Furthermore, on the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 where no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and inner layer of the signal line 13101 . It is preferable to provide a ground pattern 13107 as a guard pattern or a power supply pattern on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106 .

To explain the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13103 that supplies the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 should avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 placed so that they do not cross). Also, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the rear surface or the inner layer through the through hole 13105 . In this case as well, the signal line 13104 is arranged to avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not cross each other).

In addition, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board having patterns on the front and back sides and no inner layer. It can also be applied to multi-layer substrates (4-layer, 6-layer, etc.) having inner layers.

FIG. 33 shows a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171. As shown in FIG.

A load register selection table is a table for determining a register for storing data input to the driver circuit 13171 .

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by duty ratio control section 3182 to set the duty ratio for lighting 7 segment LED 13172 . For example, when D15-D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7-D0 is data for setting the duty ratio and is written to the duty register of the duty ratio control section 3182. FIG.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181 to set the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence/absence of decoding and the number of display digits. The decode register and the number of digits register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence/absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits. It is written to the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181 .

The data registers are used by 8-bit data latches 3173A-D to set the data to be displayed on each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172. For example, if D15-D8 are 00100010B-00100101B, the data set in D7-D0 is data for turning on the 7-segment LEDs and is written to the data registers in the 8-bit data latches 3173A-D.

The duty ratio, the presence/absence of decoding, and the number of display digits, which are set in the registers described above, do not need to be set every time the character ratio is displayed. is set as Note that if the setting is made only once in the initial setting, there is a possibility that the setting will be changed due to the influence of noise after the initial setting. is pressed). As a result, correct display can always be performed even if the settings are switched due to noise.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decode table. The character generator decode table is used by decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data for display on 7-segment LED 13172 . By using the character generator decode table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. When displaying numbers, since D5 to D0 match the numbers to be displayed, the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 without conversion.

The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states: an initial state, a data input state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (all lighting). is prepared.

To control these five states, there are mode setting instructions for blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby. A blank command shuts off the output of constant current driver 3178 and the output of driver 3179 . The normal operation command causes the 7-segment LED 13172 to display after completing each setting. When a normal operation command is input without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of digits to be used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. D11 to D8 select a register into which data is to be written, and D7 to D0 input contents to be set in the register (see FIG. 33). The all lighting command turns on the output of the data side constant current driver 3178 to light all segments of the 7 segment LED 13172 . Standby instructions are divided into two types according to parameters: a standby instruction for transitioning to a standby state and a clear instruction for transitioning to an initial state. The standby command maintains the current settings, stops the operation of the constant current drivers 3178 and 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. A clear command clears and initializes all data held in registers and latches, and turns off the display.

Note that the blank command is also a kind of display command, so in this specification, "display" includes any state of full lighting of the 7-segment LEDs, lighting of some segments, and complete extinguishing of the segments.

A display example in each state described above will be described with reference to FIG.

When the game machine is powered on, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 is not completed or the display data is not set, so the initial state (ALL BLANK) is present. All segments of are turned off. Also, when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game can be played, the character ratio indicator 1317 cannot be visually recognized.

After initial setting is completed by setting control data in various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 , when display data is input, a predetermined display is performed on the 7-segment LED 13172 . As for this predetermined display, as shown in FIG. 36(B), "-" may be displayed in all digits or all segments may be lit. It is preferable that the normal operation of the character product ratio display 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

Further, when the body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that the character product ratio display 1317 can be confirmed to be operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be illuminated.

Then, when the character product ratio display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED lighting state (lighting according to the input data) occurs. Specifically, the character product ratio display state is entered, a code indicating the display content is displayed on the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and the value of the character product ratio is displayed on the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36(C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the character ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, when the displayed character product ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display the fact so as to be identifiable. For example, all digits (or numbers) are displayed by blinking, or the decimal point is lit or blinked.

Furthermore, when the character ratio display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display contents of the 7-segment LED 13172 are changed. In other words, another kind of character product ratio is displayed. Also in this case, the left two digits indicate the code indicating the display content, and the right two digits indicate the value of the character ratio. In the example shown in FIG. 36(D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the character ratio 2 is 63%. Also in this case, similarly to the above, it is preferable to provide a display that allows the user to identify that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range. A more specific display example of the character product ratio will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the character ratio display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is preferable to turn off the lights to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This character product ratio non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed, but may be a different aspect as long as it can be distinguished from the character product ratio display.

FIG. 36(E) is a display example when the character ratio indicator 1317 or the main control MPU 1311 has an abnormality and the character ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be illuminated, blinked, or displayed differently for each digit. Also, the abnormal display may be in a form different from that illustrated, as long as it is distinguishable from the normal character product ratio display in order to indicate that the character product ratio display is not possible.

In addition, when an all-lighting command is input in any state, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit. In addition, when a blank command or a standby command is input in any state, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are extinguished while retaining data. In addition, when a data clear command is input in any state, all the data held in the registers and latches are cleared, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit, and the state returns to the initial state.

[8. Display of character ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the character product ratio will be described.

As described above, the character ratio is displayed on the character ratio display 1317 provided on the main control board 1310 . As described above, the character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal display device. display.

Also, the character ratio indicator 1317 may be composed of a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, it is preferable to alternately display the value of the role product ratio and the type of the value.

The display mode of the numerical value of the role product ratio may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the result of comparison between the role product ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the role product ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (green when normal, red when exceeding the reference value, etc.). By changing the display mode according to the result of comparison with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the character ratio is abnormal.

The character ratio indicator 1317 may be composed of one or more LED lamps. When the character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of one LED lamp, the result of comparison between the character ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in different modes. For example, when the character product ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and when the character product ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. Also, when the role product ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is lit, and when the role product ratio is larger than the reference threshold value, it is displayed by blinking.

When the character ratio indicator 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the character ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the character ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are lit. In this case, it may be displayed in different display modes (display colors) depending on the display contents (character ratio or continuous character ratio, recent data display or mid-term data display, etc.).

In addition, if the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the period for collecting prize ball data is short, and the value of the character ratio may not have converged, so it is displayed in a different display mode (display color, blinking, etc.) You may It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is less than the threshold is different from the display mode when the total number of acquired balls exceeds the above-described reference value.

The character product ratio display 1317 may display the latest data, the medium-term data, and the long-term data by switching. The most recent data display is the role product ratio calculated using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27(B) and (C). The medium-term data display is the role product ratio calculated using the cumulative sum in the ring counters shown in FIGS. 27(B) and (C). The long-term data display is the character product ratio calculated using the total sum in the ring counters shown in FIGS. 27(B) and (C).

The function display unit 1400 may also be used as the character ratio indicator 1317 . The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the character ratio. Although the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the body frame 4, it is preferable to continue the progress of the game. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the character product ratio display to the display of the game state. For example, when the body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variation display game, the character ratio is displayed, but if the body frame 4 is closed before the variation time elapses, the variation display for the remaining time can be performed. can. Since the special pattern displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative pattern stops at the timing when the special pattern variable display of the function display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the character ratio, it can be configured so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

The character product ratio display 1317 may display other than the character product ratio. For example, the number of winnings per type of winning opening per unit time and the number of winning balls paid out may be displayed. The unit time may be switched between 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, 10 hours, etc. by operating the character ratio display switch 1318 and displayed.

The character ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the normal ball output rate excluding special prizes (during big hits), and can be calculated by dividing the number of safe balls by the number of out balls. The number of shot balls (number of out balls) is detected by a shot ball sensor 1020 . As described above, the shot ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exit (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game ball from the ball launcher to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Also, the number of out balls may be detected by the discharged ball sensor 3060 . As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In addition, an out-hole passing ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) is provided to detect game balls passing through an out-hole 1111 provided in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the number of game balls detected by the out-hole passing ball sensor 1021, The number of out balls may be detected based on the sum of the number of game balls detected by the starting opening sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by various winning opening sensors 3015 , 2114 , 2554 and 2557 . Further, a ball sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball supplied to the ball launching device 680, and a game ball (so-called foul ball) that has been launched from the ball launching device 680 but has not reached the game area 5a. A foul ball sensor (not shown) that detects is provided, and the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) is calculated by subtracting the number of foul balls from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launching device 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor. may be detected.

The number of out balls may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient to provide either the discharged ball sensor 3060 or the fired ball sensor 1020 among the illustrated sensors.

Also, the number of safe balls is equal to the number of awarded balls. Also, the base may be defined as the ball output rate for each game state (during normal play, during power supply, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and calculated by the number of safe balls / the number of out balls for each game state. . By displaying the base on the role ratio indicator 1317, it is possible to check the deviation of the ball putting performance from the design value during operation for each game machine on the spot. In addition, since the ball-putting performance can be confirmed without using a hole controller, inspection of each game machine can be easily performed during an on-site inspection of the game arcade.

The character ratio indicator 1317 displays information on other prizes and prize balls of the base (the number of prizes won to the general prize gate 2001 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, the number of prizes to the start prize gate 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the prize) , the number of winnings to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the number of winning balls due to the winning, etc.) may be displayed.

The character ratio display 1317 may always display the character ratio, or may display the character ratio by operating the character ratio display switch 1318 . For example, when the role ratio display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the role ratio is started, and the display is turned off after being displayed for a predetermined period of time. When the main body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, and the character ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the character ratio display 1317 displays the character ratio. You may That is, even if the character ratio display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is open, the character ratio display 1317 does not display the character ratio.

In addition, the display contents may be changed for each operation of the role product ratio display switch 1318 . For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the character ratio display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the character ratio (total), is displayed in the upper two digits, and a predetermined number (eg, 60,000) of prize balls is displayed. The ratio of characters to is displayed in the last two digits. When the character ratio display switch 1318 is operated again, the display of the upper two digits switches to A6, which means the continuous character ratio (total), and the continuous character ratio for a predetermined number (eg, 60000) of prize balls. may be displayed in the last two digits (FIG. 37(B)). Furthermore, when the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the role ratio (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the upper two digits, and the role ratio according to the latest data is displayed in the lower two digits (latest data display) (FIG. 37(C)). When the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated again, the display of the upper two digits switches to y6, which means the role ratio (total), and the role ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is lowered. It may be displayed in two digits (mid-term data display) (Fig. 37(D)).

The role item ratio display switch 1318 may be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510 without being provided as an independent switch. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as the character ratio display switch 1318 when operated during operation of the gaming machine 1 . By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the role item ratio display switch 1318 into one switch, only one switch is operated by the staff of the game arcade, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the gaming machine in operation, and to check the gambling nature of the gaming machine in operation.

In addition, since the data of the number of winning balls is accumulated as the character ratio calculation/display data 13136, and the check code is abnormal, the character ratio calculation/display data 13136 is erased, so that an incorrect character ratio is displayed. can be avoided.

In addition, since the data 13136 for calculating and displaying the character ratio is erased under conditions other than the conditions for erasing the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the accurate number of prize balls is retained. , can calculate the exact role ratio.

In addition, since the role product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the role product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased by mistake due to the operation of the game hall staff. Since the product ratio calculation/display data is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased due to an erroneous operation by the staff of the game arcade. In addition, since the amusement center cannot intentionally delete the data for character product ratio calculation/display, the reliability of the character product ratio to be displayed is increased, and concealment of a high character product ratio can be prevented.

[9. Display Base]
[9-1. Basic Configuration of Game Machine Displaying Base]
So far, the embodiment of the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the character ratio has been described. Next, the embodiment of the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value will be described exclusively, but the character ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening (the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004), a random number lottery is performed, and a special symbol variation display game is executed. do. The variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation display game is a relatively short time variation pattern (normal variation pattern of about 10 seconds, shortened variation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easy to select when the number of reservations is large) Or, there are relatively long-time fluctuation patterns (variation patterns such as Super Reach exceeding 1 minute). When the base value is calculated by the pachinko machine, the notification of the base value requires less urgency than the notification of the error. However, if the variable display time is long, without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the number of out balls (number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls number) has changed), it is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls (the number of payout balls ) changes), calculate and display the base value. Next, a specific configuration of the pachinko machine that operates in this manner will be described.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has almost the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may use, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIGS. A 7-segment LED may also be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the area update process for calculating the role ratio (step S81) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311, A base value is calculated and displayed in the role product ratio calculation/display process (step S89). In the following description, the "renewal process for calculating the character ratio calculation" in step S81 of FIG. calculation/display processing”. 26, the "character ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is read as "base calculation area 13128"; The description will be made by replacing the "character product ratio calculation/display data 13136" with "base calculation/display data 13136".

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of base calculation region update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update process, the current game state is determined, the number of prize balls to be paid out as game value is added to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 is updated. do. In particular, the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out-balls is directly updated using the number of out-balls (step S822).

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). When the game state is during the special prize, it means that the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can win many prize balls, but the opening and ending times of the big win game are included. good. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed during one big win, the time (closing interval) from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the condition device is in operation, for example, from the finalization of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the instruction to hit to the right.

Furthermore, in the starting prize-winning openings 2002 and 2004, during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during electric sapo may be included in the special prize. Furthermore, in a game state other than during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during electric sapo, a predetermined time after opening and closing the starting winning opening 2004 (for example, a ball that has entered the starting winning opening is detected as an out ball) seconds required to complete) may be included in the grand prize.

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculation of the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the special prize relating to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during operation of the condition device (for example, from the finalization of the jackpot pattern of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of winning balls and out balls other than those during the special prize, normal winnings (during the so-called big wins) to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, the start winning opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening and closing member uses winning balls and winning balls other than during the special prize (low probability time and non-time saving time) to calculate the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize openings 2005 and 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls to calculate the base value regardless of the game state (whether or not a special prize is being played). It is not used, and other accessories (start prize winning port 2004) are switched depending on the game state (whether a special prize is in progress) to use or not to use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value. will be Not using the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value means not counting the paid out prize balls in (the number of prize balls other than those in the special prize, which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value), It also includes not creating edge information for paying out prize balls according to the winning signal even if the winning signal is input.

Also, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small win) even when the condition device does not operate. In general, small hits occur during a short period of time, and since the game balls are less likely to win due to the short opening, there is no influence on the calculation of the base value. However, it is also possible to generate a small hit during a time other than the special prize (normal time) and open only the time when the possibility of winning the game ball becomes high. In this case, winning balls and winning balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins other than during the special prize may be used for calculation of the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly comply with the standard of the base value, and improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is during a special prize, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation region updating process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation region updating process may be the number of prize balls determined to be put out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prepared payout command may be used. Alternatively, it may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command that has already been sent. Moreover, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the reception confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 . Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls (the number of paid out prize balls) that receives a payout completion report from the payout control board 951 . This variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. FIG.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether there are prize balls or not, and if there are no prize balls, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. In addition, although the game balls entered the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004, the suspension is the upper limit value, and even if the winning to the starting winning opening is not suspended, the winning balls are paid out, so the total number of winning balls is updated. be. In addition, in a game state in which no prize balls are generated even if a game ball enters the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), no prize balls are generated due to the winning, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out-balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out-balls is updated so that the acquired number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ball sensor 1020, the ball sensor 3060 and the like. Get the number of balls=1. The total number of out-balls is recorded in the total number of out-balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312 . That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (Fig. 40), so the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge without delay whether the base is normal or abnormal.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation region update process (FIG. 46), which will be described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up. may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes base value calculation processing in timer interrupt processing, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute base value calculation processing. In this case, a command for notifying the base from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511 may be sent.

Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if the information of both the winning ball to the winning hole and the out ball is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). The number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (or the number of out-balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winning to a plurality of winning holes is acquired, the total number of winning balls due to a plurality of winnings is calculated as the total number of winning balls (or ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize-winning sensor detects a prize-winning hole with 5 prize balls and a prize-winning hole sensor with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls are detected as the total number of prize balls. (or add to the prize number buffer).

Also, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the shooting of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of winning balls (or the number of winning balls buffer). In addition, the operation of the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops operating) to a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds)) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Also, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) when the player is operating the firing handle. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is detected to touch the contact detection sensor 509 with the palm or finger is counted as the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize number buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the base value from being reflected in the base value of the prize balls due to an abnormality in which the prize balls are detected in a state where the game balls are not shot or fraudulent acts, and to prevent an incorrect base value from being displayed. Further, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the base is calculated by excluding the number of winning balls and the number of out balls during the special prize, but the number of winning balls due to winning in the general winning opening and the starting winning opening is counted even during the special prize. However, the base value may be calculated by counting the number of out-balls, excluding the number of balls that have entered the big prize pool.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated each time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). When the total number of winning balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. In addition, if an abnormal base value is calculated (e.g., if the total number of balls won is greater than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value must not be calculated. good too. When the base value is expressed as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of awarded balls divided by the total number of out balls by 100. Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number by which the total number of balls stored in divide input register A131216 is multiplied controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated up to the 1's place in the hundredth fraction, and the fractions below the decimal point are not calculated. Also, if this predetermined number is 10000, the base value is calculated to two decimal places in a fraction of 100. That is, by dividing the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit by 100, the base value of the fraction of 100 with two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. During the 32-clock wait time from writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to reading data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 waits without performing any other processing. may be performed. For example, the random number for judging the winning or losing of the jackpot may be updated between the writing of data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and the reading of data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock cycle supplied to the main control MPU 1311 (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle). is also updated with hard random numbers.

That is, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processes related to the game include at least a process of updating random numbers for judging winning or losing. Also, during the calculation (division) process in the arithmetic circuit 13121, the random number that affects the game result is updated one or more times.

Also, if the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error, so it need not be stored in the base calculation area 13128 . In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify an abnormality of the base value. Abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. In addition, a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of divergence of the base values.

There are various methods for base notification, and one or more of the methods described below may be used in combination. For example, the base value may be notified by the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, etc. all the time or at a predetermined timing. Informing the player of the base value may allow the player to check the condition of the pachinko machine. At that time, the display mode described in the role item ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage notation on the indicator or the display device described above. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. In display devices capable of displaying images, such as the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the first decimal place is displayed for more detailed display. may

When displaying a base value on the base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs, the main control MPU 1311 inputs display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317 . That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data to be set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as the base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 designates the digits for displaying numerical values in D15 to D8 by "data n setting", and sets the display content in D7 to D0. is generated and written to the shift register 3171 .

In addition, when the base value is displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) is provided for the base value, and if the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. . For example, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green when normal, red when exceeding the standard, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages, and may be displayed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow in each stage. In addition, when the base value is low, self-deprecating comments may be displayed at each stage, such as "I'm feeling good", "I'm getting worse", "It's not bad", and "In a way it's amazing". If the base value exceeds the standard value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud is being carried out. For this reason, it is desirable to display in a manner that indicates a warning such as red. In addition, the display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, "similar" means that at least one of display, lamp, and sound is the same.

In addition, various lamps, a liquid crystal display device, sound, etc. may be used to notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.). Further, if the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no previously calculated base value, a base notification command may be generated for displaying on the liquid crystal display that base notification is not possible. By transmitting the notification command to the generated sub-board, the effect device controlled by the sub-board can notify the state of the base. can be reduced. Further, by informing that the base display is impossible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between the failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of the base value to be displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the liquid crystal display device, the abnormality of the base value can be known without looking at the back side of the game board provided with the base display 1317 .

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317 . In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 should be used for constant notification. In addition, it is preferable to notify at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, when the special symbol variation display game is finished while the special symbol variation display game is not being executed).

Base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game arcade. In this case, as in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, etc.) to be described later, outputting base information at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of winning balls and for each predetermined number of out balls) good.

The base information output from the external terminal plate 784 may be a binary (high, low) signal indicating whether the calculated base value is higher or lower than a predetermined threshold value. In addition, a signal having a length roughly indicating the calculated base value may be output (for example, a 30-millisecond pulse when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%). Also, the number of consecutive pulses roughly indicating the calculated base value may be output (eg, three consecutive pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

The base notification command may be generated even when the base value is not updated, and the base notification command may not be generated when the base value is not updated. The display of the base value continues even if the base notification command is not generated.

In addition, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 56, etc., it determines whether the calculated base value is abnormal, generates a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value, and notifies the player or the hall employee of the abnormality of the base value. may be notified.

Also, whether or not to inform the player of the base may be determined according to the game state (game situation). This is because, if the base value is constantly reported to the player, the player's attention to the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original enjoyment of the pachinko machine, may be neglected and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. is.

Also, based on the calculated base value, the effect of the special symbol variation display game being executed or to be executed in the future may be changed. For example, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of display selection tables and select an effect from different display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) depending on the base value.

Also, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold value (for example, 30%) during the special symbol variation display game. Therefore, when the threshold value is exceeded or fallen below during the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. When the base value rises above a predetermined threshold value and when it falls, the effect may be changed in the same manner, or the effect may be changed in different manners.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of winning balls is updated in the base calculation area update process of step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation/display process of step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), The prize number buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). Thereafter, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89), and the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 . When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In addition, the number of undischarged prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of undistributed prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to transmit a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is not necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of completion of ball payout. do not have. On the other hand, when the main control board 1310 backs up the number of undistributed prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout, but the payout command reception confirmation is transmitted to the main control board 1310. No need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, an abnormality in the gaming machine can be detected early. For example, when it is determined that the base value is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol variation display game, and the predetermined threshold is exceeded. The game is not stopped even if it is determined as such, and the calculation processing of the base value is continuously executed regardless of the abnormality determination. For example, the special symbol variation display game includes short-time games such as normal variation and long-time games such as reach variation, and the base value is calculated from the start to the end of one special symbol variation display game. If the condition is met multiple times, the base value should be calculated each time, and the base value should be updated and displayed each time. This is because if the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variation display game is restricted (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the variation display), depending on the calculation timing of the base value, it may take a long time to change the base value. This is because there is a possibility that the information necessary for hall operation will not be output at an appropriate timing, causing inconvenience to the hall.

Also, if the launched game ball does not enter the start winning opening or the general winning opening, the base value is lowered. In this state, the player is at a loss, so for example, additional effects to the effects performed on the liquid crystal (for example, effects related to wins and losses that are not related to changes in the base value, and effects that appear with changes in the base value) (Specific effects to be added), and notice effects with high expectations for big hits (among the effects that are not related to changes in the base value, notice effects with high expectations such as the next notice effect, and changes in the base value Of the specific effects that appear, a highly anticipated advance notice effect (for example, displaying the base value in a rainbow display) may be performed. As a result, the player can be motivated to continue the game by alleviating the discomfort caused by not winning the starting slot and the general winning slot.

On the other hand, if many of the launched game balls enter the start winning hole or the general winning hole (if more than the average number of past winnings wins), the base value rises. In this state, even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the player receives more game balls than usual, so the player's disappointment is alleviated. The effect of the variable display game may be changed to a less expected effect.

[9-2. Variation of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44, variations of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described. The outline of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Fig. 41: Number of prize balls calculated → Number of prize balls updated → Base value calculated → Payout command sent ・Fig. 42: Number of prize balls calculated → Number of prize balls updated → Payout command sent → Base value calculated ・Fig. 43: Number of prize balls calculated → Send payout command → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Fig. 44: Calculate number of prize balls → Send payout command → Confirm command reception → Update number of prize balls → Calculate base value ・Fig. →notification of payout completion→update of the number of prize balls→calculation of the base value Note that the variations shown in FIGS. It is applicable to any base calculation area update process and base calculation/display process.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the procedure of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. - Execute the display process (step S89).

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base calculation area. In the updating process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. Thereafter, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 . When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or You may omit either of the ball payout completion.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the procedure of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. to run.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (step S90). After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and the base ratio is calculated. The base value is updated in the display processing (step S89). The number of prize balls corresponding to the generated payout command may be used instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 . When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, out of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the payout command reception confirmation or You may omit either of the ball payout completion.

In addition, the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830, so the base calculation area update process ( The order of step S81) and base ratio calculation/display processing (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (step S90).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 .

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the number of winning balls buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of undistributed prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951 so that the data of the number of undischarged prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs. Therefore, although it is necessary to confirm receipt of the command from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the procedure of timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 (step S90).

After storing the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310 . When the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or Award number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation/display process (step S89).

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the main control board 1310 backs up the data of the number of unpaid prize balls so as not to lose the data of the number of unpaid prize balls when a power failure occurs. Therefore, it is necessary to notify the completion of the ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, but the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment updates the number of winning balls and the number of out balls, which are the parameters used for calculating the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the processes shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the number of winning balls is updated when the winning opening sensor detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74). Also, in the processing shown in FIG. 43, when the payout command is transmitted, the number of prize balls is updated. Also, in the processing shown in FIG. 44, the number of prize balls is updated when the reception of the payout command is confirmed. Also, in the processing shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of prize balls is completed.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls during the special prize cannot be counted accurately due to the difference between the timing of determining whether the game state is the special prize and the timing of updating the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem becomes serious when it takes a long time to update the number of prize balls after winning a prize in the prize opening. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning prize during the special prize, and the flag is inherited to the number of winning balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification. Then, using the flag, it is determined at each stage whether the ball is in the middle of a grand prize. In this way, even if it takes a long time to update the number of prize balls after entering the winning hole, the number of prize balls during the special prize can be accurately counted and updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of winning balls and the number of out balls are updated at these opportunities, and the base values are calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known from the game machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be shortened, and the game machine can be efficiently manufactured.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of undischarged balls, when the winning opening sensor detects winning of a game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which winning is detected is not counted. Add to the number of balls paid out. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of unpaid balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In this case, each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated, the number of prize balls buffer for calculating the base value or the total number of prize balls may be updated. Also, the number of prize balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 .

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects winning of game balls in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which winning is detected to the payout control board 951. Even when the pachinko machine is out of balls and prize balls cannot be paid out, a payout command is transmitted and the number of unpaid balls is held in a payout control board 951.例文帳に追加In this case, each time a payout command is transmitted, it is preferable to update the number of prize balls buffer or the total number of prize balls for calculating the base value.

Also, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. Although a predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of prize balls, the upper limit may not be set. Moreover, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

Also, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, without comparing the winning balls buffer value with the threshold value Th1, every predetermined number of wins (for example, 10 times) or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) , steps S891 and S892 may be performed.

As described above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various times. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. FIG. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figures 39 and 40: Calculate the base value every timer interrupt cycle ・Figures 46 and 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of winning balls ・Figures 48 and 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out balls Calculation ・Figure 50 and Figure 51: When either the number of awarded balls or the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, the base value is updated.

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the number of prize balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). In FIG. 46, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process (FIG. 39), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is during a special prize, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, whether the number of prize balls obtained is one or more (step S812). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer (step S813). Each time the number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall, or the number of prize balls, which will be described later, becomes a predetermined threshold value Th1 or more. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the award number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of award balls paid out by the gaming machine 1 .

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls means that many prize balls are generated in a predetermined time period other than during the special prize (e.g., considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the start prize opening, it corresponds to winning 10 or more prizes per minute. prize ball) is obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls provided with a plurality of stages of allowable ranges. Also, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, it is not necessary to add the number of prize balls acquired to the number of prize balls buffer in step S813. good too.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player or hall employee that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for announcing an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. For example, various lamps, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sounds, and the like may be used to notify the abnormal number of prize balls. Also, an abnormality in the number of winning balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Furthermore, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal may not be used for calculating the base value. In this case, prize balls may be paid out to the player. In addition, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and is notified by the above-described notification means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display device, information output from the external terminal board 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal May be used to calculate base values. Furthermore, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all data in the RAM of the peripheral controller 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, the game is started from operation confirmation in the initial state. As another method of stopping the game, the game is temporarily stopped (for example, the variable display of the special symbols is stopped), and after the error notification is stopped, the original state is restored and the game is restarted. Therefore, even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, the power failure detection signal is output, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. After the error notification ends, the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area, and the game is restarted. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 as it is. However, 100 game balls (that is, out balls) are shot into the game area 5a, and all game balls may enter the general winning opening or the starting winning opening, so the abnormal number of winning balls It is preferable that the mode of reporting is a gentle mode (for example, a lower volume or a lower amount of light than normal error reporting) with a lower degree of urgency than a normal error (magnetic sensor error, etc.). Also, the display time may be the same as or shorter than that of normal errors. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and the notification may not be performed.

Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

After that, the number of out-balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out-balls is updated so that the acquired number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for announcing abnormal prize balls started in step S817 has timed up (step S824). Then, when the timer for prize ball abnormality notification times up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the abnormality of the prize ball for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so that the abnormality is notified only for the predetermined number of shot balls. may Alternatively, the anomaly may continue to be reported until a hall employee confirms it.

In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of awarded balls in step S985. (ie, whether there is an abnormality in the base value). For example, when the number of winning balls exceeds the number of out-balls in a predetermined time, or when considering the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the starting winning opening, a high percentage of out-balls (for example, 50% or more) wins. For example, if you are

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 47, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing (FIG. 40) described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the value of the number of prize balls buffer may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the value of a predetermined bit in the number of prize balls storage area may be used for determination. If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Also, in the base calculation region update process (Fig. 46), the determination result of comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold value Th1 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (Fig. is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value Th1.

Then, if the number-of-balls buffered value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to calculate the base value, so the base calculation/display process ends.

On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). That is, if the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1), the fractional portion of the number of prize balls is calculated. Retain (leave the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the number of prize balls buffer in the number of prize balls buffer), store the other part in memory (add the threshold Th1 to the total number of prize balls), and use it to calculate the base value Execute the processing to be performed. Specifically, when the threshold value Th1 is 100, the buffer value for the number of prize balls is 99, and if 5 prize balls are generated by entering the general prize pool, the buffer value for the number of prize balls is 104. However, 100 are moved to the total number of balls to be used for calculating the base value, and the remaining 4 are left in the number of winning balls buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball buffer is used to calculate the base value when the prize ball buffer value becomes equal to or greater than the threshold value Th1 next time. Also, although the threshold value Th1 has been described as 100, other numerical values such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a big win is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed. If there are jackpots (e.g., 4-round and 8-round jackpots), it should be set to less than or equal to the minimum number of prize balls per jackpot. In addition, from the viewpoint of detecting fraud at an early stage, it is preferable to update the base value frequently. For example, it is preferable to set the threshold Th1 to 10 instead of 100 because the base value is updated frequently.

It should be noted that steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined number of wins (for example, 10 times) without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1. Furthermore, Steps S891 and S892 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the winning ball number buffer value with the threshold value Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311 or measured by the output of an RTC (real time clock).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. Note that if the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error (or undefined). In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

In addition, when the total number of out balls is 0, or when the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the base value may not be calculated and the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated. For example, when the total number of out balls is less than or equal to the total number of prize balls, the base value is 100% or more, and the number of prize balls equal to or more than the number of shot balls (out balls) is obtained, and the game is normally played. Therefore, it is not necessary to store numerical values in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and to calculate the base value. Further, when the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, the base calculation area 13128 need not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Also, the abnormality of the base value may be determined with a threshold of 1500%. Since the theoretical upper limit of the base value of a pachinko machine in which the maximum number of prize balls per winning hole is 15 is 1500%, a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is Also in this case, the base value may not be calculated, or the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Also, the threshold for determining whether the base value is abnormal may be another value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in normal operation of the pachinko machine is determined, and if it is outside the range of the normal value, the value read from the division result register A 131218 is used to fill the base calculation area 13128. It does not update and may not update the display of the base value.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

As will be described later with reference to FIG. 52, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values from when the pachinko machine 1 started operation. It may be initialized at a timing (for example, every predetermined number of winning balls, every predetermined number of out balls).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment determines whether the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is obtained, so that fraud can be detected early. This is because during a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of shot balls) do not enter the general winning hole 2001 and the start winning holes 2002 and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, abnormalities in the winning of prizes to the winning openings that are always open (general winning opening 2001 and start winning openings 2002 and 2004) are determined and notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated when the number of winning balls satisfies a predetermined condition, so an accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number. load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 48, the number of out balls is recorded in the number of out balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 48, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, as a result of determination in step S812, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation region updating process shown in FIG. 48, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and an abnormality notification timer for prize balls is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

Also, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls. For this reason, for example, when it is determined that a game ball wins in the starting winning hole to generate a look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the pending display is displayed in a mode different from usual (blinking display, red pending, etc.) , the player expects that the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the prefetched hold will be a big hit, but the player will be disappointed if the special symbol variation display game fails. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls as in this embodiment, the disappointment of the player as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the timing of generating the prize ball, so that the base value increased by the prize ball that has entered the starting hole is notified. That is, even if it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect at the time of winning to the start winning opening, even if the number of prize balls paid out at the time of winning to the starting winning opening is added, the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, threshold value Th1 = 100) ), the base value is not updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should increase (in some cases, only the lower value changes due to the number of display digits, and the display does not change). Therefore, even if the above-described look-ahead effect is missed, the player thinks that the base value will rise later (that is, the player is in good shape), and the loss of interest can be suppressed. In other words, even if it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value has not reached the predetermined number (threshold value Th1). In addition, when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect and when the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. .

It should be noted that the player may be allowed to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate it without delay. For example, at the start of the game, the operation button 220C can be used for selection. Also, the calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to execute an effect capable of notifying the delay in the calculation of the base value. In addition, when the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game reaches the upper limit, the jackpot lottery is not executed even if the player wins the starting prize winning slot. Even in this case, since the prize balls are paid out in accordance with the winning of the starting prize winning opening, the number of the prize balls is counted and used for the calculation of the base value. In addition, even if you win a start winning opening or a general winning opening at the time of a specific error, it will be treated as no winning and if no prize balls will be paid out, the number of prize balls will not be counted, and the base will be determined depending on the winning Value is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 49, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball number buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the number of out-balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out-balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of out-balls is composed of 8 bits). , if the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Also, in the base calculation area updating process (Fig. 48), the determination result of comparing the number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation/display process (Fig. 49), the number of out balls is specified by the flag. is equal to or greater than a threshold value Th2.

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation/display processing ends.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out-ball number (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball number buffer (step S900). Steps S899 and S900 may be executed at predetermined time intervals (for example, one minute) without comparing the out-ball number buffer value with the threshold value Th2.

Thereafter, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

The total number of awarded balls and the total number of out-balls are cumulative values from when the pachinko machine 1 started operation. may be initialized for each number of balls or for each predetermined number of out balls).

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, may notify the base value with a specific effect, or may notify an abnormality of the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed each time the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at appropriate timing. Also, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that pursues amusement.

In addition, each time a prize ball is detected (detection of a prize, transmission of a payout command, arrival of a payout command, completion of payout of prize balls, etc.), the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. This is because there is a possibility that the base value cannot be calculated correctly if it is checked whether a predetermined condition is satisfied when adding the number of prize balls (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball). For example, even if the shot is not performed for a predetermined time (about one minute), the slinging (grape) state caused by the game ball being caught on a nail arranged in the game area is resolved, and the game ball is delayed in the winning opening. This is because they may win prizes. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

If both the number of out balls and the buffer value of the number of out balls are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the buffer value of the number of out balls is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the buffer value of the number of out balls may be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the base value is calculated when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number. The amount of calculation (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. be done.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 50 records the number of prize balls in the number of prize balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , records the number of out pitches in the number of out pitches buffer. In FIG. 50, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and an abnormality notification timer for prize balls is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the buffer value for the number of out balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S897), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the buffer for the number of out balls (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or may notify an abnormality of the base value. Note that the base notification command may be generated each time the base value is calculated, or the base notification command may not be generated even if the base value is calculated.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of won balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value remains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded balls or the total number of out-balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the specific structure of the work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128. As shown in FIG.

The data of the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated in the base calculation area updating process and the base calculation/display process executed by the main control MPU 1311 (Figs. 39, 46, 47, 48, 49, 51, etc.) and read out in the base calculation/display processing (FIGS. 40, 47, 49, 51, etc.). In addition, the data of the winning ball number buffer and the out ball number buffer of the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update process (FIGS. 46, 48, 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation - Read out in display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, 51, etc.). For this reason, base calculation area update processing and base calculation/display processing can be configured separately from timer interrupt processing (game control program). can.

FIG. 52(A) shows an example of the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(A), winning ball number buffer, total winning ball number, out ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer, specific winning ball number buffer, total out ball number and base are stored. The number of prize balls buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and when the number of prize balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls) is used to calculate The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player except during the special prize. The number of out balls buffer is the number of game balls shot by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of out balls). be done. The number-of-winning-balls buffer temporarily stores the number of balls that have won the general prize-winning opening and the starting prize-winning opening. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls that have won a specific general winning hole or starting winning hole. The winning ball number buffer is used when counting the number of out balls by the number of balls passing through the out hole (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when correcting the number of out balls with the number of winning balls into a specific general winning hole (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls shot by the player except during the special prize. The base is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls/total number of out balls×100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation/display processing.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(A), the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls correspond to each area of the total accumulation shown in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later. and can store values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data will not be erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. The base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total sum of bases in FIG. 52(B), which will be described later. It should be noted that a capacity that can be recorded with a decimal base value may be allocated.

FIG. 52B shows another example of a work area structure using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), winning ball number buffer, total winning ball number, out ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer, specific winning ball number buffer, total out ball number and base are stored. Each data item is the same as described in FIG. 52(A). The storage areas for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are divided into n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (or for each predetermined number of out balls or for each predetermined time period) (for example, every 6000 prize balls). n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer for all data moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. . After the data for the predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. Note that the write pointer may be moved when data other than the number of winning balls (the number of out balls, the predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings are moved for each predetermined number of winning balls. Further, the read pointer also moves along with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer points to the storage area one before the write pointer. This is for calculating the base value using the most recent data for 6000 prize balls.

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is the accumulated value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the base total value is the total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls. is a value calculated from the values of recalculated. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of all data collected in the past, and the base total cumulative value calculated from the relevant cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer is Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the original data of the cleared area.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52(B), the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 65535 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the sum of the data for 6000 prize balls.times.n (60000 prize balls when n=10), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of winning balls and the total number of out-balls are storage areas of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since the total sum is not deleted unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. Also, each of the base total and the total total is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. It should be noted that a capacity that can be recorded with a decimal base value may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52(A), stored data is not erased, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.) good. Similarly, the total accumulation in FIG. 52(B) may be erased every predetermined period.

Also, if the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. All the data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted in addition to the abnormal value. Also, it may be notified that the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Alternatively, the check code may be used to inspect the data in the backup area, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the base value may be calculated again.

[9-4. Base value display]
The base value calculated as described above may continue to be displayed while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Since this is not possible, the power consumption of the gaming machine may be reduced by turning off the 7-segment LED 13172 . Of course, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation/display process (step S89) are executed.

Also, the base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318 . For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the base value is started, and the display is turned off after being displayed for a predetermined period of time. The base value may be displayed on the base display 1317 when the display switch 1318 is operated while the body frame opening switch (not shown) is detecting that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the character ratio.

Further, when the body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that the base display 1317 can be confirmed to be operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36B, "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be illuminated.

Then, when the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is displayed (Fig. 36(E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. , the power consumption of the game machine should be reduced. This base non-display state is in the same mode as after completion of the initial setting (FIG. 36(B)), but may be in a different mode as long as it can be distinguished from the displayed base value.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317 . The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game is preferably continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base display can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, when the body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variation display game, the base value is displayed, but when the body frame 4 is closed before the variation time elapses, the variation display for the remaining time can be performed. . Since the special pattern displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative pattern stops at the timing when the special pattern variable display of the function display unit 1400 stops. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, even when the body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (character object ratio in the above-described embodiment) may be displayed on the base indicator (character object ratio indicator) 1317 . By doing so, the base value (accessory ratio) can be checked without opening the main body frame 4, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation of the gaming machine. Moreover, it is not necessary to determine whether the body frame 4 is open. In an island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back side of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such a game machine, by opening the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, the base (character ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back can be confirmed. In addition, when the base value is displayed even when the body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form recognizable by the player (for example, on a display device that displays the effect of the special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer representing the condition of the pachinko machine and is worth watching by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310 , a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 . When the payout control board 951 calculates the base value, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 . Also, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

Further, the pachinko machine of this embodiment does not change the amount of light (brightness) of the base display 1317 even if it shifts to the energy saving mode. This is because if the amount of light on the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it will be difficult to confirm the base value on the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine outside the opening hours.

Specifically, the gaming machine of the present embodiment enters a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after the game ball does not enter any of the winning holes and the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is consumed. . In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs BGM that is output with so-called normal variation. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the standby state, the state shifts to the demonstration state. In the demo state, a moving image showing the motif of the game machine is reproduced, or the game machine is explained. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demonstration state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that the demonstration state and the energy saving mode do not have to be distinguished). In the energy saving mode, the amount of light of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 controlled by the peripheral controller 1511 and various lamps is reduced in order to suppress power consumption. However, the power consumption of the display devices (the function display unit 1400 and the base display device 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the pachinko machine as a whole. good too. Also, if the light intensity of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, a player who is going to play on an empty table can easily see the result of the previous lottery.

Also, even if the game ball does not enter the starting prize winning port or the general winning prize port, when the game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value is recalculated and updated. there is a possibility. If game balls are shot and the number of out balls increases, but the number of prize balls does not increase, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players will take revenge.

By informing such a player of the state of the game with the function display unit 1400 which also serves as the base display 1317, the interest in the game can be revived. That is, even if the player shifts to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the display mode of the display on which the base value is displayed is maintained at the amount of light before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or the amount of light is increased. It is good to be able to check the base value properly.

In this way, maintaining or increasing the light intensity of the display that displays the base value has been explained, but from the viewpoint of reducing energy consumption, even if the light intensity of the display that displays the base value is decreased or extinguished good. For example, during the energy saving mode, predetermined operations (fire stop button to forcibly stop firing, effect operation button to change the effect that appears, RAM clear button to clear the contents of RAM, power supply to the game machine It is preferable to reduce the amount of light of the display on which the base value is displayed when detecting the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine, such as a supply adjustment button for switching the presence/absence of supply. Furthermore, not only during the energy saving mode, if the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, the light amount of both the lamp that reduces power consumption and the display that displays the base value will be reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. good too.

When reducing or turning off the light intensity of both the lamp, etc. and the display that displays the base value, the light intensity of the lamp, etc. that reduces power consumption during energy saving mode is reduced before the display that displays the base value. In this case, the light amount of a lamp or the like, which consumes a large amount of power, is first reduced, thereby greatly reducing the power consumption. In addition, the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed may be reduced or turned off prior to the lamp or the like. Effective. In addition, the lamp or the like that reduces power consumption and the display that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time during the energy saving mode. . Note that the terms before and after time (meaning "before" or "at the same time") in these descriptions include the order of internal processing timings and the order of appearance from the player's point of view.

Moreover, the display mode of the base value may be set in multiple stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. divided into multiple stages. The indicator for displaying the base value may be composed of a multi-color LED, and may be displayed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, the display unit that displays the base value is configured with a liquid crystal display device, and at each stage, the base value is low Occasionally it may display self-deprecating comments. Further, an effect of adding a comment as described above may be performed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 on which the decorative pattern is displayed without changing the display mode of the display that displays the base value.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of balls passing through the out mouth]
Next, further variations of the base calculation region updating process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. FIG. In the processing described in FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out port, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・Figures 54 and 40: Base value is calculated every timer interrupt cycle ・Figure 55 and Figure 56: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls The base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls will be omitted, but they can be realized by combining FIGS.

If out balls are detected by the out ball sensor 1021 provided near the out hole 1111, there is a problem that the number of out balls cannot be counted accurately. This is because the game ball launched toward the game area 5a flows out from the game area 5a via the out hole 1111, the general winning hole 2001, the starting winning hole 2002, the big winning holes 2005 and 2006. Therefore, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls shot toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out hole are used to accurately calculate the number of out balls, and to accurately calculate the base value.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has substantially the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. Out mouth passing ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of balls passing through the mouth is provided. The out-port-passing ball sensor 1021 is preferably installed at a position where the player can see it through the out-port 1111 . By installing the sensor 1021 for balls passing through the out hole at a position where the player can see through the out hole 1111, the player can be made aware that the out balls are being counted, that is, the base is being calculated.

In addition, the out-hole passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a gathering gutter where the game balls flowing down from the game area 5a through the out-hole 1111 are aligned. If it is installed at a position where the player cannot visually recognize it, the player does not need to be aware of counting out balls. In addition, by providing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 on the far side of the out-port 1111, it is possible to secure a sufficient space for arranging the liquid crystal display device and the accessories (movable bodies), thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5. can. In addition, in order to prevent double counting of game balls, the rolling surface on which the game ball that has passed the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 rolls is provided so that the game ball that has passed through the out exit passing ball sensor 1021 does not bounce back. It should be slanted or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54 acquires the number of prize balls, the number of balls passed through the out hole, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passed through the out hole at each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether there are prize balls or not, and if there are no prize balls, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of balls passing through the outlet is obtained (step S818), and the number of winning balls is obtained (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize ball notification has timed up. You may stop ball abnormality information.

After recording the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 records the number of prize balls in the number of prize balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , the number of balls passing through the out-hole is recorded in the out-ball number buffer, and the number of prize-winning balls is recorded in the prize-winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 55, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and an abnormality notification timer for prize balls is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of balls passing through the out hole is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of balls passing through the out hole is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls buffer (step S821).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. Then, the obtained number of balls passing through the out-hole and the number of winning balls are added to separate storage areas (out-ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer). In this way, the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in separate storage areas.

Also, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 55, if the acquired number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls are recorded in separate storage areas, the number of out balls increases by 1 when the winning hole is won. Counting the number of balls passing through the out hole and the number of winning balls are simultaneously executed (within one timer interrupt processing), but the base value is calculated after updating both the out ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer. At that time, if both the buffer for the number of out balls and the buffer for the number of winning balls cannot be updated within one timer interrupt processing, whether the number of balls passing through the out port is preferentially counted or the number of winning balls is preferentially counted. should be determined in advance rather than being determined by lottery. In this case, if the process related to the prize balls is prioritized over other processes, the payout process of the prize balls can be executed quickly.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of passing balls stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S896). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out-balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to update the total number of out-balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the number of prize balls buffer value is added to the total number of prize balls (step S897), and the number of prize balls buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted (step S901). . Steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or at predetermined time intervals without comparing the number of out balls (buffer value for number of out balls + buffer value for number of winning balls) with the threshold value Th2.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of won balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value remains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded balls or the total number of out-balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls passed through the out hole, so the number of out balls is counted accurately, and the base value is calculated accurately. can. Furthermore, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process and inspection process of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the prize winning opening switch, the base display 1317, and the processing for calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Base Abnormality Notification]
The processing described above is for generating a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, the processing for determining an abnormality in the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
・Figure 57: Base value is calculated every timer interrupt cycle ・Figure 58: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls Although the explanation of the pattern for calculating the base value for each number of out pitches is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIG. 57 and FIG.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated each time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation/display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). Abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. In addition, a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of divergence of the base values. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process is terminated. The same method as the above-described base notification can be adopted as the method of notifying the abnormality of the base.

For example, one or a combination of two or more of the methods described below may be used. Specifically, base display (7-segment LED) 1317, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, or the like may be used to notify the abnormality of the base value. Informing the player of the abnormality of the base value may allow the player to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. Abnormality of the base value may be notified by displaying the calculated base value in percentage notation on the above-described indicator or display device. Note that the value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. In display devices capable of displaying images, such as the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the first decimal place is displayed for more detailed display. may

Further, when the base values are displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the display mode should be changed if the base values are abnormal. For example, the numerical value is displayed by blinking or by changing the color (green when normal, red when abnormal, etc.). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in multiple steps. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages, and may be displayed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow in each stage.

In addition, various lamps, a liquid crystal display device, sound, etc. may be used to notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.). The function display unit 1400 may notify an abnormality of the base value. Also, the information on the abnormality of the base may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall.

Note that the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 57 calculates the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out-balls at the timing when the number of awarded balls and the number of out-balls satisfy predetermined conditions as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, for example. It is preferable to use it in combination with the base calculation region update processing to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the buffer value for the number of out balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S897), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the buffer for the number of out balls (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). Abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. In addition, a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of divergence of the base values. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process is terminated.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of won balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value remains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of awarded balls or the total number of out-balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

Note that the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 58 directly updates the total number of prize balls and total number of out balls using the acquired number of prize balls and number of out balls, as shown in, for example, FIG. 39 and FIG. It is preferable to use it in combination with the base calculation area update process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, if the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine, and the hall staff can It is possible to know the possibility of illegal operation to the game machine. In addition, it is possible to detect and report abnormalities in gaming machines that cannot be detected by conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of base change]
Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine that reports changes in calculated base values will be described.

The base value calculated by pachinko machines naturally fluctuates. Since the base value indicates the condition of the gaming machine, the player during the game cares not only about the base value itself but also about changes in the base value. Therefore, it is desirable to inform the player of the change in the base value. The player can play the game with peace of mind when the display that serves as a reference for the upper and lower levels of the base value appears.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 59, the history of calculated base values is recorded in order to compare the current base value with the history of past base values. In FIG. 59, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the base calculation/display processing described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the buffer value for the number of out balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not time to update the total number of out balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S897), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the buffer for the number of out balls (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the base value management timer has expired (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed out, it is not the time to store the base value in the base history, so the base calculation/display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the base value management timer has timed out, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record a base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and every time the base value management timer times up, the current base value is stored in the base history. The base history is stored in base calculation area 13128 . Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128 , or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128 . When storing a plurality of base histories in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128 to store, for example, predetermined time×10 base values. Also, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, the number of prize balls and the total number of out balls for a predetermined time×n are stored, A base value may be calculated as needed.

Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display selection processing. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral controller power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, most recent base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. (step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, the base decrease continuation time measurement timer is referred to, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started decreasing. (Step S10302). Then, if the predetermined time has not passed since the base has started to decrease, the effect table for which the base is decreasing is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if the predetermined time has passed from the start of the decrease of the base, the effect table for the continuation of the decrease of the base is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller than (equal to or larger than) the current base value, the timer for measuring the duration of the base decrease is reset (step S10305), and the display selection table during base increase is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, in step S10301, it is determined whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value. You may Since the base value is obtained by division, it is generally a decimal value. Therefore, it is preferable to determine whether the base historical value and the current base value are equal in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (eg, 3%).

64 to 68 are diagrams showing examples of display selection tables. These display selection tables are used to select the effect of the special symbol variation display game with a random number selected upon winning the start winning slot (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is increasing or when the base value does not change, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected during the base value decrease. selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

Each display selection table includes items of effect number, effect content, variable time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The effect content is the name of the effect. The variation time is the time from when the variation of the special symbol starts to when it ends due to the effect. The remarks are information describing the outline of the presentation so that the designer can understand it. Distribution is the probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

The display selection table 1 (lost) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss and the base value is increasing or unchanged, and the display selection table 1 (win 1) shown in FIG. 65 is selected. is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not lead to a variable probability state and the base value is increasing or not changing. The display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a variable probability big win that derives a variable probability state and the base value is increasing or not changing.

The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease.

As shown, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2 which are effects in which the pattern does not change, and the freeze effect is selected with a high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after determination of the effect.

In addition, if the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the base value started to decrease, the display selection table 3 is used to select an effect, and the selected effect is displayed. You can switch.

Further, whether or not to display a specific effect for notifying the change of the base value may be determined according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the player is always notified of the change in the base value, the player's attention to the performance of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original enjoyment of the pachinko machine, may be neglected and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is

For example, during the execution of the special symbol variation display game (game situation in which the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the effect of the special symbol variation display game is preferentially executed, and when the variation is not in progress, the base value is increased. It is preferable to display a specific effect (an effect that serves as a guideline for a change in the base value) at the time of hour or at the time of descent.

The specific effect may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined period of time. This is because if the specific effect is displayed immediately after the special symbol variation display game ends, the player's sense of tension continues and fatigue accumulates. When a game ball wins a prize in a starting winning hole while the specific effect is being displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because the winning of the start winning slot triggers the big winning lottery and the special symbol variation display game is started, so it is better to let the player pay attention to the special symbol variation display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even when the number of prize balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold Th1) or when the number of out balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold Th2). Also, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, or may be executed without fail if the same conditions are met.

Moreover, it is preferable that the specific effect is not displayed when the base value is increased, and is displayed only when the base value is decreased. This is because when a player is notified of a rise in the base value, the player's expectations rise, and if the base value does not rise to the extent that the player expects, the player may be disappointed due to the gap between expectations and expectations. be. On the other hand, if the player is notified of the decrease in the base value, some players will increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display selection table is changed depending on whether the base value is decreasing or not (increasing, steady state), but the display is divided into three states: decreasing base value, steady state, and increasing base value. A selection table may be defined to inform the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is steady (whether the base history value and the current base value are equal) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

Also, the specific effect may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to decrease when displayed outside the special symbol variation display game than when displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

In addition, when no game ball enters the starting winning hole and the special symbol variation display game is not performed, the base value usually decreases. Also, if the special symbol variation display game is not performed for a predetermined time, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 displays a demo screen.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69(A) is a display example of normal reach, in which the left and right symbols are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69(B) is a display example of special reach 1, the left and right symbols displayed on the upper left of the screen stop at 7, and the middle symbol fluctuates. In the central part of the screen, the player and the opponent are competing in rock-paper-scissors, and the middle pattern is determined according to the results of the rock-paper-scissors. FIG. 69(C) is a display example of special ready-to-win 2, in which the left and right symbols displayed on the upper left of the screen stop at 7, and the middle symbol fluctuates. In the central part of the screen, the player and the opponent are fighting each other, and the medium pattern is determined according to the result of the fighting.

FIG. 69(D) is a display example of freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered to a position (for example, the lower right part of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. recognizable display. FIG. 69(E) is a display example of freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative pattern is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is displayed at a position (for example, the bottom of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Display a recognizable continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease of the base value may be displayed at any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Also, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. For example, a pop-up display in the center of the display screen may be used.

An example of displaying the degree of change in the base value on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, but the lighting mode of the decoration lamp may be changed. Also, instead of showing the up-and-down trend of the base value, changes in the base value may be displayed numerically.

The change in the displayed base value is the result of comparing the base value calculated in the time interval before the specified time and the base value calculated in the current time interval. and the total cumulative sum of the latest base values.

[9-8. Calculation of Base Considering Specific General Entrances]
Next, the process of accurately calculating the base value in consideration of the winning in a specific general winning slot will be described.

In a pachinko machine, a player shoots a game ball with the aim of winning a prize in a specific winning hole (for example, the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 that are open) in which the game ball is likely to win during the big win. Adjust the strength of the projectile. Even during a big win, the game ball is shot at the same place as the so-called normal hitting to aim at the big winning hole 2005, or the shooting strength is strengthened to the maximum, so-called right-hand hitting to aim at the big winning hole 2006. - 特許庁There are variations. Among such variations, there is a case where a game board is designed such that a start winning opening and a general winning opening are arranged downstream of the big winning opening and the balls spilled from the big winning opening are picked up.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of a pachinko machine that hits to the right during a big win will be described in detail. During the big win, the player hits to the right in order to win the game ball into the opened big winning hole. Most of the game balls shot toward the game area enter the large winning opening 2006 that is open. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005. When the player does not win the special prize-winning slot 2006, he/she wins the general prize-winning slot 2001.例文帳に追加That is, it can be said that the general winning hole 2001 on the right side of the big winning hole 2005 wins only when the right-handed game ball does not enter the open big winning hole 2006 .

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the starting prize winning opening and the general winning opening when 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a (i.e., 100 out balls) In order to show the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out), a game ball that has flowed into the game area but has a low possibility of entering the starting hole and general winning hole (high possibility of entering the big winning hole) is shot. When counted as a number (number of out balls), it is assumed that when calculated as a base value, it will deviate from the actual base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the specific general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. to calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning hole is as follows.
・Figure 70 and Figure 40: Base value is calculated every timer interrupt cycle. ・Figure 71 and Figure 72: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls. and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls will be omitted, but they can be realized by combining FIGS.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. Get the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. In FIG. 70, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether there are prize balls or not, and if there are no prize balls, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls into a specific general winning hole (specific number of winning balls) is acquired (step S820). Then, the value obtained by subtracting the specific number of winning balls from the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used to calculate the base value is updated each time an out ball or winning ball is detected.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Furthermore, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 46, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize ball notification has timed up. You may stop ball abnormality information.

After recording the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation/display process shown in FIG.

FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). In order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition, the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. Record the number in the out pitches buffer. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and an abnormality notification timer for prize balls is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, and it is determined whether the winning hole corresponding to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning hole, and the number of winning balls to the specific general winning hole is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls to the specific general winning hole is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation/display processing (step S89). In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific winning ball number recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 72, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation/display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the buffer value for the number of prize balls is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total number of prize balls, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the winning ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total winning ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the winning ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of wins or every predetermined time without comparing the buffer value for the number of winning balls with the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of passing balls stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out-balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to update the total number of out-balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the number of prize balls buffer value is added to the total number of prize balls (step S897), and the number of prize balls buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific number of winning balls is subtracted from the total number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation/display process ends. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of awarded balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of winning balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have passed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will be an error. In this case, the base value displayed on base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). Abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. In addition, a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of divergence of the base values. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation/display process is terminated.

In the base calculation/display processing shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value remains the same value, and if the total number of awarded balls or the total number of out balls is updated, Base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of awarded balls and the total number of out-balls is updated, or at the timing when both are updated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, since the base value is calculated by excluding game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to enter the starting hole or the general winning hole, deviation from the actual base value is calculated. A small base value can be calculated accurately.

In addition, the pachinko machine that hits to the right during the big win has explained the case where the general winning hole 2001 is downstream of the big winning hole 2006, but the invention according to this embodiment aims at the big winning hole 2005 by normal hitting during the big win. It can be applied to a pachinko machine or a game machine in which a starting opening or a general winning opening is arranged downstream of the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

Also, in the game area 5a, big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are arranged, which normally do not accept game balls, but allow acceptance of game balls according to the result of the jackpot lottery. Prize balls that have won prizes in the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball enters the start winning openings 2002 and 2004, the special symbol variation display game is started, and the big winning opening starts after the special symbols are confirmed until the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened. During the period from the closing of the mouths 2005 and 2006 to the start of the next special symbol variation display game (jackpot ending), the detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In this way, the number of winning balls and the number of out balls during the special prize can be counted without determining whether the special prize is being executed in step S810 in FIG. 39 and the like. In addition, when the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed in one jackpot, the time (closing interval) from the closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 to the next opening may be included in the special prize. That is, during the special prize means that the condition device is in operation, for example, from the finalization of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the instruction to hit to the right. Furthermore, in the starting prize-winning openings 2002 and 2004, during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during electric sapo may be included in the special prize. Furthermore, in a game state other than during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during electric sapo, a predetermined time after opening and closing the starting winning opening 2004 (for example, a ball that has entered the starting winning opening is detected as an out ball) seconds required to complete) may be included in the grand prize.

Also, in the game area 5a, a second start port 2004 is arranged which normally does not accept game balls, but allows acceptance of game balls according to the lottery result of normal symbols. Prize balls that enter the second starting port 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol variation display game is started, and the normal symbol is confirmed and released (opening), from the second start port 2004. During the period from the closing of the game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game (ending), the detected out balls are excluded from the number of out balls. In addition, when the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing according to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time (closing interval) from the closing of the second starting port 2004 to the next opening may be included in the special prize. In this way, all winnings to the second starting port 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value, not just during the time saving.

As described above, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than those during special prizes (jackpots, short working hours, etc.) without determining in step S810 of FIG.

In this way, the number of out balls and the number of winning balls while the player is hitting right can be accurately excluded, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

Also, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game with the left hand when neither the big win nor the time saving is in progress (so-called normal state), and to play the game with the right hand during the big win or the time saving. In such a game machine, a general prize winning port 2001 and a first start port 2002 for winning a prize when hitting to the left and a general prize winning port 2001 and a second start port 2004 for winning a prize when hitting to the right are provided. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning holes in the left to center of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting to the left) and the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting to the right), Depending on the arrangement and the position of the nail, the ball entry rate to each winning hole is different. In other words, the base value for left-handed hitting and the base value for right-handed hitting are different.

The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player hits to the left in the normal state. However, if the base value differs between left-handed and right-handed for the reason described above (for example, the base value for right-handed is designed to be lower than that for left-handed in normal conditions). , a low base value is calculated when the player hits right in normal conditions.

A pachinko machine with a low base value is considered to be abnormal and should be inspected or judged to be a machine with poor ball output performance. Even in a pachinko machine judged to have poor ball output performance (lower than the expected base), the hall judges that the player is hitting left, so the start winning opening that acts on the base at the time of hitting left And make adjustments to increase the ball entry rate of the general winning entrance. Then, adjust the abnormal nail to increase the base value. When the game machine adjusted in this way hits to the left, many prize balls can be obtained even in the normal state. In other words, many lotteries can be received with a small amount. In other words, even if the base when hitting left-handed is not different from what the hole has assumed, the hole misunderstands and adjusts to increase the ball entry rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening that wins when hitting left-handed. Since there is a possibility that the hole may be disadvantaged by such malice of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value for hitting left and the base value for hitting right.

By the way, in a pachinko machine that hits to the right during time saving, the second starting port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the game state and the gate part 2003 for performing the normal symbol lottery for opening the second starting port 2004 are used when hitting to the right. It is arranged in the area where the game ball rolls. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 by striking to the right in the normal state, even if the lottery of the normal pattern is performed, the probability of winning the normal pattern is extremely low to prevent the second start port 2004 from opening. Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened to make it difficult to win a prize to the second starting port 2004 in a normal state.

Here, in order to increase the base value in the normal state of hitting to the right, the rate of entry into the second starting hole 2004 should be increased. However, since the second starting hole 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting hole 2002, increasing the ball entry rate to the second starting hole 2004 will put pressure on the profit of the hole. Therefore, when calculating the base value by counting the number of game balls passing through the gate section 2003 in the normal state, it is preferable to calculate the corrected base value using the number of passing balls of the gate section 2003 .

Specifically, the number of game balls passing through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls hit toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. A reduction in the number of out pitches allows for higher base calculations. For example, if a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate section 2003, a very high base value will be calculated. The degree of correction processing may be appropriately determined based on the design values (performance) of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored, and when a game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 without entering the starting hole, etc.) (conditions may be added), the number of out balls counted in a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after (or before and after) passing through the gate section 2003 may not be used for calculating the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When passing through the gate unit 2003 is detected, a display or sound such as "Please return to left-handed" may be output without actively informing the player that the result will not be reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Further, when the passing of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the hole may be notified that the ball is hit to the right. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or the fact that the game is being played to the right may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game arcade.

As described above, by excluding the number of balls passing through the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting to the right) from the number of out balls, The base value of time can be corrected to a larger value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluctuations in the calculated value of the base due to the game style of the player.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value of confirming the operation status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value is retained for a long period of time. Also, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily deleted. Therefore, the base calculation/display data 13136 is erased under conditions different from the conditions for erasing the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 . As a result, it is possible to hold accurate data on the number of winning balls and to calculate an accurate role ratio.

Specifically, the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation) does not erase the base calculation/display data 13136, but cuts off the backup power supplied to the main control MPU 1311 and turns off the power of the pachinko machine 1. All data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased by the second operation of shutting down. For the second operation, one switch may be provided to realize this operation, or the pachinko machine 1 may be operated by removing the connector of the backup power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 by an employee of the game parlor. may be turned off.

In other words, two operations are prepared for erasing the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. The first operation erases only the data related to the progress of the game, and the second operation erases the calculated base value. Delete all data, including data related to game progress.

By configuring in this way, the base calculation/display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation by the staff of the game hall, so the reliability of the displayed character object ratio is increased, and concealment of a high character object ratio can be prevented. .

[9-10. Calculation of Base Considering Winning Abnormality]
73 and 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, an abnormality in prize winning may be detected. For example, when a prize is detected other than during the opening of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 due to the fact that a big win is derived in a special symbol variation display game, or a start winning opening due to a winning being derived in a normal symbol variation display game. If a winning is detected other than during opening in 2004, it is a winning abnormality. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and is mainly when many prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, a winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a case where a winning is impossible or many winnings are detected within a predetermined period of time.

Since the winning ball related to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to calculate the base accurately by correcting this amount. Therefore, in the base calculation area update process considering the winning abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

It should be noted that since the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting winning opening 2004 usually win only during the special prize, the winning balls to these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base. There is no need to consider the winning abnormality.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update process, the current game state is determined, the number of prize balls to be paid out as game value is added to the area corresponding to the current game state, and the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 is updated. do. In particular, the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73 is similar to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. The total number of awarded balls is directly updated using the number of awarded balls calculated in (step S814), and the total number of out-balls is directly updated using the number of out-balls (step S822). In FIG. 73, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded.

If the game state is during a special prize, the prize balls are not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base calculation region updating process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation region updating process may be the number of prize balls determined to be put out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prepared payout command may be used. Alternatively, it may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command that has already been sent. Moreover, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the reception confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 . Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls (the number of paid out prize balls) that receives a payout completion report from the payout control board 951 . This variation has already been described with reference to FIGS. 41-44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether there are prize balls or not, and if there are no prize balls, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. In addition, although the game balls entered the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004, the suspension is the upper limit value, and even if the winning to the starting winning opening is not suspended, the winning balls are paid out, so the total number of winning balls is updated. be. In addition, in a game state in which no prize balls are generated even if a game ball enters the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), no prize balls are generated due to the winning, and the number of prize balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . That is, in the base calculation region updating process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). Then, it is determined whether or not a winning abnormality is detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined to be abnormal is obtained (step S827). Specifically, as described above, when a winning to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is detected in addition to the special prize (while the condition device is in operation) caused by the derivation of the big win in the special symbol variation display game, or If a win is detected in the starting prize winning port 2004 even though it is not open due to the winning being derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that there is a prize winning abnormality.

It may be determined that the winning ball is abnormal when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or it may be determined that the winning ball is abnormal when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. Further, when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are continuously detected, it may be determined as a winning abnormality, and when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined as a winning abnormality. You may

Then, the total number of out-balls is updated so that the acquired number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (step S822). The number of out balls is detected by the ball sensor 1020, the ball sensor 3060, etc., as described above, and the detection signals of these sensors are read and obtained in the switch input process of step S74. At this time, the value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, and after adding the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls, winning a prize The number of winning balls that are abnormally applied may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total number of out-balls is recorded in the total number of out-balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control internal RAM 1312 . That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (Fig. 40), so the base value is displayed without delay. It can be determined without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 74), which will be described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up. may be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes base value calculation processing in timer interrupt processing, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute base value calculation processing. In this case, a command for notifying the base from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted, or a command for notifying the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511 may be sent.

Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if the information of both the winning ball to the winning hole and the out ball is acquired, the number of prize balls is set to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). The number of out-balls is added to the total number of out-balls (or the number of out-balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Also, in one timer interrupt process, even if information on winning to a plurality of winning holes is acquired, the total number of winning balls due to a plurality of winnings is calculated as the total number of winning balls (or ). Therefore, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, if a prize-winning sensor detects a prize-winning hole with 5 prize balls and a prize-winning hole sensor with 3 prize balls, a total of 8 prize balls are detected as the total number of prize balls. (or add to the prize number buffer).

Also, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the shooting of game balls is detected. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of winning balls (or the number of winning balls buffer). In addition, the operation of the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (furthermore, when the firing control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops operating) to a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds)) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Also, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the player is operating the shooting handle. That is, only the number of winning balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it was detected that the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 was in contact with the contact detection sensor 509 is the total number of winning balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize number buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the base value from being reflected in the base value of the prize balls due to an abnormality in which the prize balls are detected in a state where the game balls are not shot or fraudulent acts, and to prevent an incorrect base value from being displayed. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, there is no need to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so the increase in cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area updating process (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 74, the number of out balls is recorded in the number of out balls buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same step numbers are given to the same parts as in the above-described base calculation area updating process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the game state is a special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than the special prize is obtained (step S811), and it is determined whether there are prize balls (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). . That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 74, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the timer for prize abnormality notification is reset (step S817).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether or not a winning abnormality is detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning determined as abnormal is acquired (step S827).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up (step S824), and when the timer for abnormal notification of prize ball has timed up, a command to stop the abnormal notification of prize ball is generated, and the abnormal notification of prize ball is stopped ( step S825).

In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out balls are corrected for all the winning balls related to the winning abnormality. It is not necessary to correct the out ball for the winning ball related to the specific type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of winning ball related to the winning abnormality, the winning ball may or may not be paid out. It is preferable that whether or not a prize ball is to be paid out in response to this prize winning abnormality is determined for each prize winning opening. In this case, in the case of a prize-winning abnormality in which no prize balls are paid out, the prize-winning balls should not be counted as total-out balls and should not be used in the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, as for the prize winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, the winning balls are counted as total out balls, and the paid out prize balls are also counted as the total number of prize balls, and used for calculating the base value. Note that even in the case of a prize winning abnormality in which prize balls are paid out, the winning balls may not be counted as the total out balls, the paid out prize balls may not be counted as the total number of prize balls, and may not be used in the calculation of the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance (removal of jammed balls, etc.) for a game machine malfunction, a hall employee may manually insert a game ball into the starting prize opening to compensate for the ball output so that the player does not lose it. In this case, a prize ball is paid out for winning a prize in the starting prize opening. Winning to the start winning opening is detected as a winning abnormality, but prize balls are paid out. When prize balls are paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it should not be determined as a prize winning abnormality. In this case, in the winning openings (starting winning openings 2002, 2004) that are reflected in the calculation of the base value, the balls are paid out, and the abnormal winning is not determined. It is preferable to determine the winning abnormality without paying out. A winning hole for judging a winning abnormality has a smaller number of prize balls paid out by winning than a winning hole for not judging a winning abnormality (the starting winning hole has 3 prize balls, and the big winning hole has 15 prize balls). . For this reason, the abnormal winning is determined in the main winning opening, but even if the abnormal winning is not determined in the starting winning opening, it does not become a big security hole from the viewpoint of defense against fraud. In this way, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the number of out balls and the number of prize balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls using the number of winning balls related to a winning abnormality that does not generate any prize balls, it is possible to match the number of prize balls with the out balls that cause the prize balls.

As described above, it is possible to determine a winning abnormality in various winning ports, but a specific implementation example for a pachinko machine will be described.

First, the normal winning gate 2001 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning gates other than the general winning gate 2001 (large winning gates 2005 and 2006, starting winning gates 2002 and 2004) may determine the winning abnormality. Since it is difficult for a plurality of game balls to win a prize at the same time, the general prize gates are designed to improve the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts. The player can be compensated for the ball by entering the general prize winning openings 2001 (total of 4) provided more than (total of 3). In addition, since the general prize winning opening 2001 can be easily identified by hall employees, maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and operation for compensating for ball output are easy. The reason why hall employees can easily identify the general prize winning openings 2001 is that the general winning openings 2001 are often arranged together (in separate areas) in the game area, and the electric accessories (large winning openings) 2005, 2006, start winning openings 2002, 2004) and decorative members (appearance) are different. In addition, when the number of winning balls for one winning ball in the general winning opening is small, there is an effect that the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts is improved. It should be noted that it is also possible to determine the winning abnormality not only for a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end) but also for other general winning openings.

In addition, it does not determine the winning abnormality in the big winning holes 2005 and 2006 with a large number of prize balls, and does not judge the abnormal A winning abnormality may be determined. Since the number of winning balls for one winning ball is large in the big winning hole, even a small number of winning balls greatly changes the base value. Therefore, it is convenient to easily inspect the change of the base value when inspecting the pachinko machine. It should be noted that, instead of determining the winning abnormality only in a specific big winning opening (for example, the big winning opening 2005 where the game ball is easy to put in by hand), the winning abnormality may be determined in other big winning openings (for example, 2006). .

In addition, it is also possible to determine the abnormal winning by the winning openings other than the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004 (the general winning opening 2001 and the big winning openings 2005 and 2006) without determining the winning abnormality in the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004. Since the number of winning balls per winning of one ball is smaller than that of the big winning hole, the starting winning hole can compensate the player for putting out balls while improving the security resistance of the game machine against the goto. It should be noted that the winning abnormality is not determined only by a specific start winning opening (for example, the position of the starting winning opening 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to understand), and the other starting winning opening 2004 is used to determine the winning abnormality. good too.

Furthermore, in the case of a large winning opening or a starting winning opening, the opening/closing member of the winning opening is positioned to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine. Instead, the opening/closing member of the winning opening is located at a position that cannot be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine. For example, by tilting the opening and closing member that is positioned vertically in the closed state to an oblique position, it is easy for hall employees to operate a winning opening (so-called electric tulip) in which the opening and closing member picks up game balls. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning opening is closed with a flat plate member, and when the flat member is retracted, the entrance to the winning opening opens (so-called Velochu). is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only for the winning holes used to compensate the player for putting out balls, so it is easy for hall employees to understand, and the security resistance of the gaming machine can be improved.

Also, the detected winning abnormality may be reported. The method of notifying the abnormal prize may be the same as the method of notifying the abnormal number of prize balls described above (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal, Lighting or flashing of decorative lamps, output of voice, sound effect, warning sound, etc.) should be looser than other abnormalities. Specifically, the abnormal notification time is short, the characters that notify the abnormality are small, the lamp does not light up when the abnormality is notified, and the abnormality notification sound is set to a lower volume than other abnormal notification sounds (suppressed). ).

In addition, in the notification of the winning abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the detection of the winning abnormality. It is preferable to end the notification after a predetermined time or change the mode of notification. In this way, when the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is performing maintenance on the gaming machine, not the player's fraudulent act. Therefore, if the winning abnormality is notified only for a predetermined time and the notification is not continued after that, the work efficiency can be improved without interfering with the maintenance work of the game machine by the hall. In addition, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined time, it can be seen that the maintenance work of the game machine is not hindered and the work is continued correctly. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the sound notification (or reduce the volume) while continuing the notification by the display device or the lamp.

In summary, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has correction means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correction means divides the plurality of winning holes into a plurality of types (starting winning hole, big winning hole). For the first type of winning openings, the number of out balls is corrected based on the winning balls detected when the predetermined conditions are not met (during the special prize), and for the second type of winning openings, the predetermined The number of out balls is not corrected based on the winning balls detected except when the condition is satisfied (during the special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent deviation of the number of out balls when compensating the player for maintenance of the gaming machine, and to accurately calculate the number of out balls. In addition, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the game machine, and the base value can be adjusted as the adjustment (maintenance). This allows an accurate base value to be calculated and displayed.

Up to this point, we have explained the detection of a winning abnormality and the exceptional handling of the detection of a winning abnormality (when it is not detected). Since there is a high possibility that the winning balls will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning balls determined to be abnormal should not be reflected in the number of out balls and should not be used in the calculation of the base value.

In addition, the winning abnormality detected in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be reported. For example, in the fraudulent act detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, a winning abnormality display command is created with the winning abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). The notification of the abnormal winning may be performed when one abnormal winning ball is detected, or when a predetermined number of abnormal winning balls are detected. Further, when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the abnormal winning are continuously detected, the notification of the abnormal winning may be performed, and when a predetermined number of the winning balls related to the abnormal winning are detected within a predetermined time, the abnormal winning is notified. Notification may be made.

Further, the notification of the winning abnormality may be ended after a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be ended when the winning opening is opened next time (the condition device is activated).

It should be noted that it is not necessary to report the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base Value Calculation Processing Utilizing Characteristics of Arithmetic Circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division processing for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processing than when the CPU 13111 executes division by a program. The base calculation processing described so far does not take advantage of this characteristic.

That is, in relation to the calculation of the base value, in the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23), in the switch input processing (step S74), detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the fired ball sensor 1020 are read, and the number of out balls is counted, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). Thereafter, in base calculation area update processing (step S98), the number of winning balls and the number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

Thereafter, in the base calculation/display process (step S89), the base value is calculated by referring to the number of winning balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Although timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals, it is necessary to complete the predetermined processing for each timer interrupt. Therefore, in the slow division processing by the program, the timer interrupt processing includes the time-consuming processing. In other words, it was difficult to include base calculation processing multiple times in timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, by performing division processing using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required to calculate the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt processing, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

In addition, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for division processing from the writing of values to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the dividend and divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively used, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the dividend and divisor is separate from the output timing of the quotient, the flexibility of the base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) except for the base calculation processing (steps S97 and S98), so description of the same processing will be omitted.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Specifically, it reads the detection signal from the sensor that detects winning balls, the detection signal from the switch that detects fraud, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020, and determines the number of out balls. to count.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 1 (step S97). In base calculation processing 1, the total number of out-balls counted in step S74 is used to update the total number of out-balls, and the base value is calculated. The details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78. FIG.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes timer update processing (step S76) and random number update processing 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 2 (step S98). In base calculation processing 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and the base value is calculated. The details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79. FIG.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbols and special electric auditors control processing (step S86), normal symbols and normal electric auditors A control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 1 ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out-balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of winning balls/total number of out balls) is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

After that, similarly to step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base (base value or base value abnormality) is notified to the player or hall employee. The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 when the display device (liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244) controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 or the speaker 921 is used to notify the base value. and sound output commands. Also, when notifying with the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs and LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED elements. is the drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by the driver, the drive signal including the character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. Also, when the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the game state is during the special prize, the base value calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base value because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). In addition, when the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). When the total number of winning balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Furthermore, when the total number of prize balls is greater than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of awarded balls/total number of out balls) is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that base calculation processing 1 and base calculation processing 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt processing, but may be executed in timer interrupt processing at predetermined time intervals (for example, one minute longer than the timer interrupt processing). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, the load on the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced compared to the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of winning balls.

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 1 ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer. The ball count buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out-balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out-balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out-balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of out-balls is 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 ends.

On the other hand, if the buffer value for the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the buffer value for the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S9705), and the buffer for the number of out balls is set to 0. set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of winning balls/total number of out balls) is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9709).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the base value is not calculated because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the base calculation process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and whether there are prize balls, that is, the number of prize balls obtained is 1 or more. (step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805). The ball count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or hall employee that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for announcing an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls is, for example, a large number of prize balls in a predetermined time period other than during the special prize (for example, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the start prize opening, it corresponds to winning 10 or more prizes per minute. prize ball) is obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls provided with a plurality of stages of allowable ranges.

Then, the timer for prize ball abnormality notification is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the value of the number of prize balls buffer may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the value of a predetermined bit in the number of prize balls storage area may be used for determination. If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall, or the number of prize balls, which will be described later, becomes a predetermined threshold value Th1 or more. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the award number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of award balls paid out by the gaming machine 1 .

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of awarded balls/total number of out balls) is read out from the division result register A131218 and used as a base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the players and hall employees.

After that, it is determined whether the timer for announcing abnormal prize balls started in step S9807 has timed up (step S9815). Then, when the timer for prize ball abnormality notification times up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the abnormality of the prize ball for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so that the abnormality is notified only for the predetermined number of shot balls. may Alternatively, the anomaly may continue to be reported until a hall employee confirms it.

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the above-described timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 23 and 75) except for the base calculation processing (steps S93 and S94) and the base display processing (step S95). are omitted.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches registers by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, detection signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 and the fired ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the number of out balls counted in step S74 is used to update the total number of out balls, and the parameter for calculating the base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 84 .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes timer update processing (step S76) and random number update processing 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information, and the calculated number is written in the main control built-in RAM 1312 . Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes base calculation processing 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the number of prize balls counted in step S80 is used to update the total number of prize balls, and the parameter for calculating the base value is written in the arithmetic circuit 13121. The details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 85. FIG.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbols and special electric auditors control processing (step S86), normal symbols and normal electric auditors A control process (step S88) is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 reads from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and executes base display processing to generate a command for informing the base (step S95).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is cleared. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 1 ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the total number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out-balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 3 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of base calculation processing 4 (step S94). Base calculation processing 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing step S9813 and subsequent steps from base calculation processing 2 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the base value is not calculated because the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the game state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). In addition, when the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. , and the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total number of prize balls/total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

Since the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display processing shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt processing, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process every predetermined time (for example, one minute).

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG. The base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85 calculates a base value for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of winning balls.

FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). Base calculation processing 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps after step S9709 from base calculation processing 1 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, the out ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated, and the base calculation process 1 ends. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer. The ball count buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out-balls cannot be acquired or the acquired number of out-balls is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load on the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without needlessly calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the number of out balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the buffer value for the number of out-balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out-balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of out-balls is 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 ends.

On the other hand, if the buffer value for the number of out balls is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the buffer value for the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S9705), and the buffer for the number of out balls is set to 0. set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so base calculation processing 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). Base calculation processing 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing step S9813 and subsequent steps from base calculation processing 2 shown in FIG.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the game state is a special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for judging whether or not a special prize is being awarded. If the game state is during the special prize, the base value is not calculated because the prize ball is not related to the base value calculation, and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is obtained (step S9802), and whether there are prize balls, that is, the number of prize balls obtained is 1 or more. (step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S9805). The ball count buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player or hall employee that the number of prize balls is abnormal. There are various methods for announcing an abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more methods may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

An abnormal number of prize balls is, for example, a large number of prize balls (for example, considering the number of prize balls in the general prize opening and the start prize opening, 10 or more prizes per minute) in a predetermined time other than during the special prize. For example, if It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls provided with a plurality of stages of allowable ranges.

Then, the timer for prize ball abnormality notification is reset (step S9807), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the number of prize balls buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the value of the number of prize balls buffer may be compared with the threshold value Th1, or the value of a predetermined bit in the number of prize balls storage area may be used for determination. If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is ended without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the number of prize balls is added to the number of prize balls buffer, the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to a hall computer installed in the game hall, or the number of prize balls, which will be described later, becomes a predetermined threshold value Th1 or more. In this case, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the award number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of award balls paid out by the gaming machine 1 .

After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of winning balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. , and the total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads out the calculation result (total number of prize balls/total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as a base value (step S8901). Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to players and hall employees.

After that, it is determined whether the timer for announcing abnormal prize balls started in step S9807 of base calculation processing 4 has timed up (step S8903). Then, when the timer for prize ball abnormality notification times up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the abnormality of the prize ball for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the abnormality of the prize ball for the predetermined number of shot balls. good too. Alternatively, the anomaly may continue to be reported until a hall employee confirms it.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, before the timer interrupt processing ends (before the timer interrupt cycle elapses and the next timer interrupt processing starts), the arithmetic circuit Input values (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 are written at the timing when the division result can be read from the circuit 13121 . Specifically, the timing of writing the input value (divisor, dividend) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is in the first half of the timer interrupt process, or before the random number update process (step S78), or in the special design or normal design. Before the control process (steps S86, S88) is preferable.

Further, whether or not to execute the process of calculating the base value may be determined based on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning hole, it may be switched whether to use the number of prize balls or the number of out balls for calculating the base value. For example, the winning ball in the winning hole that gives the maximum winning ball to one winning ball may not be used in the calculation of the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one prize ball) given when a game medium determined for each prize winning port provided in the game area wins is 1, 3, or 3. In the case of three types of 1 and 5, the maximum number of 5 winning balls and the number of out balls corresponding thereto may not be used for calculation of the base value. This is because if a prize with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the calculated base value will change greatly, and the lower digits of the calculated base value will be rounded (rounded off, rounded up, rounded down, etc.) ), the displayed value may change frequently. This is because, in such a case, it is difficult for the pachinko hall to determine whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether the ball output rate is as set).

Also, the minimum number of one winning ball and the corresponding number of out balls may not be used for calculating the base value. Since the change in the base value due to winning with a small number of prize balls is small, the lower digits of the base value calculated by the processing means are rounded off even if the single prize ball is not used in the calculation of the base value. This is because the displayed base value may not change if the displayed value is rounded (rounded off, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), and processing that does not contribute to the change in display may be omitted.

In addition, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the case where the number of prize balls is the minimum have been described, it is not necessary to use an intermediate number of prize balls between the maximum and the minimum for calculation of the base value. In this case, since the maximum and minimum numbers of winning balls are used to calculate the base value, the number of winning balls and the number of out-balls representing the operation of the pachinko machine as a whole are shown by averaging the maximum and minimum values, A base value can be indicated.

Although three types of prize ball number patterns have been described, the patterns are not limited to three types, and other types of prize ball number patterns such as five types and seven types may be used.

In addition, if a particular type of winning ball (such as the minimum value of 1, the middle value of 3, the maximum value of 5, etc.) is not used in the calculation of the base value, such winning will be All winnings in the game state when detected need not be used in calculating the base value. For example, if the winning to a winning hole that gives five balls is not used for calculating the base value, in the game state in which the winning to the winning hole is detected, until the game state ends, the winning Winnings in mouths or other winnings should not be used to calculate base values. Moreover, even after the start of the game state, winnings in the relevant winning opening and other winning openings are not retroactively used for calculation of the base value.

In addition, when the game state when the winning is detected occurs again, the winning may not be used for calculating the base value, and the game state when the winning is detected transitions to another game state. Winnings up to 2000 do not have to be used to calculate the base value. This is done by not using the number of winning balls and the number of out balls in the game state in which the base value to be calculated changes greatly, in calculating the base value. This is to eliminate the possibility of a delay in the judgment of

When the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state, the maximum (or minimum or intermediate) prize ball for one winning ball may not be used for calculating the base value.

Next, a specific process of not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls for calculating the base value will be described, depending on the number of game media (prize balls) described above.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning opening sensor is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 may determine whether to use the winning for the calculation of the base value. . For winnings that are determined not to be used for calculating the base value, the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls for calculating the base value are not updated, or the calculation processing of the base value is not executed. do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0, and is excluded from the number of out balls to calculate the base value. In process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Also, if none of the detected winnings are used for calculating the base value, the base calculation process 1 (step S97) and the base calculation process 2 (step S98) of FIG. 75 need not be executed.

Further, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 to be excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). , the number of prize balls excluded from the calculation of the base value should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. If none of the detected prize winnings are used for calculating the base value, base calculation processing 3 (step S93), base calculation processing 4 (step S94) and base display processing (step S95) of FIG. 80 are not executed. may

The method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls may adopt the same method as the correction of out balls due to abnormal winning explained in FIGS. 73 and 74.

In this case, it is determined from the number of winning balls whether the detected winning prize is to be used for calculating the base value. In step S93) and base calculation processing 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether a prize is being awarded.

In this way, by excluding the number of out balls and the number of winning balls for a predetermined prize from the calculation of the base value, the processing can be executed without skipping. can be confirmed. In addition, by not executing the processing for calculating the base value and not updating the base value, the processing of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processing (lottery processing, processing for determining the variation pattern, etc.) is executed accurately. can.

That is, even if there are multiple prizes with different degrees of advantage, even if the largest prize is awarded to the player, it is not used for calculating the base value, and the base value is displayed without any change due to the awarding of the prize. be. Further, the calculated base value is displayed without change until at least the gaming state in which the maximum prize is given is terminated.

[9-12. Another configuration of the game machine displaying the base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 4. Either one of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

The board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A is, as described above, the out-hole passing ball sensor 1021 that detects game balls passing through the out-hole 1111 provided at the bottom of the game area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and input to the main control MPU 1311, as will be described later with reference to FIG. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-hole passing ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the starting hole sensors 2104 and 2551, and the number of game balls detected by various winning hole sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, and 2557 The total number of out balls is the number of out balls.

As described above, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game balls flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 .

When both the board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B are provided, the counting result of the board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A and the counting result of the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B are compared to obtain two counting results. An error may be notified when there is a difference of a predetermined value or more. Also, an error may be reported when a difference of a predetermined value or more occurs between two count results within a predetermined period of time.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an essential component, and as described later, the display contents of the base display 1317 (temporary section display and final section display) are switched at predetermined time intervals ( 99), the display switch 1318 may be operated to display the base value or switch the display contents.

Configurations other than those described above are the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

88 and 89 are diagrams showing the arrangement of the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism for aligning out-balls in a row in the ball flow path 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board and counting out-balls with one frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B. . A game ball rolling in the game area 5 a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111 , the general winning port 2001 , the big winning ports 2005 and 2006 . The body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 for causing discharged game balls to flow down to the right side in a front view and to be aligned in a line. The frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls aligned in one row.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls aligned in a ball flow path 960 provided on the back surface of the game board are made to flow down in two rows and counted by a plurality of discharged ball sensors 3060 . A game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the body frame 4 on the back side of the game board 5 via the out port 1111, the general winning port 2001, the start winning ports 2002 and 2004, and the big winning ports 2005 and 2006. . The body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 for causing the discharged game balls to flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and to be aligned in two lines. Each of the two frame-side discharge ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls aligned in each row.

The frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. Also, the frame-side discharged ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the body frame 4 .

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of connection between the ejected ball sensor and the main control board.

The output line of board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected to connector 13101 provided on main control board 1310 via a relay board, and the output signal of board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is input to main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected to the connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame side ejected ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU1311.

A connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and a connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected is connected to the main control board 1310. It is preferable to be provided on the lower side of the

A connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A is connected and a connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side ejected-ball sensor 3060B is connected are separately provided. The output line of 3060A and the output line of frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

Note that the output line of the board-side ejected ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without going through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310 . The output line of the frame side ejection ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame-side ejection ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it is connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. You may

Also, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030 . The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as will be described later using FIG.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and particularly shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensors 1030 provided on the game board 5. FIG.

The magnetism detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of the sensors that detect winnings to the various prize-winning ports 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (star positions in the figure). provided in The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a dashed line on the game board 5 and is partially overlapped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided near the outlet 1111 . This is to prevent calculation of incorrect base values. That is, when the player brings the magnet closer to the out port 1111 to operate the discharged ball sensor 3060, the number of out balls is counted more than the actual number, and the base value is lowered. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 is sometimes subjected to maintenance work so as to return the base value to a predetermined standard value at the game parlor. In a pachinko machine which has undergone maintenance work based on a base value different from the actual one, the number of balls put out in a normal state is increased, so that the player can play in a more advantageous state than usual and can obtain a lot of put out balls. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent such an illegal payout of balls. In addition to the vicinity of the outlet 1111, the magnetic sensor 1030 may be provided at a location where the ejected ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 should have a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030 as illustrated. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when detecting an out ball with a plurality of ejection ball sensors 3060, magnetism is detected within a sufficient range to cover the plurality of ejection ball sensors 3060. FIG. Also, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the outlet 1111 may include other prize-winning outlets (for example, the large prize-winning outlet 2005 provided above the outlet 1111).

FIG. 92 shows a structure of main control input circuit 1315. Referring to FIG. The main control input circuit 1315 includes the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the winning opening sensors (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first big winning opening sensor 2114, second big winning opening Sensor 2554, second lower grand winning opening sensor 2557, etc.), the output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is received and input to the main control MPU 1311.

Main control input circuit 1315 includes interface circuit 1331 and buffer circuit 1332 . The interface circuit 1331 level-converts or shapes (for example, eliminates chattering) signals input from various sensors, and outputs the signals. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at the timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311 .

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to one of terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and the signals level-converted and shaped by the interface circuit 1331 are output from terminals Y1 to Y8 and buffered. It is input to one of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. FIG. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. Thereby, the detection result by each sensor is taken into the main control MPU 1311 .

The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The anomaly detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the input of the A1 to A8 terminals, and the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold (eg, 4 V) or a predetermined threshold (eg, power supply voltage - 0.1 V), it detects a disconnection of the connection wire to the switch or a short circuit of the switch, and if the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold value, an abnormal signal E , and outputs a signal at a level at which each sensor is OFF from the Y1 to Y8 terminals, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and outputs an abnormality signal E when the power supply voltage becomes lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 12V-20%) and an abnormality of the power supply is detected. At the same time, regardless of the input signals to the A1 to A8 terminals, each sensor outputs a signal at an OFF level from the Y1 to Y8 terminals. That is, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit corresponding to the input becomes OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine that the signal output from the sensor is valid (the output of the sensor is invalidated). This eliminates the need for the main control MPU 1311 to determine whether or not to process the input signal based on whether or not the power supply of the switch has decreased. Regardless of the states of the input signals A1 to A8, a signal at a level that turns each sensor off can be output.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, it does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). The interface circuit 1331 receives signals from sensors used to calculate the base value (number of discharged balls, number of prize balls) and signals from sensors not used to calculate the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.). . The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in a sensor unrelated to the base calculation, the base calculation is not executed and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for calculating the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for calculating the base value. Output an anomaly signal to stop the base calculation.

93, 94, and 95 are diagrams showing examples of mounting the main control board 1310. FIG. FIG. 93(A) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93(B) shows the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 connected to one An example of connection to a driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement on the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317 and the main control board 1310. FIG. 95(A) is a front view of main control board 1310 housed in main control board box 1320, FIG. 95(B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95(C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the main control I/O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334. FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 93(A), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333 . Display data is then output from the different driver circuits 1334 to the functional display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 .

In the example shown in FIG. 93(B), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into one latch circuit 1333 . Display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 .

In the examples shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, the main control MPU 1311 receives the reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and the clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 . Signal lines for outputting display data from the main control MPU 1311 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 should preferably be arranged so as not to cross signal lines for reset signals and clock signals.

Connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of board-side discharged ball sensor 3060A is connected, and is preferably provided above main control board 1310 . The connector 13101 is connected not only to the output line from the board-side ejection ball sensor 3060A, but also to the output lines from the other prize winning opening sensors 3015 and 2104 and the magnetic detection sensor 1030 . Connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of frame-side ejected ball sensor 3060B is connected, and is preferably provided below main control board 1310 . Signals from the ejected ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 are input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and buffer circuit 1332 .

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components on the main control board 1310 arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317. FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the printed circuit board that constitutes the main control board 1310 from the back side. Solid lines are patterns on the back side, dashed lines are patterns on the component surface side, and dotted lines are components mounted on the component surface of the printed circuit board. indicates The illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333) and passed through the driver 2 (1334) to the cathode side segment of each digit of the 7 segment LED of the base display 1317. connected to the terminal.

In addition, some of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 1 (1333) and passed through the driver 1 (1334) to each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317. connected to the common terminal on the anode side of the

A chip select signal that controls the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333 is output from the main control MPU 1311. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) receives the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311. , the data for controlling blinking of each segment is fetched from the data lines (D1 to D8). Also, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

A reset signal from a reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from a clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311 . The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333. The latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to cross the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to cross the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal.

This is because, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base indicator 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting. The data line between the base indicator 1317 frequently changes levels. In particular, a large current flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base indicator 1317 to drive the LED elements. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (especially between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) causes noise. Then, when the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the signal line of the reset signal or clock signal cross each other, the signal line of the reset signal or clock signal will have noise, causing the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction. there's a possibility that. This intersection of signal lines can also occur in the intersection of wiring patterns on the front and back surfaces of the printed circuit board, or in the intersection of wiring patterns on inner layers and surface layers (front and back surfaces).

Specifically, when a reset signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that cannot occur originally, the main control MPU 1311 is reset during the game, and the game may stop or the game state may be erased. . It should be noted that if the game state is erased at a timing that should not occur, normal power outage processing will not be executed and the data will be reset. It ends in the middle, or the suspension of the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game is erased.

The main control board box 1320 is partly lower in height and higher in other parts depending on the height of the components attached to the main control board 1310 and interference with other members when assembled. It's becoming For example, as shown in FIG. 95, since the main control MPU 1311 is tall, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area on the left side of , the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and components such as relatively tall electrolytic capacitors are mounted. On the other hand, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low in the area on the right side of the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and short components such as ICs are mounted thereon (tall components cannot be placed). It should be noted that the main control board box 1320 is tall, and hatching indicates a region where tall components can be mounted. In addition, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height equal to or lower than the surface into which the mating connector is inserted (preferably the same height as the board surface). It is recommended that the insertion and removal of cables (connectors) to be connected to the board of the board should not be hindered.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 according to the height of the components mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the act of mounting illegal parts (circuits) on the main control board. can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is arranged in the upper right part of the main control board 1310. However, even if the main body frame 4 is opened at a predetermined angle for maintenance reasons, the base display is placed at a position where it is difficult for the player to see the display contents. A display 1317 is preferably arranged. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened at a predetermined angle for maintenance during business (confirming the presence or absence of game balls in the supply tank), if the player can visually recognize the display contents of the base display 1317, the player can In many cases, the player does not correctly understand how to read the display of the base display 1317, so the player may ask for an explanation of the display contents of the base display 1317. In addition, it is preferable to arrange the base display 1317 at a position where the player cannot visually recognize the display contents. In addition, by arranging the base display 1317 in this way, it is possible to suppress inquiries from players. That is, the base display 1317 displays the base value for the operation of 52,000 out-balls at maximum, but since the base value differs from the base value in a short-time game played by the player, complaints about the ball-out rate may arise. There is By arranging the base display 1317 in this manner, complaints from players can be suppressed. The above is the same for the character product ratio display 1317 described above, and it is preferable that the character product ratio display 1317 is arranged at a position where the display content is difficult for the player to see.

As shown, the base indicator (7-segment LED) 1317 is low in height, so it is mounted in the low height area of the main control board box 1320 .

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are configured by light-emitting diodes (LEDs) will be described, but they may be configured by lamps (light bulbs) or other light-emitting elements. The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400. do.

As previously mentioned, main control I/O port 1314 includes latch circuit 1333 and driver circuit 1334 .

The latch circuit 1333 takes in the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs it. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the input signal, and outputs the power supply voltage (+12 V) input to the VCC terminal of the driver circuit 1334 .

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 captures the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs the data to the driver circuit 1334 from the Q1 to Q8 terminals, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistors according to the signals input to the I1-I8 terminals, and changes the voltages of the O1-O8 terminals, respectively. The outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LEDs forming the base indicator 1317 and the 7-segment LEDs of the function display unit 1400. FIG.

For example, in order to light the first digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) loads the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). Also, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the first digit of the base display 1317 is turned on. driven.

In addition, in order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) converts the bus data D1 to D8 fetched into the latch 3 (1333) to the segment data (LOW when lit) at the rising timing of CS2. ). Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken in the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rise timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LEDs of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 are of the anode common type, current flows from the driver 1 to the driver 2 through the 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, when the segment is lit, the outputs of drivers 1 and 4 are VCC (+12V), and the outputs of drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus to the Q1 to Q8 terminals as they are. A signal may be output from one of the terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary number data obtained from.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. The segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt process. That is, since both the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 through separate signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 are Output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and segment data for controlling lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of common data.

The display data for the base display 1317 and the display data for the function display unit 1400 are generated by different processes within the timer interrupt process and output at different timings within the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation/display code 13135 outside the game control area to generate and output display data to the base display device 1317 . On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 executes the game control code 13131 in the game control area to generate and output display data to the function display unit 1400 . These data are generated by different programs (codes) and output at different timings.

Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Similarly, segment data sent from driver 3 (1334) to function display unit 1400 and common data sent from driver 4 (1334) to function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317 is executed at a different timing from the timer interrupt process for outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and is preferably executed subsequently.

The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to programs (game control code 13131, base calculation/display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but the same In order to prevent the common signal from being transmitted at the same timing, control data common to the two codes may be used to control the transmission timing of the common signal so as not to overlap. For example, a common counter is provided that is commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400, and the common counter is 4 to 7, control is performed to output a common signal to the base indicator 1317 .

The processing of outputting the common signal and the processing of outputting the segment signal may be configured separately or in one subroutine. A game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and a base calculation/display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting data to be sent to the base display 1317, respectively. It is preferable to call the subroutine at the timing determined by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 and base display 1317 . In this case, the output of data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of data to be sent to the base display 1317 are not performed within the same timer interrupt process. The game control code 13131 and the base calculation/display code 13135 are executed in one timer interrupt process, but the subroutine is called in different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, the display provided outside the main control board 1310 (function display unit 1400) Even if noise is mixed in from the main control board 1310, the influence on the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 shows the configuration of the main control I/O port 1314. As shown in FIG. 93(B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram of an example that is used; The main control I/O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400, and outputs display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 or function display unit 1400. do.

As previously mentioned, main control I/O port 1314 includes latch circuit 1333 and driver circuit 1334 . Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I/O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, differences from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. Common.

In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the driver 3 (1334) converts the bus data D1 to D8 fetched into the latch 3 (1333) to the segment data (low when lit) at the rising timing of CS2. Output. Further, the driving timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 fetched into the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

Thus, by sharing the driver circuit between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the circuit scale can be reduced. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate is lowered, the board size can be reduced, and the board unit (including main control board 1310 and main control board box 1320) can be easily miniaturized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (printed board with three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board having patterns only on the front and back sides. For this reason, even if parts can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 configured with a two-layer board, it is not possible to secure an area for routing wiring patterns, and the board must be larger than a multi-layer board with three or more layers. Therefore, miniaturization by reducing the number of parts is important.

FIG. 98 is a timing chart for an example configuration of the main control I/O port 1314 shown in FIG. In FIG. 98, dotted lines perpendicular to the time axis indicate divisions of timer interrupt processing (start timing of timer interrupt processing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising edge of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) outputs common data (when driving) corresponding to the digits indicated by D1 to D4. is HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment to be lit in the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. Latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising edge of CS2, and driver 3 (1334) outputs segment data (LOW when lit) indicated by D1 to D8. output to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 .

After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment to be lit on the base indicator 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS1. The latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising edge of CS1, and the driver 2 (1334) stores the segment data (LOW when lit) indicated by D1 to D8. output, and the 7-segment LED of the base indicator 1317 is lit.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all the data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1 and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt processing, the main control MPU 1311 outputs next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, repeats the above-described processing, and outputs digit selection data and display data. In this way, the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 share the common side driver circuit, segment data are time-divided and output, and the common common data is used to display the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be lit.

As shown in FIGS. 93(B) and 97, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334, so that the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced and high-density mounting (for example, , the adoption of a multi-layer board and the close arrangement of components) can be easily mounted on the main control board 1310 .

In addition, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 with common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be 1317 outputs the segment data at a different timing. Therefore, while controlling both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 by a common data line, both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be displayed and controlled within one timer interrupt process. .

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data for the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data for the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of chip select (CS2, CS1) and erased at the rising timing of chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erase data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, when the display data for the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data for the base display 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is equal to the display time of the base display 1317. be longer. This is done by lengthening the lighting time in one cycle of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing the brightness, thereby reducing visibility caused by direct lighting of the hall. This is to prevent In addition, since the base indicator 1317 is arranged on the back side, which is darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the base indicator 1317 is less affected even if the LED emits light at a low luminance. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the emission brightness of the first LED is made higher than the emission brightness of the second LED.

In contrast to the above, the display data for the base display 1317 is output first, the display data for the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display data for the base display 1317 is displayed on the function display unit 1400. It can be longer than hours.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in states (intervals) involved in base value calculation.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, provisional section display and fixed section display are switched at intervals of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) and displayed. In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, "bA." is displayed in the upper two digits to indicate that the base value A is being displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the lower two digits as a percentage of two digits. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, the base value A can be displayed so as to be 0% or 100%.

Also, in the provisional interval display, if the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the upper two digits (or all four digits) are displayed blinking, and an accurate base value can be measured. indicates that it is not On the other hand, when the number of low-probability non-time-saving out balls is a predetermined number (for example, 6000) or more, the upper two digits are lit and displayed to indicate that an accurate base value can be measured.

In the fixed interval display, the base value of the previous interval is displayed. Specifically, the upper two digits indicate that the base value B is displayed by lighting up “bb.” The base value B), which is the final value of two digits, is lit and displayed as a percentage of two digits. When the integer part of the percentage of the base value B is 99, "99" is displayed, when it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and when it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base indicator 1317 is two, the base value B can be displayed so as to be 0% or 100%.

In the first section, the base value is not measured because the previous section is the test section. For this reason, in the fixed section display, the upper two digits are indicated by blinking "bb." and the lower two digits are indicated by blinking "--".

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the base value is not calculated for a predetermined number (for example, 256) of less than 500 out balls since the power is turned on for the first time as a test section. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on for the first time and a predetermined number of shots are fired, the ball output may vary within the range of the probability distribution, the base value is not stable, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. . Therefore, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317 during the test section. Specifically, in the provisional section display, the upper two digits are displayed as "bA." and the lower one digit is displayed as "--". , displays “--” in the last digit. In the test section, all the digits of the base indicator 1317 are displayed blinking to indicate that an accurate base value cannot be measured.

Here, when the power is turned on for the first time, the power is turned on for the first time after the pachinko machine 1 is completed, or immediately after the initialization of the base calculation work area (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108) is executed. state. Further, the time of power-on generally used in this specification means the time of power-on other than the first power-on.

In addition, in the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, if an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is erased, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the number of all out balls reaches 52000 in all game states (during jackpot, normal game, time saving, non time saving, high probability, low probability, etc.), the next section , and measure a new base value. Note that the number of out balls in one section is not 52,000, and may be any other number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the pachinko machine 1 operates for 10 hours a day, 60,000, which is the number of out balls in one day, may be used as the number of out balls in one section. A round number of 50000 or 100000 may be adopted.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the number of out-balls in one section can be changed as appropriate. For example, a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, etc.) may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out balls for one section may be set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 or on another board connected to the main control board 1310 . Furthermore, if the setting of the switch is changed, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) of the RAM 1312 is initialized and the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section, or from the beginning of the current section. good. Since the pachinko machine is often operated immediately after being introduced as a new machine, the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and after the business period has passed, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a setting means capable of setting the operation that determines the length of the section that is the unit for calculating the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, the operation set by the setting means is used. , the length of one section is set.

In this manner, the base display 1317 switches between the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of the immediately preceding section at predetermined time intervals. In addition, a part of the base display 1317 displays a distinguishable display content, and the other part displays the measured base value.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317. FIG.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a plurality of digits (for example, 4 digits) of 7-segment LEDs, and displays numbers and characters by lighting or blinking segments of each digit. 0 to 9 can be displayed as numbers, and alphabetic characters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and - can also be displayed as letters. In addition, decimal points can be displayed at the same time as numbers and letters. A case where the number 6 is displayed together with the decimal point and a case where the number 9 is displayed are illustrated.

101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of initialization processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The initialization processing shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 is different from the initialization processing described above with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, except that the check code calculation processing (step S50) and the check code storage processing (step S52) are deleted. Therefore, the calculation of the check code in the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. 21 and 22, the same steps as those of the initialization process described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, thereby enabling writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and checks whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activation of the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has passed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. proceed to On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power failure flag has been set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). , the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48 The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may not be correct. area other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. proceed to

Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18) and the power failure flag abnormality in which the power failure flag is not set (step S20) , a RAM error (step S22) in which the checksums of the RAM do not match, and an error in the work for base calculation (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and in the case of power failure flag abnormality and RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack area ) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Moreover, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

It should be noted that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of power failure flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 You may clear the entire RAM area including If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state will be lost and normal processing cannot be executed. should be initialized only. Also, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared in the same manner as described above, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared. No need to clear.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code. , N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal should be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area can be erased or left as is. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are erased under different conditions for each type of data (game control area 13126 and base calculation area 13128). do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. If the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at any timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up base calculation area 13128 is not erased, thereby preventing the base calculation area 13128 from being erased by the operation of the game hall attendant, thereby preventing the abnormal base value from being concealed. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled to have a high base value or a low base value.

When the main control MPU 1311 executes power recovery setting of the RAM work area or RAM initialization processing, the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) initializes various setting registers (step S28), peripheral control board A power-on command setting process (step S32) for transmission to 1510 is executed, and execution of interrupt processes including timer interrupt process is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal (step S36), and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), random number update processing is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes power failure processing (power failure setting means). In the power-off processing, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), the output ports are cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally retained (step S46), and checks the RAM 1312 for the checksum calculation result. Store in the thumb area (step S48).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time data is updated) in the base calculation process instead of the main board side power-off process. By storing the data used to calculate the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code in this way, the data for base calculation and the calculated base value can be saved even when the power is shut off. can be stored and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

Note that the check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in a modified example described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Furthermore, a value indicating normal backup is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56), and writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S58), it waits until recovery from the power failure (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of the base calculation area 13128 in which the character product ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26A is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is constituted by a partial area of the RAM 1312, and is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game area) as described above.

The base calculation area 13128 includes storage areas for the base value A, the base value B, the section counter, the number of all out balls, the number of low probability/non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls.

The base value A storage area consists of 1 byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area for the base value B consists of 1 byte and stores the base value measured in the section immediately before the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter consists of 1 byte and stores a value indicating the section in which the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated each time the section is switched, and is used to control different display contents depending on the section. It should be noted that the interval counter should be controlled to be any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, not to exceed 2. Specifically, the section counter is 0 in the test section, the section counter is 1 in the first section, and the section counter is 2 in the second and subsequent sections. Also, the section counter may be controlled to have a value from 0 to 255 so as not to exceed 255, and the section counter will be 2 or more after the second section.

The storage area for the total number of out-balls consists of 2 bytes, and stores all the number of out-balls regardless of the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). Total out pitches are used to determine interval switching, which is the base unit of measure. In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is measured for each section, with the operation of approximately one day as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area for the number of all-out pitches. As described above, the total number of out balls is a storage area for counting all the number of out balls regardless of the game state for each section. total value from the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

The storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of out-balls for calculating the base value (the number of out-balls in the game state other than during the special prize) Store. The storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (the number of prize balls in the game state other than the special prize) Store. In addition, the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls and the storage area for the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls may be an area of 2 bytes or more, but considering the calculation process of the base value, the same number of bytes It is preferable to

The storage capacity (number of bytes) of each storage area described above is merely an example, and may be determined according to the number of out balls in one section.

When providing the main area and the backup area of the base calculation area 13128 , storage areas having the same configuration are provided in the RAM 1312 .

FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is different from the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. Object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 to the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the registers (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 ( 103) is updated, and the base value is calculated (step S801). The details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80). .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbols and special electric auditors control processing (step S86), normal symbols and normal electric auditors control processing ( Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is measured by the timer interrupt process, so the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts showing an example of base calculation processing.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as described above, the winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first large winning opening sensor 2114, second upper large winning opening sensor 2554, second When there is an abnormality in the ball sensor (board-side ball sensor 3060A, frame-side ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated based on the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331. It is judged that there is an error that cannot be done. In addition, even if it is determined that fraudulent activity has occurred (for example, the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, the vibration detection sensor detects vibration, or the radio wave detection sensor detects radio waves), the base value is accurately determines that there is an error that cannot be calculated. If it is determined that there is this error, the display on the base indicator 1317 may be extinguished. In step S8011, for an error that accompanies the game stop (eg, magnetism, vibration, radio wave error, etc.), it is determined to be an error (YES), and an error that does not accompany the game stop (eg, prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.) It may be determined that there is no error (NO) for failures that are not directly related to the calculation of the base (out of supply, full-tank error, etc.). In other words, the base calculation process may be executed even if some of the multiple types of abnormal conditions exist, and the base calculation process may not be executed if there are other abnormalities.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the ball sensor 1020, the ball sensor 3060 and the like. Get the number of balls=1. When out-balls are detected by a plurality of ejected ball sensors 3060, the total value of the number detected by each sensor is obtained as the number of out-balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of prize balls (step S8015). As for the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process of step S80 is obtained. The number of prize balls obtained in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prepared payout command may be used. Alternatively, it may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command that has already been sent. Moreover, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the reception confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 . Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may transmit a payout command to the payout control board 951 and may be the number of prize balls (the number of paid out prize balls) that receives a payout completion report from the payout control board 951 . This variation is as described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. FIG.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball is detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If an out ball has not been detected, the process advances to step S8022 without executing processing related to an out ball. On the other hand, if an out-ball is detected, the detected out-ball number is added to the total number of out-balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether it is currently in the test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is the initial value of 0. It's becoming Therefore, if the section counter value is 0, it can be determined to be a test section. If it is the test section, there is no need to calculate the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not the test section, it is determined whether or not the current game state is during the special prize (step S8019). Whether or not a special prize is being awarded can be determined in the same manner as in step S810 in FIG. 39 described above. When the game state is during the special prize, it means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to the big win, and it is during the time when the player can win many prize balls, but it includes the opening and ending time of the big win game. may When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are repeatedly opened and closed during one big win, the time (closing interval) from the closing of the big winning opening to the next opening may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810 means that the condition device is in operation, for example, from the finalization of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. It may also include all the times during the instruction to hit to the right.

Furthermore, in the starting prize-winning openings 2002 and 2004, during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during electric sapo may be included in the special prize. Furthermore, in a game state other than during time saving, during variable probability (during ST), and during electric sapo, a predetermined time after opening and closing the starting winning opening 2004 (for example, a ball that has entered the starting winning opening is detected as an out ball) seconds required to complete) may be included in the grand prize. In addition, the so-called "hidden game state" that is in a high probability game state but does not become a time saving (during power supply) is not included in the special prize, and in the same game state as the normal state (low probability, non-time saving state) The base value may be calculated using the number of winning balls or the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal game state and the hidden game state, and the base value may be displayed so as to be identifiable as to which base is displayed.

The hidden game state is a game state in which even if the probability is high, the player does not recognize that it is a high probability state. In addition, the player may look at the base display 1317 and recognize that he is in a hidden game state (that is, a high probability). In other words, in the frame open state, the player can know the game state by whether the base display changes when the staff of the hall repairs the ball in the winning hole or throws the ball in the out hole. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal game state and the hidden game state.

On the other hand, there are cases where it is necessary to manage the base value in a low-probability/non-time-saving state for the operation of the hall. . Such problems can be avoided by calculating the base value while excluding the latent gaming state. A similar problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the hidden game state. In other words, since the normal game state and the hidden game state are different game states in the first place, depending on the business form of the hall, it may be desired to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each game state. .

In addition, when calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the hidden game state, even if the base value is calculated using the dedicated calculation process for each game state, the base value is calculated using the common calculation process. You may By calculating the base value using common calculation processing, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced, and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessories provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment are classified into two types from the viewpoint of calculation of the base value. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the special prize relating to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 is during operation of the condition device (for example, from the finalization of the jackpot pattern of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending), Since the base value is calculated based on the number of winning balls and out balls other than those during the special prize, normal winnings (during the so-called big wins) to the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are not used for calculating the base value. On the other hand, the start winning opening 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening and closing member uses winning balls and winning balls other than during the special prize (low probability time and non-time saving time) to calculate the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (big prize openings 2005 and 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls to calculate the base value regardless of the game state (whether or not a special prize is being played). It is not used, and other accessories (start prize winning port 2004) are switched depending on the game state (whether a special prize is in progress) to use or not to use the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value. will be

Also, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small win) even when the condition device does not operate. In general, small hits occur during a short period of time, and since the game balls are less likely to win due to the short opening, there is no influence on the calculation of the base value. However, it is also possible to generate a small hit during a time other than the special prize (normal time) and open only the time when the possibility of winning the game ball becomes high. In this case, winning balls and winning balls into the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 in small wins other than during the special prize may be used for calculation of the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small win other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly comply with the standard of the base value, and improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is during the special prize, the out-ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of out-balls detected in step S8014 should be used for base calculation. The number of out-balls given is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 each time the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is executed, when an out ball or a prize ball other than during a special prize is detected, and indicates the timing at which the base value should be calculated (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a prize ball is detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If the prize ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process relating to the prize ball. On the other hand, if a prize ball has been detected, it is determined whether the current game state is a special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether a special prize is being awarded may be the same as in step S8019.

If the game state is during the special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls. On the other hand, if the game state is not in the special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 should be used for base calculation, so it is detected as the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls stored in the base calculation area 13128. The awarded number of balls is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). When the update flag is 1, out balls or prize balls other than during the special prize are detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), so the number of low probability/non-time-saving prize balls is low probability/non-time-saving out ball The base value is calculated by dividing by the number and stored in the base value A storage area of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether it is in the test section (step S8028). Then, if the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is time to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the section counter indicates that it is a test section, If the number of all-out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is time to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the time to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 in order to continue the test section. On the other hand, if it is during the test section and the timing is for ending the test section, the process advances to step S8032 to shift from the test section to the first section. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The interval counter changes from 0 representing the test interval to 1 representing the first interval. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). By this process, the test section is terminated and the process shifts to the first section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and that the game is not in the test section, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the number of all out balls is 52000 or more (step S8030). If the number of all out balls is less than 52000, the process proceeds to step S8034 to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out-balls is 52000 or more, the section ends and a process for starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area and writes it to the base value B storage area in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8031). After that, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the interval counter is controlled to be any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, not to exceed 2. Therefore, when the interval counter value is 2, adding 1 to the interval counter The interval counter value is not incremented and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls, and the number of low-probability/non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). If the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch between the provisional section display and the fixed section display described in FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the fixed section display is the period of blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 in FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls in each section is less than 6000. It should be longer enough. This is because if the blinking and display switching are at the same period, the blinking display (that is, whether the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is less than 6000) becomes difficult to understand. This is for making it easy to understand whether it is switching or not.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). The check code calculation method uses the same calculation method as the process of calculating the check code in step S50 of the initialization process (FIG. 22). If the check code is to be a fixed value without calculating it, it is preferable to use a multi-byte value in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, if it is 2 bytes, it will be A55AH (1010010101011010B). to). Moreover, instead of setting a fixed value in a continuous area, the areas may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored in the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. If the check code is a fixed value, it should be configured with a larger number of bytes than the check data obtained by calculating the checksum to improve the possibility of determining a RAM abnormality.

Thus, according to the base calculation process of this embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so the base value can be calculated without delay ( can be displayed in real time), and it can be judged without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal. In addition, the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for base calculation, is extremely small compared to the capacity of the game control area 13126. Even if calculated, the effect on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

Also, regarding the prize balls, if the base value is calculated and displayed using the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning signal generated, the timing of calculating and displaying the base value and the timing of the prize balls being paid out will differ. is different. In other words, a state in which an abnormality occurs in the payout device and the prize balls are not paid out (out of supply, top tray is full, failure of the payout count sensor provided in the prize ball passage, failure of the payout motor, etc.) stop, etc.), the base value is calculated and displayed.

In the base calculation process described above, the base value is calculated using the number of out balls detected in the timer interrupt process and the number of prize balls calculated each time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called multiple times, and the base value is calculated multiple times. In this way, even if the timing for switching the interval (the number of out balls is 52,000) arrives in one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which interval before and after is calculated as the base value. , can display accurate base values in real time.

Also, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area updating process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , You may reset the timer for prize ball abnormality notification. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the timer for abnormal prize notification has timed up. may be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of base display data generation processing.

The base display data generation process is called from step S8035 of the base calculation process and executed.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have passed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499. Therefore, the processing of steps S8042 to S8045 is executed while the display switching counter is 0 to 1249, and the processing of steps S8042 to S8045 is executed while the display switching counter is 1250 to 2499. executes the processing of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every five seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether it is currently in the test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not the test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured is generated in the provisional section (step S8045).

If it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is equal to or greater than 1250, data for displaying "bb." After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether the current section is the test section or the first section (step S8047). In the test section or the first section, since the base value has not been measured in the past definite section, data for displaying "--" in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest defined section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls is smaller than 6000 (step S8050 ). And if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out-balls is less than 6000, the number of operations (number of out-balls) after starting the measurement of the base value in the section is small, so the base value may not be stable. Control is performed so that the display on the base display 1317 blinks (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability/non-time-saving out balls is 6000 or more, the display of the base indicator 1317 is controlled to light up without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the display switching counter is not initialized and the process proceeds to step S8055. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is equal to or greater than 2499, one repetition has been completed, so the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt processing (base calculation processing) that is executed at predetermined time intervals, by switching the display content on the base display unit 1317 using the display switching counter that is periodically updated, the current The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the fixed interval can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, since the blinking display is performed in the range in which the base value is not stable in each section, whether the base value is in the stable range or not can be easily confirmed by the display of the base display 1317.例文帳に追加

FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating a modification of base calculation processing. The modified example shown in FIG. 108 is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105, except for the addition of base calculation work check processing (steps S8012 and S8013). In FIG. 108, the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation processing will be described, but the processing from steps S8028 to S8038 is the same as in FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S8012). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code. , N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal should be copied to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area can be erased or left as is. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). After determining whether 13128 is normal (step S8012) and performing necessary processing based on the determination result, it may be determined whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

The subsequent processing (from step S8014 onwards) is the same as in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal at each timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds). display of base values can be suppressed.

Next, a method for judging abnormality of the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described. The value used for calculating the base value and the calculated base value are stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the "character ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is called the "base calculation area 13128"). read), and it is determined at a predetermined timing whether the data is normal. There are the following variations in which process (timing) the normality/abnormality determination step and the check code calculation step are performed.
101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization processing).
106 and 108: The check code calculated by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is judged by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(Case where the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and judged when the power is turned on)
101 and 106, the process of judging the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) when the power is turned on will be described.

101 and 102, and the base calculation processing shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S8038 of the base calculation processing (FIGS. 105 and 106), A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data.

Also, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined using a check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased, the state related to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value starts from the test period.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code. , N, and the data in the backup area that is first determined to be normal may be copied to the main area to restore the data in the base calculation area 13128 . After that, the data in the backup area can be erased or left as is. If the main area is determined to be normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as is.

In this case, the frequency of check code determination is low, and the consumption of computational resources (main control MPU 1311) required for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
21 and 22, the process of determining the check code calculated when the power is turned off when the power is turned on (initialization process) will be described.

Assuming that the initialization processing is shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 and the base calculation processing is shown in FIGS. A check code (eg, checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Also, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined using a check code whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of check code calculation and determination is low, and the consumption of computational resources (main control MPU 1311) required for abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated and judged by timer interrupt processing)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 and 108, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described.

108 and 106, a check code (for example, checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106).

Also, in step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined using a check code whether the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) is normal. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data stored in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area is normal in steps S24 and S26 may be omitted.

In this case, abnormalities in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

If a fixed value is used instead of the checksum for the check code, the timing for setting and determining the check code may be the same as the timing for calculating and determining the checksum. Also, both the checksum and the fixed value may be used as the check code for determination.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing calculation of the base value when the game state is switched.

One game ball wins a prize while the starting prize winning port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, and after that, the variable display game of a predetermined number of times ends, the time saving state ends and the normal state returns. After that, in the normal state, it is assumed that a game ball wins the starting winning port 2004 which is open.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display according to the winning to the start winning opening 2004 . That is, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in relation to which winning to the start winning port 2004 shown in the figure.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the out ball during the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the start winning opening 2004 is not added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number , The second winning ball is added to the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls.

In the above description, the end of the time saving state has been described, but the same applies to the end of the probability variation by ST.

A similar phenomenon occurs when a big hit occurs in the special symbol variation display game, in addition to the end of the time-saving state described above. In a normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while the start prize winning port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, after that the jackpot state starts, and furthermore, the game ball wins the starting prize winning port 2004 that is open. do.

Also in this case, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in relation to the winning of any of the start winning openings 2004 . On the other hand, since the out ball during the special prize is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the start winning opening 2004 is added to the number of low probability/non-time-saving out balls, but the second winning ball is low. It is not added to the number of probability / non-shortening out balls.

Furthermore, a similar phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In a normal state, one game ball wins while opening the starting winning hole 2004 (electric tulip), then a specific error occurs, and furthermore, the game ball wins the starting winning hole 2004 during opening. Suppose. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error that makes it impossible to accurately calculate the base value based on the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the out Do not use spheres in base calculations.

Also in this case, a variable display game is performed in which the second special symbol is variably displayed in relation to the winning of any of the start winning openings 2004 . On the other hand, since the out ball during a specific error occurrence is not used for the base calculation, the first winning ball to the start winning opening 2004 is added to the number of low probability / non-time saving out balls, but the second winning Balls are not added to the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of game balls that have won during operation of the electric accessory under specific conditions (time saving end, special symbol variation display game jackpot occurrence, specific error occurrence, etc.) There are cases where it is used for calculating the base value and cases where it is not used for calculating the base value, and it is possible to start the fluctuation of the special figure in any winning prize.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the look-ahead effect of the pending special symbol variation display game, the first prize won in the start winning opening 2004 in a time-saving state is not subject to the look-ahead effect, and the normal state The second prize won in , may be the target of the look-ahead effect. On the contrary, the first prize winning in the starting prize winning port 2004 in the time saving state may be subject to the look-ahead performance, and the second prize winning in the normal state may not be subject to the look-ahead performance.

In addition, although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the variable probability state (ST) or the electric sapo state to the normal state.

[10. Recording game history]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game histories will be described.

[10-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine that records gaming history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines an effect that matches the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 from a plurality of prepared effects, and displays the determined effect on the liquid crystal display device. Display at 1600. At that time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines to display a specific effect (for example, two types of specific effects out of three types of super reach) among the prepared effects, the switching of the game state is the starting point. The number of times the special symbol variation display game was played and the specific effect appeared (in other words, in what rotation the effect appeared) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 along with the progress of the game. indicate.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 110, Super Reach 1 appears on the 34th rotation at 10:25, the result of the special symbol variation display game is lost, and on the 127th rotation at 10:54. Super reach 2 appeared, the result of the special symbol variation display game was a loss, and super reach 2 appeared on the 428th spin at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol variation display game was a hit. is displayed.

The display of the jackpot history (for example, the history of the jackpot on the 15th spin and the jackpot on the 50th spin) can be confirmed with a data display provided in the hall, but the specific performance that appears before the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players judge whether the pachinko machine 1 is good or bad based on the extent to which a specific effect appears (for example, if Super Ready-to-Win 2 appears within 50 spins after the end of the big win, it is considered that the big win will be won in a short time). In order to meet the player's expectations, the degree of appearance of the effect is visually displayed. In addition, since the game ball is not fired when the player is confirming the degree of appearance of the effect, if the display shows the degree of appearance of all of the prepared effects, the player can check the degree of appearance of the effect. It takes time to confirm the degree of appearance of the game machine, and there is a possibility that the operation of the game machine will decrease. Therefore, it is preferable to display only a specific ready-to-win effect (a ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win) out of the ready-to-win effects. Also, the history of appearance for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (such as the effect operation button 220C).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it stores information on the number of variations and the effect that has appeared. Further, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates information on the number of times of variation and the effect that has appeared based on the received variation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (effect operation button 220C, etc.) is operated, not all the effects that have appeared, but the number of fluctuations required until a limited specific effect appears is added and displayed. You just have to do the processing to do it.

Also, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 during business, error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 to notify the staff of the hall. The mode of this notification is to display the error screen shown in FIG. 111(A) on the liquid crystal display device 1600, or display the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 112, and outputs an error signal shown in FIG. Typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 113, 114 and 115. FIG. An error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is notified outside the pachinko machine 1 so that an employee of the hall can know the cause. For example, a code determined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400 . Specifically, if the cable connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is defective, the state display LED included in the function display unit 1400 displays "0", and the LED in the right of the door lights up. Lights blue.

However, errors occur due to various causes, such as a minor failure of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, disconnection of a connector), a serious failure requiring part replacement, or fraudulent activity.

The pachinko machine 1 in which an error has occurred must find the cause of the error occurrence, recover from the error, and operate. Investigating the cause of the error requires time and cost, and stoppage of operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error leads to a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hole can know the detailed information of the error that has occurred, the error can be resolved early, and the operation stop time of the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened.

More specifically, the hall uses the hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 according to the signal output from the external terminal board 784 . However, in order to investigate the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, it is desirable to use "the number of winnings in the general winnings", "the number of winnings in the big winnings", "the number of passing through the gate", "normal symbol fluctuation Game history information such as "number" is required. If the pachinko machine 1 is out of order, it can be solved by repair or parts replacement, so there is no big problem. business, and eventually the hall may face financial difficulties.

When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of connector terminals used in the external terminal board 784 increases, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Furthermore, since events such as "winning a general winning slot", "winning a big winning slot", "passing through a gate", and "fluctuation of normal symbols" occur frequently, if all data is output from the pachinko machine 1, data A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze this, increasing the burden on the hall.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in order to solve the above-described problems, data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1 so that the stored data can be referred to later. This makes it possible to check the details of the process leading up to the occurrence of an error.

In addition, since the time of occurrence of events (number of winnings in general winnings, number of winnings in big winnings, number of gates passed, number of normal symbol fluctuations, etc.) that occurred in the course of the error occurrence is recorded, how long It is possible to know how many events have occurred in For example, an abnormality such as the number of prizes won in a general prize gate being 50 per minute can be detected.

If the date and time of occurrence are recorded for each event, the amount of data used to search for the cause of the error will increase, and it will take time to search for the cause of the error. Therefore, when a predetermined number or more of events occur within a predetermined time period (for example, one minute), the error information may be output and notified.

For example, since it is possible to win a prize in a general prize-winning slot in any game state, it is preferable to output and notify error information when a predetermined number or more of prizes are won in a predetermined period of time. Therefore, it is preferable to set a predetermined period of time from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and output and notify error information when a predetermined number or more of prizes are won in the large winning openings within the predetermined period of time.

In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history and outputs it as data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing an example of the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit according to the present embodiment. 116 is obtained by adding a game history recording process (step S1023) to the peripheral control unit power-on process described above with reference to FIG.

In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310 when the received command is a predetermined command. The game history is recorded as date and time of event occurrence in a format as shown in FIG. 118, for example. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be a DRAM, but it is preferable to record the game history in an SRAM that does not require a refresh operation and consumes low power in consideration of retaining the memory contents even when the power is turned off.

The game history recording process (step S1023) is preferably executed before the game control process (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the steady process of the peripheral control part, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped on the way and part of the performance is not executed. That is, even if some effects are not executed (even if all effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed by the main control board 1310 does not change, and the benefits given to the player also change. Therefore, the game history is recorded with priority over the performance. In addition, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to game control, the game history recording process can be shared by a plurality of pachinko machine models.

Next, a description will be given of the processing when the memory capacity of the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit. When the data amount of the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the capacity of the memory, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not have to be updated. That is, the information recorded in memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history. processing can be reduced.

Further, when the memory capacity of the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to erase the oldest game history and record the latest game history. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 every time can be reduced.

Also, when the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed. control, sound control) can be reliably executed, and at the same time, using the spare processing time, new processing (for example, processing that is executed over multiple times of peripheral control unit steady processing due to lack of processing time) Alternatively, a process (for example, a process of switching the selection table) that is executed once in a number of peripheral control unit steady processes because it is not necessary to be executed each time may be executed.

Note that the received command may be analyzed (step S1022) immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table. A type, that is, an event recorded as a game history is registered.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the conditions for generating the commands and the purpose of recording as game history are as follows.

For example, when the starting gate 1 winning command and the starting gate 2 winning command are detected, respectively, when the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port 2002 and the starting winning port 2004 is detected, the commands are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511. , the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each starting winning hole. In addition, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are respectively transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the special symbols 1 and 2 The number of fluctuations can be counted.

Also, the power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the power is turned on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the RAM clear operation and the like. The state command at the start of fluctuation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. The states that can be distinguished by the state command at the start of fluctuation are 4 states: low probability/time saving, low probability/non-time saving, high probability/non-time saving, high probability/non-time saving. You can count the number of changes that occur. Here, the low probability means a state in which the probability that a big win is derived in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol variation display game is a normal probability, and the high probability means a jackpot lottery in the jackpot lottery accompanying the special symbol variation display game. is a state in which the probability of being derived is higher than usual. Time saving, the probability that the above-mentioned second starting door member 2549 is open (or expanded) state is higher than non-time saving, or the time from the start of the normal pattern to the determination It is a state in which the frequency that the second starting port door member 2549 is in an open (or expanded) state, such as shortening, is higher than in a non-time-saving state. Along with this, the probability of selecting an effect in which the duration of one special symbol variation display game is short increases.

A large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and a large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006 respectively. A command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each big winning hole.

For the big winning gate 1 winning command (regular winning or less) and the big winning winning gate 2 winning command (regular winning or less), only the number of game balls less than the regulated number won by the end of the round at the big winning gate 2005 and the big winning gate 2006, respectively. If not, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the closing of each big winning hole (for example, from 1 second before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 Winning status in one round to each big winning opening can be acquired. The big winning mouth 1 winning command (greater than the prescribed winning) and the big winning winning mouth 2 winning command (greater than the prescribed winning) are the big winning mouth 2005 and the big winning mouth 2006 respectively. is completed, a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the closing of each big winning hole (for example, from 1 second before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 It is possible to obtain the status of winning in one round to each big winning slot. It should be noted that this command is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed since the closing of each of the big prize openings 2005 and 2006, when a specified number of prize balls (for example, 10) determined in one round is detected and the big prize openings are opened. This is because there is a possibility that undetected game balls exist in the big winning opening when the opening is closed, and the state of winning can be accurately grasped even in such an over winning.

The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is activated or when the role product continuous operation device is activated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires a change to the jackpot state. You can count the number of hits. The transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the jackpot state ends, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the end of the jackpot state and the situation after the jackpot.

In the small hit OP command, the opening of the big winning opening is relatively short (for example, the opening time of one time is 1.8 seconds, or the total opening time of multiple times is less than 1.8 seconds). A command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small win), and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small wins.

The normal symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the normal symbol stop symbol and can count the normal symbol variation number. The normal figure gate passage command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003.

Even if the lottery of special symbols or normal symbols is not performed even after winning the start winning opening or passing through the gate (overflow, no memory, etc.), the main control board 1310 instructs the peripheral control unit 1511 to open the starting gate 1. Send the winning command, the start gate 2 winning command and the general map gate passing command. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls entering the starting hole and the number of balls passing through the gate.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the error occurrence timing and count the number of error occurrences.

The general winning port 1 winning command, the general winning port 2 winning command, and the general winning port 3 winning command are respectively transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins to each general winning port 2001, and the peripheral The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls into each general winning hole 2001 . It should be noted that the general winning opening winning command may be determined by the number of general winning openings 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the above example illustrates the case where three general winning openings 2001 are provided. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with four general winning slots 2001, so four types of general winning slot winning commands from the general winning slot 1 winning command to the general winning slot 4 winning command are provided. Commands are defined.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a configuration example of game history recorded in the memory.

The game history includes a history number, event, and event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in order of event occurrence time. As the event occurrence date and time, the time at which the peripheral control unit 1511 received the command from the main control board 1310 may be recorded as the event occurrence date and time. Then, the peripheral controller 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310 . In the illustrated game history, the date and time of event occurrence are recorded down to the minute, but may be recorded up to the second.

By analyzing the game history in the form shown in FIG. 118, it is possible to know the details of the events that have occurred in relation to the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 (for example, changes in the game state, results of the variable display game, etc.). . For example, the power-on command with history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, and from the content of the command, the RAM was cleared, and the game started in a low-probability, non-time-saving state. I understand. That is, the pachinko hall opened at 15:30, the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, and after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette), the player started playing, and won the general prize-winning slot 2001. I understand. In addition, the special design 1 fluctuation start event of history number 4 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and from the contents of the received special design 1 design type command (type of stop design), special design fluctuation You can see the result of the display game. The special symbol 1 variation start event of history number 6 occurred at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and from the contents of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol), the special symbol variation display game I can see the result of Although the result of the special symbol variation display game is not shown in FIG. 118, each special symbol variation display game is determined by the numerical value indicating the result of the variation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the special symbol variation. The result of the variable display game (losing, normal per 4 rounds, high probability per 4 rounds, high probability per 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

Next, a method of referring to the information (game history) recorded in the memory by the hole will be described.

First, a history output interface 1590 for outputting information recorded in the memory from the peripheral controller 1511 is provided. When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a history reference command from the main control board 1310 , the game history recorded in the memory is output from the history output interface 1590 .

Also, a data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 , and when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a history reference command from the data collection terminal, the game history recorded in the memory is output from the history output interface 1590 . The history output interface 1590 may be composed of a history output terminal provided in the peripheral controller 1511 or may be provided separately from the peripheral controller 1511 . The data collection terminal is preferably owned by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1 .

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range radio (for example, Bluetooth (registered trademark)).

The command that triggers the output of the game history by the peripheral control unit 1511 is a command that is not transmitted when a normal game is being played after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, even if it is a history reference command dedicated to the output of the game history (see FIG. 117). A command when a special condition (operation) is performed in a command that is not defined in the history reference command may be used as the history reference command. The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Also, a history reference command may be sent under the condition of an event that cannot occur (or is unlikely to occur) even with a command that is sent while playing a normal game. For example, it is the case that 50 prizes are won in the starting gate or the general prize gate in one minute. In addition, the game history may be output when the commands used for game control are received in a special order that cannot normally occur.

An operation panel (keyboard) and a display (liquid crystal display device) may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (where the player cannot see) to display the game history.

FIG. 119 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the peripheral control board and its periphery.

Peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from main control board 1310, and through frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, effect display drive board 4450 and control commands and various information (various data) Perform drawing control of the exchanged peripheral control unit 1511, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and perform sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 It has a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 119, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs for controlling performance operations to be executed, various data, various control data and various schedule data, and V blank from VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to be described later. Various information (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and light emission modes of various LEDs, etc. peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information for managing prescribed schedule data, etc.), and various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state and special effects information for managing flags, etc.), and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. and described.).

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when the power is interrupted for a long time (when power failure occurs for a long time). (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") supplies a backup power supply, so that the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since an SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. loses its contents as it becomes incapable of

Power is supplied to a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d by a backup power supply 1513 different from the backup power supplied from the power supply board 931 . In the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513, the game history is recorded, and even if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the stored contents can be retained. The backup power supply 1513 is composed of a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and preferably has a power supply capability capable of holding data in at least a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to one month.

FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The area for storing the game history in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be configured in a package separate from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in the package of the peripheral control CPU together with the peripheral control MPU.

FIG. 120(A) shows the configuration of the periphery of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d which constitutes the area for storing the game history in a package separate from the peripheral control CPU. As shown, the performance control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. be done.

When the RAM clear switch is operated to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (production control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. data area) 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 120(B) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d that constitutes the area for storing the game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As illustrated, both the effect control area to which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and the game history storage area to which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 120(B), when the RAM clear switch is operated to reset the pachinko machine 1, the data in the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control Data in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. Therefore, the performance control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are preferably physically separated.

Note that the area for storing the game history in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be composed of a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be retained even in the pachinko machine 1 to which power is not supplied without providing a backup power source 1513.例文帳に追加

120(A) and (B), the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d may be any procedure different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. good. For example, a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch, and when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. A history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. may be changed.

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a command different from the normal power-on command.

Further, while the RAM clear switch is being operated, the main control board 1310 continues to transmit power-on commands to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives power-on commands a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. or when the power-on command is received continuously, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing means for initializing the data in the game history storage area in this way, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed even if the gaming machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, for example.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a fixed period, it restarts the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decoration board of the game board 5 is controlled based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the motor drive board serial Door-side motor drive data for transmitting to the motor drive board 4180 from the I/O port via the peripheral control output circuit and for outputting drive signals to the electrical drive source provided on the door frame 3 is used for the frame decoration drive. Signals are transmitted from the amplifier board motor serial I/O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and to the plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED through the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 to drive the frame decoration. Transmit to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 400 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and via the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the serial I/O port for detecting the performance operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable object detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, according to commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, events occurring during the game are recorded as the game history. The event can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall closes) to understand the performance and failure of the gaming machine. In addition, since the game history is stored in the non-volatile memory (SRAM with backup power input), the game history can be confirmed even after restarting the gaming machine.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 117, 118, etc., various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence. Also, for example, when winning the starting winning port 1, (1) the fact that the starting winning port 1 was won, (2) the time when the starting winning port 1 was won, (3) before winning the starting winning port 1 More information than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. This is because the minimum necessary information (information indicating the above-mentioned (1) start winning opening) is output from the external terminal board 784, such as when winning the starting winning opening, and in special cases (for example, error This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be checked when investigating the cause of the failure. This is because if all the internally stored information is output from the external terminal board 784 when a prize is won in the start-up prize-winning slot, the output amount of information relating to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will increase, which may become a burden on the pachinko hall. It is from. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and part of the information recorded inside is transmitted through the external terminal board 784 to the pachinko machine. 1, and in a special case, the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed.

[10-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of a pachinko machine that records and outputs game history will be described. It should be noted that some of the modified examples described below change a part of the above-described embodiment and constitute a part of the embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, for a predetermined command, the event (type of command) and the event occurrence date and time are recorded. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is limited, and it is difficult to record all of the enormous amount of events that occur during the game over a long period of time. Therefore, in Modification 1 (Compact Proposal 1), changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events occurring in that state are recorded.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table of Modification 1. As shown in FIG.

In the game history recording condition setting table of Modification 1, the commands recorded as the game history are defined separately as a command to be counted and a command that triggers a state change. There is also The column of information that can be counted and the column of state change that can be obtained are provided for convenience of explanation. .

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which a counting attribute is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered command issuance as a result of command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, as a result of command analysis, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the state of the game history recorded in the memory, and generates a record for counting the number of events. Add

For example, the power-on command, the state command at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot OP command, the transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation, and the error display command are commands issued by state changes, respectively, power-on, special symbol fluctuation display start, It can be grasped as switching between the start of the jackpot state, the end of the jackpot state, and the occurrence of an error state.

Also, using the count command, the number of events that triggered the issuance of the count command is counted. Specifically, the number of winning balls into each start winning opening can be counted in the start opening 1 winning time command and the starting opening 2 winning time command. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of variations of each special symbol. The large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls to each large winning opening. The large winning mouth 1 winning command (regular winning or less) and the big winning mouth 2 winning command (regular winning or less) can count the number of rounds ended with the number of winnings equal to or less than the defined winning number. The large winning mouth 1 winning command (greater than the prescribed winning) and the big winning mouth 2 winning command (greater than the prescribed winning) can count the number of rounds ended in excess of the prescribed number of winnings (that is, over winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal design stop command can normally count the number of fluctuations in the design. Ordinary figure gate passage command can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate section. The error display command can count the number of error occurrences. The general winning hole 1 winning command, the general winning hole 2 winning command, and the general winning hole 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning hole.

122 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 1. FIG.

The game history of the modified example 1 includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurred, and the state from a predetermined starting point. and the cumulative number of counting events detected until the end of (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the initialization time of the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The state in which the counting event is recorded separately is assumed to be 5 states: low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, jackpot state. A state may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 1 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 122, as counting events, the number of starting gate 1 wins, the number of starting gate 2 winnings, the number of special symbol 1 fluctuations, the number of special symbol 2 fluctuations, the number of general winning gates 1 winning, the number of general winning gates 2 winning, The number of winnings in general winning opening 3, the number of winning in large winning opening 1, the number of winning in large winning opening 2, the number of gate passages, and the number of normal pattern variations are recorded. Note that the number of events other than those shown may be counted.

Two bytes are sufficient for storing the cumulative number of each counting event. In particular, data that is not derived very frequently and does not have a large cumulative number (for example, the number of general winnings) may be 1 byte, and other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, 1-byte data and 2-byte data should be arranged in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or in the order of 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing 1-byte data and 2-byte data.

Also, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. A new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created when the state changes, but a new record may be created at the start of the period in which the counting event is counted. In this case, an initial value of 0 may be stored in the new record created while the count event is being counted, even though no data is stored in the new record. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period during which counting events are counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of counting events in the period is stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read out from the game history storage area and the data recorded in the work area is changed. The numerical value is added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of counting events detected during the state (from the previous state change event to the state change event) is recorded as the game history, the count value of the counting event is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in the history storage area.

That is, every time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the count result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. , will be initialized by the normal RAM clear operation. Specifically, for example, in the low probability / non-time saving state, the information of the game history in which 50 winning numbers to the start winning opening 1 are recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko of the first modification In the machine 1, after the game state changes, it is recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. In other words, if the game state does not change, the game history is not recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the RAM clear operation is performed while the probability is low and the time is not shortened, the 50 winning prizes are initialized to 0.

Also, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a count event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Also, even when the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the capacity of the memory, it is preferable to execute the game history recording process. In this case, the game history is continuously recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current state, and the cumulative number of counting events does not have to be stored from the peripheral control RAM 1511c to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Alternatively, the game history (accumulated number of counting events) in the oldest state may be erased and the accumulated number of counting events in the immediately preceding state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, there is no need to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 every time is reduced. can. Also, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the most recent game history can be checked.

Also, when the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, step S1023 may be skipped and the game history recording process may not be executed. By not executing the game history recording process when the game history to be recorded reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of unnecessary processes and reduce the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 .

As described above, in Modification 1, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (the number of wins, the number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state between the switching is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of Modification 1 is characterized by internally recording more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 .

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of Modification 1, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state. Information (game history) is not written. In other words, if fraud is committed in a state in which no new record is created in the game history storage area (during the same game state), it may be difficult to detect fraud. As described above, in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, the hole can check the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. As long as the game state does not change, information is not written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so even if information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the current state information (game history) cannot be confirmed. Even in such a case, a check function may be provided to detect fraud at an early stage.

Specifically, the first record (latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the game history of the most recent state is recorded and the second record (record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the game history of the current state is recorded. An error may be reported when the result of the comparison with .

For example, in a so-called right-handed pachinko machine 1 that shoots a game ball so as to roll on the right side of the game area 5a in a high-probability/time-saving state or a jackpot game state, transition from a high probability/time-saving state to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, when the state is changed to a high probability/time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, even if the state is switched, the possibility of winning the general winning opening on the left side of the game area 5a is not extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be compared between the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent high-probability/time-saving state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be reported. The permissible value of the difference in the number of winning balls entering the general winning opening between states is set to 1, and an error is reported when there is a difference of 2 or more. This is because when the shooting handle is released, the shooting force becomes uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

A security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. 112 instead of the error notification. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function detects an error by predicting the game from the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, it is a high probability / time saving state, so it will hit right), so that an inexperienced player can There is a possibility that an error will be detected when you hit unexpectedly. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may output only a security signal from the external terminal board 784 without announcing the error, and may not notify the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and troubles with the player can be prevented.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

[10-3. Compact plan 2]
In the above-described modification 1, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change event of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events in each state during the change is counted. was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of recurring state. Therefore, in Modification 2 (Compact Proposal 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In modification 2, the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 121) as in modification 1 is used to record the game history.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of Modification 2. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 123, the game history of Modification 2 includes the history of state events and the total number of count events for each state. The state event history includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, and the time when the state change event occurred. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 2, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states of low probability/non-time saving state, low probability/time saving state, high probability/non-time saving state, high probability/time saving state, and jackpot state. be. The counting events (and the commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 2 are the number of start 1 wins (command when start 1 wins), the number of start 2 wins (command when start 2 wins), special Design 1 variation number (special design 1 design type command), special design 2 variation number (special design 2 design type command), general winning mouth 1 winning number (general winning mouth 1 winning command), general winning mouth 2 winning number (general Winning mouth 2 winning command), general winning mouth 3 winning number (general winning mouth 3 winning command), big winning mouth 1 winning number (big winning mouth 1 winning command), big winning mouth 2 winning number (big winning mouth 2 winning command ), gate passing number (general figure gate passing command), normal design fluctuation number (normal design stop command).

Note that the number of count events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the count events are separately recorded may be further subdivided.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 123, when a state change event occurs, the type of state change event, the state after the occurrence of the event, and the date and time of occurrence of the event are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by a state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in the nonvolatile memory, and the above-described counting events are generated in correspondence with the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the accumulated value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. For this reason, the count results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power failure, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Also, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a count event occurs, the accumulated value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in Modification 2, changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 are recorded, and counting events (the number of wins, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each type of state are recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the .

[10-4. Compact plan 3]
In the modification 2 described above, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded by the state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing of state switching may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of state. Therefore, in modification 3 (compact plan 3), the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In modification 3, the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 121) as in modification 1 is used to record the game history.

In Modification 3, the same events as those recorded in Modification 1 are recorded using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG.

124 is a diagram showing the game history recorded in the memory of Modification 3. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 124, the game history of Modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counting events in each state. Furthermore, the game history of Modification 3 includes the cumulative time of each state. The reason why the accumulated time is included is that the hole can estimate the number of occurrences of the event (eg, the number of occurrences of the jackpot, etc.) from the accumulated time. The states in which counting events are recorded separately are 5 states: low probability/non-time-saving state, low probability/time-saving state, high probability/non-time-saving state, high probability/time-saving state, and jackpot state. Counting events may be recorded.

The counting events (and the commands related to the event) recorded in Modification 3 are the number of start 1 wins (command when start 1 wins), the number of start 2 wins (command when start 2 wins), special Design 1 variation number (special design 1 design type command), special design 2 variation number (special design 2 design type command), general winning mouth 1 winning number (general winning mouth 1 winning command), general winning mouth 2 winning number (general Winning mouth 2 winning command), general winning mouth 3 winning number (general winning mouth 3 winning command), big winning mouth 1 winning number (big winning mouth 1 winning command), big winning mouth 2 winning number (big winning mouth 2 winning command ), gate passing number (general figure gate passing command), normal design fluctuation number (normal design stop command). Note that the number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

Next, details of the game history recording process in Modification 2 will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 124, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of counting events described above is recorded corresponding to the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the accumulated value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. For this reason, the count results in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are backed up in the event of a power failure, but are initialized by a normal RAM clear operation.

Also, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a count event occurs, the accumulated value in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the count result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal RAM clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in Modification 2, changes in the state of the pachinko machine 1 are recorded, and counting events (the number of wins, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each type of state are recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the .

As described above, in modifications 1 to 3, when an event occurs by the game history recording process, it is temporarily recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c), and when the conditions for writing to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are met. Then, the data in the work area is written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. In a normal RAM clear operation, information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Here I will briefly touch on the hall business. In many cases, halls have set business hours, for example, opening at 10:00 and closing at 23:00. For this reason, it is sometimes difficult for staff to monitor whether players are playing illegal games during hours when there are many players, such as hours just after the store opens or in the evening. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of players decreases, and if there is a pachinko machine in a high-probability/short-time state just before closing time, the high-probability/short-time state pachinko machine is initialized for the next day's business, and the low-probability/ It may be in a non-working time state. In this case, since the number of players is small, it is possible to monitor pachinko machines in a high-probability/time-saving state, so it is possible to know whether or not the most recent game has been fraudulent. In other words, considering that some pachinko machines do not require the most recent game history, it is possible to provide an efficient gaming machine by enabling the store clerk to select whether or not to keep the most recent information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by a RAM clear operation, the game history stored in the work area regarding the event that occurred after the latest event is erased, and the game history is stored regarding the event that occurred before the latest event. The game history stored in the area remains. In other words, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, there are information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and information recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The game history is recorded separately. In this way, if you want to keep a record of all events recorded in the work area, the clerk only needs to cause a change in the state of the pachinko machine. The store clerk should just perform the ram clear operation. The RAM clear operation does not erase all game histories, but only erases the game histories stored in the work area related to events that occurred after the most recent event. This is because the store clerk has not seen the events that have occurred by then (since there are many players, they cannot see them).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only is the information about winning the start-up winning slot, but also the winning of the general winning slot unrelated to the lottery is temporarily recorded in the work area, so that special symbols are recorded. While the game ball is launched in the game area 5a even if the (symbol that starts to change when it enters the start winning slot and the winning/losing lottery result is indicated by the stop mode of this symbol) does not change. is characterized by collecting gaming histories. In other words, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed when the lottery for win or loss is triggered, but a process that may be executed at all times while the power is supplied to the pachinko machine.

Moreover, if it is a low probability and a non-time-saving state, it shoots a game ball so that a game ball may win to the starting prize-winning opening 2002 like so-called left-handed hitting and sloppy hitting. In such a case, a moderate prize should be awarded to the starting prize-winning port 2002 and the general prize-winning port 2001 . However, if there is no winning to the general winning opening 2001 (or very few), but there are many game balls winning to the starting winning opening 2002, or conversely, there is no winning to the starting winning opening 2002 (or very few), but if many game balls have won in the general winning hole 2001, there is a possibility that fraud has been done. Therefore, the first winning hole and the second winning hole in which the game ball wins at the same time are set as objects to be monitored, and the number of winning to the first winning hole is a predetermined ratio of the number of winning to the second winning hole. An error may be signaled when the

Also, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 instead of the error notification. The detection method described above may detect an error when an inexperienced player makes an unexpected stroke. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 may output only a security signal from the external terminal board 784 without announcing the error, and may not notify the player. In this way, the hall clerk can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and troubles with the player can be prevented.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is also characterized by collecting information accumulated in a plurality of games as a game history. There is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded. there is

[11. Game performance setting function]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has, as game performance, a setting function for changing, for example, the operating ratio of the condition device.

[11-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 125 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting section, FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having a setting section with the door open, viewed from the rear side, and FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 126 with the door closed and viewed from the back side, and FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the setting section of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 125 has a setting board 970 for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 , and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operating state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974 .

As shown in the front view of FIG. 128(A), the setting board 970 includes a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode, a setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value, a change A setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the set value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that receives a setting change operation.

In this embodiment, operation signals of the setting key 971 , the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control section 952 . Also, the setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control section 952 . The determined settings are transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 . Note that the main control board 1310 may control components on the setting board 970, as will be described later.

The setting key 971 is a signal that serves as a trigger for changing to the setting mode by inserting a predetermined key into the keyhole (key insertion portion) and turning the key to the setting position to maintain the short-circuited or open state of the contact. is a switch that outputs Note that the setting key 971 may not be provided, and another switch may also be used. In this case, the setting mode is started by operating (long-pressing) the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and the setting mode is terminated by long-pressing the setting change switch 972 during the setting mode. good too.

Also, the setting mode may be started/finished by operating the RAM clear switch 954 . For example, the setting mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press). Also, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, the setting mode may be ended by pressing the RAM clear switch 954 for a long time during the setting mode.

By doing so, even an employee who does not have a key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation when the setting change switch 972 falls.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select setting values (1 to 6). In other words, when the setting change switch 972 is pushed once, the set value is increased by 1, and when the set value=6 and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the set value becomes 1. The setting value may be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972 . It should be noted that the set value is not limited to 6 steps, and may be set in fewer steps (for example, 2 steps) or in more steps (for example, 8 steps).

Also, the setting change switch 972 may not be provided, and the setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972 . In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three steps, and the key can be inserted and removed at the neutral position (normal position). (when turned to the right, it functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation capable of holding the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation in which the right position is not held (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

In addition, the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the hit probability of the special symbol), and the set value = 1 has a low hit probability, and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the setting value, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot, the ratio of the time saving (ST) after the jackpot, the number of times of saving time, the number of rounds and counts of the jackpot, the probability of the normal drawing, the general winning mouth, the starting winning mouth and the big winning mouth The number of prize balls that the player can obtain may be changed by changing various parameters related to the game, such as the number of prize balls.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming a setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1 . The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 are preferably configured with switches having different operating methods (operating directions) and shapes so as not to operate both switches by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be configured by a push button switch, and the setting determination switch 973 may be configured by a momentary toggle switch.

Alternatively, the selected setting may be confirmed by returning the setting key 971 to the normal position without providing the setting confirmation switch 973 . Further, the set value selected with the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1 as a trigger may be determined. For example, operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 due to touching the handle lever 504, operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, operation of the production operation button 220C, ball lending The selected setting may be determined by operating a button, operating a return button, or detecting winning of a game ball to the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004. The operation unit substituting the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used in the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

That is, in the illustrated example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board 970 in order to set the game performance of the pachinko machine 1, but the setting board 970 is provided with one or two switches. It is enough to set

Furthermore, the setting change operation may be enabled only by the RAM clear switch 954 without providing any of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973. FIG. For example, the setting mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and continuing to operate the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press). Also, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, instead of the setting change switch 972, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 in the setting mode for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, the RAM clear switch 954 can be selected. The setting value can be determined by operating (long pressing) for a predetermined time or longer. Furthermore, the setting mode may be ended by long-pressing the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating the setting key 971). . It should be noted that the setting display 974 may be configured by LEDs for the number of values that can be set instead of the 7-segment LEDs. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type indicator by a 7-segment LED for displaying the type of payout error. The selected setting value and the current setting value may be displayed on the error type indicator. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished from each other. For example, dots may be turned off when displaying error types, and lit when displaying set values. Alternatively, the error type display may be lit (not blinking), and the setting value may be blinking.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 , but may be connected to a power board (not shown) in the power board box 930 . By providing the setting board 970 side by side with the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated when changing the settings are arranged close to each other, thereby improving the operability of the setting change. can be improved.

Also, as will be described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310 .

As another form, the setting board 970 may not be an independent board, but may be part of the payout control board 951 , the power supply board, or the main control board 1310 . That is, either the payout control board 951, the power supply board or the main control board 1310 may be equipped with the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973 and the setting display 974.

As shown in FIG. 126, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side of the lower part of the main body frame 4 (that is, the frame side instead of the game board 5) constituting the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. When the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 , at least part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 . When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the space between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, making it difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. In this way, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971, prevents the key from being inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971, and makes it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation unit). act as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting keys 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap while the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the keys and switches vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40 . In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap, setting is made during operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, with the body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2). By making it difficult to operate the substrate 970, it is possible to prevent a player from cheating by changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In the illustrated example, the member facing the setting board 970 (means for making setting change difficult) while the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but other members may be used. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 with a narrow gap when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 . Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the body frame 4 may be provided, and when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 with a narrow gap. .

The setting change making member configured to face the setting board 970 may be a cover that covers the setting board 970 . In this case, it is preferable to cover the setting key 971 that triggers the start of the setting mode with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Also, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in a setting board case, and the setting board case has a first cover for preventing careless operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). A body (eg, a door-like lid that can be opened during operation) is provided. Further, the outer frame 2 is provided with a second cover body that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 . The second cover body may be provided on the body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the setting mode from being started by careless operation, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of an illegal player changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head held during operation). ).

The setting board 970 may be arranged near the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 operated when changing the setting and the power switch 932 are arranged near each other. By doing so, it is possible to improve the operability when starting the setting mode.

127, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 stores the game control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 in its initial state. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided for clearing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during a game and can be operated from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) are provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, so they are provided at positions where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so as to be difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent actions to change the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during the game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches are arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

Similarly, the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for the player's machine selection, so it is desirable that the player does not know it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 127, like the setting key 971, the setting indicator 974 should also face the right frame member 40 with a narrow gap so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as visibility making means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section) difficult to see.

FIG. 128B is a top view of the setting board 970 with the body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 . In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 with a narrow gap, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other. The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 , the right frame member 40 is not positioned in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 .

The display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. It is difficult to confirm the current setting values of pachinko machines.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a modification of the setting board 970. As shown in FIG.

In this modified example, a setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting determination switch 973, and a setting display 974, as in the above-described example. However, in this modification, the setting key 971 is arranged horizontally on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

For this reason, the setting board 970 of this modified example is installed not on the side surface side of the body frame 4 but on the back surface side so that the keyhole faces the side surface. As shown in FIG. 129B, when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the main body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, and the side surface (that is, the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is the right frame member 40. , the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, and the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

In the modification shown in FIG. 129, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards. A fraudulent act of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Next, a modified example of a pachinko machine having a setting section will be described. In this modified example, the setting board 970 is provided on the game board 5 instead of the main body frame 4 and is connected to the main control board 1310 .

FIG. 130 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of this modification, FIG. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine mounted with a game board shown; FIG.

A setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971 , a setting change switch 972 , a setting determination switch 973 and a setting display 974 . The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 128(A) or the one shown in FIG. 129(A).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, controls the display of the settings indicator 974 .

The setting board 970 and the functions and configurations of the components on the setting board are the same as those of the above-described embodiments, and the common description will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base indicator 1317 composed of a 7-segment LED. Therefore, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used together, and the selected setting value and the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317 . The base display 1317 normally switches between the base value of the provisional section (the section currently being measured) and the base value of the fixed section (straight section) at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, the selected (to be set next) setting value is displayed during the setting mode, and the current setting value is displayed during setting confirmation (see FIG. 152).

In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished from each other. For example, the base value may be displayed using four digits, but the setting value may be displayed using only one predetermined digit (for example, the rightmost digit) and displaying "-". Digits that are not used to display the set value may display other numbers, letters, or symbols instead of "-" as long as they are not used to display the base value. Also, when displaying the setting value, characters that are not used for displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the setting value is displayed in six stages of alphabetical characters A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Further, in the setting mode, it is preferable that the setting value is displayed blinking while the setting value is being selected, and the determined setting value is lit. In addition, the current set value should be indicated by lighting. Also, in the base display, the upper two digits represent the type of display data, and numbers are not displayed. Therefore, the most significant digit may be used to display the setting value. When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the setting value is preferentially displayed during setting mode and setting confirmation, so the base value is not displayed even though the base value is being calculated. . After that, when the setting mode and confirmation of the set values are completed, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base values.

That is, whether the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is shared with the base display 1317 is included in the scope of the invention described herein. In this way, by displaying a plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 so as not to confuse the setting mode and setting value confirmation, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation and setting value misrecognition when changing settings.

Also, even if the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not used together, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off or the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, the base display 1317 resumes displaying the base value when the setting mode and the confirmation of the set value are completed. By not displaying multiple displays in the main control board box 1320 during confirmation of setting mode and setting values, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation when changing settings and erroneous recognition of setting values.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed as a part of the main control board 1310 instead of being an independent board. That is, the main control board 1310 may be equipped with a setting key 971 , a setting change switch 972 , a setting confirmation switch 973 and a setting display 974 .

The configuration board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 along with the main control board 1310 . When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes and cutouts for operating the setting keys 971, setting change switches 972, and setting confirmation switches 973 on the setting board 970. is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320 , the structure of the main control board box 1320 , that is, the opening/closing direction differs depending on the direction of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970 . Specifically, when the key 975 is vertically inserted into the board from the front side of the board, the main control board box 1320 is vertically separated from the setting board 970 on the front side and the back side of the setting board 970 or the front side box body ( (or cover) and the box on the back side may be configured to be openable and closable with one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted from the side in the direction in which the board extends, the main control board box 1320 is configured so that the front side box (or cover) of the setting board 970 and the back side box of the setting board 970 extend in the direction in which the setting board 970 extends. It is preferable to have a structure in which they are separated by sliding in (the direction in which the key 975 is inserted).

In this modification, operation signals of setting keys 971 , setting change switches 972 and setting confirmation switches 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311 . Also, the setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311 .

As shown in FIG. 131, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side (the left side in FIG. 131) of the game board 5 that constitutes the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. When the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 , at least part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 . When the body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the space between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow. Switch operation is difficult. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting keys 971 as at least a part of the setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap while the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the keys and switches vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40 . In this way, when the entire setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 with a narrow gap, setting is made during operation of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, with the body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2). A fraudulent act of changing the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the board 970 can be suppressed.

In the illustrated example, the member facing the setting board 970 (means for making setting change difficult) while the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40, but other members may be used. For example, a cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 with a narrow gap when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2 . Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the body frame 4 may be provided, and when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 with a narrow gap. .

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces members such as the right frame member 40 when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head held during operation). ).

132, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 stores the game control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1 in its initial state. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided for clearing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during a game and can be operated from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) are provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, so they are provided at positions where they can be operated from the back side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so as to be difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, thereby suppressing fraudulent actions to change the settings of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the setting board 970 during the game. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the switches are arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraud.

Similarly, the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for the player's machine selection, so it is desirable that the player does not know it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 132, like the setting key 971, the setting indicator 974 should also face the right frame member 40 with a narrow gap so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or when the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off to prevent the player from knowing the setting value. is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as visibility making means that hides the display content of the setting display 974 and makes the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display section) difficult to see.

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 130, the top view of the setting board 970 with the body frame 4 accommodated in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIGS. 128(B) and 129(B). . In this state, the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 with a narrow gap, so that the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 .

The display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side of the pachinko machine 1 and faces the right frame member 40 when the body frame 4 is accommodated in the outer frame 2. It is no longer possible to check the current settings of the pachinko machine.

Next, processing related to setting change will be described.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 133 is different from the initialization process described above in FIG. The difference is that the setting change processing is performed in S28). The same steps as in the initialization process described above in FIG. 21 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, thereby enabling writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and checks whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activation of the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the data of the set value and the game state (for example, the probability variable state, the time saving state, the special design and the normal design reservation storage, the prize ball information) is left, and other data are erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 has not been operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S18). If the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. proceed to On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether a power failure flag has been set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). , the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48 The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may not be correct. area other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. proceed to

Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There is a power failure flag failure (step S20), a RAM failure (step S22) in which the RAM checksum does not match, and a base calculation workpiece failure (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the set value and the game (For example, variable probability state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls) data are left, other data are cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. When operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, and in the case of power failure flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, game control area 13126 (including game work area and game stack area) is cleared, for base calculation Area 13128 (including base calculation work area and base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Moreover, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

It should be noted that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of power failure flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 You may clear the entire RAM area including If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state will be lost and normal processing cannot be executed. should be initialized only. Also, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared in the same manner as described above, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared. No need to clear.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are stored for each type of data (game control area 13126 (setting value, game state data), base calculation Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because, if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the set values need to be reset for each RAM clear operation, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

Either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be employed for the processing after step S28 as required. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

134 and 135 are flowcharts showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing, and FIG. 135 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is configured integrally with the main control board 1310).

First, the setting change processing in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 134(A) cooperate will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Whether or not the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the body frame release switch. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, the body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971. Therefore, the determination of opening of the body frame 4 may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control section 952 starts the setting mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as setting change permission state generation means. Conditions for starting the setting mode other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 of touching the handle lever 504, insertion of a prepaid card in the CR unit (prepaid card balance), and there is no need to enter the setup mode if there is a balance deposited into the cash sand. Moreover, it is better not to start the setting mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error). These conditions may be determined after the main control MPU 1311 instead of the payout control unit 952 receives the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by a hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is about to change the settings, so it is better not to shift to the setting mode.

(2) When the setting mode starts, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change start command to the main control board 1310 .

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, it executes RAM clear processing before setting change. RAM clear processing before this setting change, game control area 13126 (including game work area and game stack area), game state (for example, probability variable state, time saving state, special design and normal design pending storage , information about prize balls) are left, other data are cleared, and the area for base calculation 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. Note that the setting value is set to the initial value later in procedure (6), so it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that the setting mode is in progress. The notification during the setting mode includes performing an initial operation of the character and performing a predetermined display on the liquid crystal display device 1600 . Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial action of the role object. For example, in the case of displaying a setting change procedure or state on the liquid crystal display device 1600, performing an initial action of a character while changing settings results in partially hiding the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600, thereby preventing the setting change work from occurring. because it interferes with

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting mode in accordance with the notification of the setting mode by the peripheral control unit 1511 . For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during the normal game (for example, all LEDs for special symbol display are turned off or turned on) to stop the progress of the game. . Also, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, in setup mode, no base value is calculated. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the launch permission signal, stops the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functions as a launch disabling means, even if the setting mode is notified. good. When stopping the shooting of the game ball during the setting mode, the error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the shooting stop period as an error.

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, the setting value = 0 is a state in which no setting has been made, and the setting value = 0 cannot end the setting mode, and the game (game ball shooting , variable display games, etc.) does not start.

(7) Thereafter, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout control section 952 determines whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Although the procedure (1) described above also determines whether the body frame 4 is open, it may be determined at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 has been operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as setting change allowable state generation means for determining whether the setting change conditions are met before the setting change is finalized.

(9) Furthermore, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected setting value, and confirms the setting value. is displayed on the setting display 974 . The setting value confirmation display may display a value (for example, 8) that cannot be selected as the setting value, or may blink the fixed setting value for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting mode is ended, so the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310 . By this setting change end command, the main control MPU 1311 is notified of the determined set values.

(13) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952 , it transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the setting is being changed. Along with this, if the main control MPU 1311 is informing that the setting is being changed, this is also terminated.

It should be noted that the notification (including game stop and shooting stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered simply to be a notification to the outside (players, pachinko hall employees), the notification should be canceled immediately after the setting mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is taken from the viewpoint of discovery of fraudulent activity, it is preferable to release the notification after a predetermined period of time has passed since the setting mode was terminated. This is because when the setting is changed, a predetermined display is performed for a predetermined period of time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the shooting of game balls is stopped during a predetermined period after the end of the setting mode, the shooting of game balls during the suspension of shooting is treated as an error, and the error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during this period. may

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. RAM clear processing after this setting change, among game control area 13126 (including work area for game and stack area for game), set value and game state (reserved storage, information about prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clear processing after setting change, the set values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clear processing before setting change.

Then, exit the setting mode.

Thus, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is configured integrally with the payout control board 951) , the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate to execute the setting change process.

In the processing described above, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine. In this case, the signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 can be transmitted by serial communication, by transmitting a predetermined pulse signal (pulses of a predetermined frequency for a predetermined number of times), or by transmitting a power supply voltage. However, an intermediate potential signal that is not the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent a fraudulent act of activating the setting mode by short-circuiting the terminals of the setting key 971, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 is sent from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board by a signal that cannot be generated by shorting the terminals. 1310 is preferred.

Next, the setting display processing in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 134(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (energized), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout control section 952 determines whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, the body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971. Therefore, the determination of opening of the body frame 4 may be omitted. .

(2) When the payout control unit 952 determines that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, it transmits a set value request command to the main control board 1310. FIG.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives a set value request command from the payout control unit 952, it reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and transmits a set value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout control unit 952 displays on the setting display 974 the setting value notified by the setting value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 .

In the above description, the setting values stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) are displayed on the setting display 974. The set value may be displayed on the setting indicator 974 .

Next, setting change processing by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 135(A) will be described.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as setting change allowable state generating means. Whether or not the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 can be determined by a detection signal from the body frame release switch. A detection signal of the body frame open switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 . The payout control board 951 may transmit a body frame open detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the body frame open detection switch. Also, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the body frame open detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, the body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971. Therefore, the determination of opening of the body frame 4 may be omitted. .

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting mode. Conditions for starting the setting mode other than those described above include operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, detection by the contact detection sensor 509 of touching the handle lever 504, insertion of a prepaid card in the CR unit (prepaid card balance), and there is no need to enter the setup mode if there is a balance deposited into the cash sand. Moreover, it is better not to start the setting mode even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error). In such a case, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 is not being maintained by a hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is about to change the settings, so it is better not to shift to the setting mode.

(3) When the setting mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 receives a setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, and executes RAM clear processing before setting change. RAM clear processing before this setting change, game control area 13126 (including game work area and game stack area), game state (for example, probability variable state, time saving state, special design and normal design pending storage , information about prize balls) are left, other data are cleared, and the area for base calculation 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. Note that the setting value is set to the initial value later in procedure (6), so it is not necessary to clear it in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, it notifies that the setting mode is in progress. The notification during the setting mode includes performing an initial operation of the character and performing a predetermined display on the liquid crystal display device 1600 . Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial action of the role object. For example, in the case of displaying a setting change procedure or state on the liquid crystal display device 1600, performing an initial action of a character while changing settings results in partially hiding the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600, thereby preventing the setting change work from occurring. because it interferes with

In addition, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting mode in accordance with the notification of the setting mode by the peripheral control unit 1511 . For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all LEDs for special symbol display are turned off or turned on) to stop the progress of the game. . Also, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting mode by stopping the detection of winning balls and out balls and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, in setup mode, no base value is calculated. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the launch permission signal, stops the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functions as a launch disabling means, even if the setting mode is notified. good. When stopping the shooting of the game ball during the setting mode, the error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the shooting stop period as an error.

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to zero. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, the setting value = 0 is a state in which no setting has been made, and the setting value = 0 cannot end the setting mode, and the game (game ball shooting , variable display games, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974 each time the player operates the setting change switch 972 .

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Although the procedure (1) described above also determines whether the body frame 4 is open, it may be determined at least once before determining whether the setting confirmation switch 973 has been operated. In this way, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the conditions for the setting change are met before the setting change is confirmed (especially whether the main body frame opening switch detection signal is input from the payout control board 951). It functions as an allowable state generating means.

(9) Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected setting value and notifies that the setting value is confirmed. Displayed on the setting display 974 . The setting value confirmation display may display a value (for example, 8) that cannot be selected as the setting value, or may blink the fixed setting value for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting mode is terminated, so the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, it ends the notification that the setting is being changed. Along with this, if the main control MPU 1311 is informing that the setting is being changed, this is also terminated.

It should be noted that the notification (including game stop and shooting stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting mode ends, or may be canceled after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If the notification performed in step (5) is considered simply to be a notification to the outside (players, pachinko hall employees), the notification should be canceled immediately after the setting mode ends. However, if the notification performed in step (5) is taken from the viewpoint of discovery of fraudulent activity, it is preferable to release the notification after a predetermined period of time has passed since the setting mode was terminated. This is because when the setting is changed, a predetermined display is performed for a predetermined period of time or the game is stopped, so that it is easy to discover that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the shooting of game balls is stopped during a predetermined period after the end of the setting mode, the shooting of game balls during the suspension of shooting is treated as an error, and the error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during this period. may

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes RAM clear processing after the setting change. RAM clear processing after this setting change, among game control area 13126 (including work area for game and stack area for game), set value and game state (reserved storage, information about prize balls) is left, other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. In other words, in the RAM clear processing after setting change, the set values are not initialized, unlike the RAM clear processing before setting change.

Then, exit the setting mode.

In this way, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a slave board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is integrated with the main control board 1310). Since the main control board 1310 acquires the detection signal of the body frame opening switch from the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 alone cannot execute the setting change process, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate. is executing the setting change process.

Next, the setting display processing in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 135(B) cooperate will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation (energized), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 . Considering the arrangement position of the setting key 971, the body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971. Therefore, the determination of opening of the body frame 4 may be omitted. .

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 , it reads the setting values stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays them on the setting display 974 .

134(A) and 135(A), when the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting mode, the setting mode should be invalidated and the setting mode should be temporarily stopped. Then, by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1 and turning on the power again, the stopped setting mode is resumed. The setting mode may be restarted from the stage where it was stopped due to error detection, or from the beginning of the setting mode (set value=0 when no set value is selected).

It is preferable to record a history of changes in set values for a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting was confirmed and the confirmed setting value are stored in the main control RAM 1312 or the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 . When the history of setting values is stored in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off. Furthermore, a history of changes in recorded set values can be output. For example, it is preferable to display a history of changes in recorded setting values on the liquid crystal display device 1600 by performing a predetermined operation.

The interval for measuring the base value may be changed when the set value is changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of out-balls in the section in which the base value is currently being measured is less than 52000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the game performance of the game machine changes depending on the setting value, by changing the interval by changing the setting value, it is possible to calculate the base value that does not mix different game performance, and it is possible to grasp the transition of the base value due to the change of the setting value. .

Also, when the setting value is changed, the interval in which the base value is currently being measured may be continued without changing the interval for measuring the base value. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the conditional device, it is possible to design the base value not to change greatly by changing the set value. This is because, in such a case, it is not necessary to change the calculation interval of the base value by changing the set value.

Also, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting mode may be activated. Considering the method of operation and the layout of the operation means, the possibility of erroneously operating the setting key 971 is lower than the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971. Therefore, it is possible to activate the setting mode. This is because it is considered to be the intention of the operator. Also, in the setting mode, since the contents stored in the main control RAM 1312 other than the game state and the base value are cleared, it is considered sufficient to start the setting mode even if the RAM clear is desired.

On the other hand, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without activating the setting mode. This is because it is assumed that the operator wants at least a RAM clear when both are being operated. Also, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to start the setting mode or clear the RAM. This is because, from the viewpoint of file safety against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the intention of the operator is not clear.

In the RAM clearing of the procedures (3) and (15) described above, the game state data is maintained, but the reserved memory of the special symbols may be erased. The setting value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, and the random number determination result of the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved memory of the special symbols and make a new lottery.

On the other hand, the lottery for special symbols (extraction of winning random numbers) is performed when the game ball enters the start winning slot, but the determination of the lottery result is performed at the start of the variable display game, so the condition after changing the set value , the stored random value can be determined. Therefore, the reserved memory of the special symbol may be maintained.

Further, in the RAM clearing of the procedures (3) and (15) described above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 . That is, in the RAM clearing process in the setting mode, the backed-up game control area 13126 other than the set values is erased (game state data is also erased), and the set values and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. Normally, setting changes are made between the closing of the hall and the opening of the next day. This is because there is no need to maintain without

[11-2. Effect in pachinko machine with setting function]
[11-2-1. Special pattern and special electric accessories control process]
Details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described below. First, the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process. The special symbol and special electric accessary product control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are also collectively referred to as starting ports. Also, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are collectively referred to simply as the big prize opening. Moreover, the first special design and the second special design are generically called simply a special design.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port, that is, the start winning prize (satisfaction of the starting condition), the big hit for each starting memory information (starting information) in which the starting condition is satisfied. A determination random number is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number matches a big hit determination value preliminarily stored in a main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a big win game state based on the lottery result. A game state is shifted to a jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing will be described along the flowchart shown in FIG.

When the special symbol and special electric role product control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won the big winning hole (step S100). When the game ball B wins the big winning hole (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a big winning hole winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the starting hole (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won the starting hole is determined by the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002 or the second starting hole sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process. This is performed based on the input information read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1311, when the game ball has won the starting hole (the result of step S114 is "yes"), executes the starting hole winning process (step S116). In the start-up win-time process, a start-up win-win command to be transmitted when a game ball newly wins in the start-up win is set, a random number for judging a big hit is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a special pattern is set. It also executes processing and the like for executing the look-ahead effect.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes corresponding processing based on the special symbol/electric accessary product operation number, which is a game progress state variable in which the type of branch processing executed according to the progress of the game is specified (step S124). The game progress state variables are stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and are updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to a branching process designated based on the value of the game progressing state variable stored in the game progressing state storage area. End the process. Since the values of the game progress state variables and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information, they are backed up in the main control side power failure process.

In the processing of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as branch processing, special symbol variation waiting processing (step S130), special symbol variation in-process (step S132), special symbol big hit determination processing (step S134), Special symbol deviation stop processing (step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), interval processing before large winning opening opening (step S140), large winning opening opening processing (step S142), large winning opening closing process (step S144) or a special winning opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130), when the game ball B enters the starting hole, the special symbol display device starts to display the variation of the special symbol.

In the special symbol fluctuation process (step S132), a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol and the like are performed. In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), it is determined whether or not the fixed and stopped special symbol generates a big win game state based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole.

In the special symbol deviation stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed. In the special symbol jackpot stop processing (step S138), when a jackpot game state is to be generated, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbols and notifying that effect is performed.

In the interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big win game state and notifying that a big win operation is started is performed. In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), a process related to a big winning operation for making it easier for a game ball to enter each big winning opening is performed by opening the big winning opening.

In the big winning opening closing process (step S144), by closing the big winning opening from the open state, a process related to the big winning operation to make it difficult for the game ball to enter each big winning opening is performed. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the jackpot operation is over, a process of notifying that effect is performed.

[11-2-2. Special symbol variation waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process will be described. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation waiting process. The special symbol variation waiting process is executed in a state where the special symbol variation display is not performed, and when the variation display is suspended, preparations are made to start the special symbol variation display.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of special symbol operation pending balls is not zero. In addition, the number of special symbol operation pending balls is stored for each starting port when a plurality of starting ports are provided. When the variation of the special symbol is not suspended (the result of step S420 is "no"), the variation display of the special symbol is not started, so this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbols is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets a pending ball number designation command as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol/flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol/flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on the random number for judging the big hit acquired at the time of winning the starting game.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command for transmission to peripheral control board 1510 . Specifically, first, as the command value, the upper byte of the special figure variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the variation pattern value stored in the variation pattern area is set as lower command data (step S458). Furthermore, the variation type classification value is acquired from the variation type classification area (step S460), and the upper byte of the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type is obtained by adding the variation type classification value to the command value set in step S452. is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command thus created is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, the change state designation command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above processing is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[11-2-3. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting the variation pattern in the special symbol variation display. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the number of special symbol operation pending balls (step S530). The number of special symbol operation pending balls is stored in the special symbol operation pending ball number buffer. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 sets a jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a special symbol variation pattern based on the number of special symbol operation pending balls and the big hit flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value is retrieved from the special symbol variation time data (step S546).

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1311 executes variation type determination processing for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbols (step S548). The variation type classification value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches the variable time addition value corresponding to the variation type type value from the variation time addition value data (step S552). The variation time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time according to the number of times of pseudo consecutive. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the variable time added value retrieved in the process of step S552 to the standard variable time value retrieved in the process of step S546 to obtain the final variable time (step S554). . Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol/electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[11-2-4. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Next, details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of variation pattern selection determination processing. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of special symbols.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the variation information source table based on the variation table number (step S340). The variation table number is a value for selecting (obtaining) a variation information source table from the variation information source address table. The variation information source table includes hit (hit variation selection information state table), loss (loss variation selection information state table), reach (reach variation selection information state table), reach probability (special symbol reach probability table) and variation type (variation type determination data table) are stored in table information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value (step S350). When a big win is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), a big win flag and a big win symbol type are obtained (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes variation information number search processing based on the jackpot flag and jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hit time variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the big hit variation selection information type table based on the acquired variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 has not won a big win or a small win (the result of step S350 is "no"), it determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S372).

The main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern random number 1 from the lost variation selection information retention table based on the number of retained balls when the reach is not generated in the variation display (step S372 result is "no") (step S376).

On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information state table based on the state flag when the reach is generated in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is "yes") (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes variation information number search processing based on the variation pattern random number 1 acquired in the processing of step S360, step S378 or step S382 (step S388). Then, the variation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the variation information number search process, and the variation pattern random number 2 is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Furthermore, based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table, variation information number search processing is executed (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two steps by two types of random numbers, variation pattern random number 1 (steps S360, S372, S378) and variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, based on the variation pattern random number 1, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as ○○ system reach) is selected. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in a variation pattern command) to be finally displayed in a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2 . It should be noted that the method is not limited to the method of drawing lots in two stages, and a method of drawing lots in three or more stages may be used, or a variation pattern may be directly selected using one variation pattern random number.

[11-3. Explanation of production in pachinko machine with setting function]
The effect of the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described below. Specifically, a setting suggestion rendering that suggests the current settings will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the greater the number of game balls to be paid out with respect to the number of special lotteries. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning a big hit in the non-variable state (for example, setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4: 1/270 , setting 5: 1/250, setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 with the highest possible settings, the player's willingness to play is enhanced by installing the setting suggesting effect.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, the main control MPU 1311 selects a variation pattern directly with one variation pattern random number in the variation pattern selection determination process of step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 executes the following processing in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state (whether it is a time-saving state (state in which time-saving control is being executed) or a normal state other than the time-saving state), and the result of the special lottery (won the jackpot It selects a variation pattern table according to whether it is positive or negative). If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number for the variation pattern, and based on the acquired random number for the variation pattern and the distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, A variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is out, it is further determined whether or not reach occurs, the random number for the variation pattern is obtained, and the obtained random number for the variation pattern and the distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, Based on, the variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table.

FIG. 140(A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is lost. FIG. 140(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big win.

The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control ROM 1313, for example. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding effect content column, and a variation pattern determination random number distribution column. The variation pattern type column stores information specifying the type for identifying the variation pattern in the table. The fluctuation time column stores information specifying the fluctuation time in the corresponding fluctuation pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information specifying the effect content to be executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for determining the variation pattern stores the distribution for selecting the corresponding variation pattern for each setting. In addition, the random number column for determining the variation pattern of the variation pattern table selected when the special lottery result is out (that is, the variation pattern table in FIG. 140 (A) and FIG. 145 (A) described later) is when reach occurs. And for each of reach non-occurrence time, the distribution in which the corresponding variation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[11-4. Setting Suggestion Effect Executed After Temporary Display of Special Lottery Result]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A) will be described. First, the effect executed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 141 as well.

FIG. 141 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). In the variation of the loss variation pattern 20, after the special lottery result is likely to be lost after SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be lost is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the special lottery result is lost. A confirmation display indicating that there is a game is displayed on the effect display device 1600 . On the other hand, in the fluctuations of the lost fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, after the special lottery result is likely to be lost after the SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A suggestive effect is executed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is lost is displayed on the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加

In this way, in the variation patterns 25 to 29, after the provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be lost is performed, the setting suggestion effect is performed, so that even if the provisional display is performed The player can expect the generation of the setting suggesting effect after that and maintain the sense of anticipation. In addition, when the setting suggesting performance is generated in the loss fluctuation, even if the special lottery result is a loss, the disappointment of the player due to the result of the special lottery can be suppressed, and the feeling of exhilaration can be enhanced.

In addition, in the variation of the loss variation pattern 24, after the special lottery result is likely to be lost after the SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be lost is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the setting suggesting effect is executed. Although the false effect suggesting is executed, the setting suggesting effect itself is not performed, and a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is lost is displayed on the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加

The SP reach is a ready-to-win effect that is highly selected when the special lottery result is a big hit and is less likely to be selected when the special lottery result is a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit of variation in which SP reach is executed is high.

Below, the effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically described. In addition to the contents described below, in each production, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and/or display on the production display device 1600, etc. are executed at the same time. good too.

In the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, first, the pre-reach effect is executed. In the pre-reach performance, all the decorative symbols change in the performance display device 1600. - 特許庁Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, it develops into a normal reach effect. In the normal ready-to-win effect, the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, among three decorative patterns (for example, a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern), the left pattern and the right pattern stop at the same pattern, and the middle pattern is fluctuating.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, it develops to SP reach 1, and the first half production of SP reach 1 is executed. In SP reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and they play rock-paper-scissors. In the first half production of SP reach 1 in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the production display device 1600 executes a production in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game. During the SP reach, the decorative pattern may be displayed smaller and closer to the periphery of the display device 1600 than during the pre-reach performance and during the normal reach performance, for example.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, it develops into the second half performance of SP reach 1. In the second half production of SP reach 1 in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called revival production is executed, for example, at the start of the second half production, the main character's voice such as "still more!" On the display device 1600, an effect is executed in which a rock-paper-scissors game is played again between the main character and the enemy character. In the second half production of SP reach 1 in the loss fluctuation patterns 24 to 29, the production display device 1600 executes the production that the main character loses again to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game.

Subsequently, a provisional display that the special lottery result is out is executed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one combination of the decorative symbols in the off state (for example, the left and right decorative symbols are the same symbols as the symbols stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is the A pattern different from the same pattern) is displayed in a manner of swaying in a small width.

Subsequently, in the loss variation pattern 20, after the provisional display, the effect display device 1600 displays a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss without any other effect being performed. In the loss variation pattern 24, the setting suggestion false effect is executed after the provisional display, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and then the effect display device 1600 displays a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. In the final display, for example, in the effect display device 1600, the same combination of decorative symbols displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped manner. In the temporary display and final display, the decorative pattern is displayed, for example, in the center of the effect display device 1600 in the same size as during the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

In the setting-suggestion fake effect in the deviation variation pattern 24, for example, in the effect display device 1600, an effect is executed in which one main character finds two enemy characters and chases the enemy characters but cannot catch them. Like the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 24 in FIG. 140(A), it is desirable that the distribution of the variation patterns in which the setting suggestion fake effect is executed is uniform or approximately uniform in all settings. This is because, if the distribution is not even, the setting suggestion fake effect suggests the setting.

In addition, it is desirable that the proportion of the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 24 in the total distribution of the fluctuations in which the SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, the setting suggestion fake effect will occur frequently when the SP reach 1 develops, and there is a possibility that the player's expectation for the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect will be reduced.

In the set-suggestion effects in the outlier variation patterns 25 to 29, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one main character finds two enemy characters, chases and catches the enemy characters, and then three people play rock-paper-scissors. A performance is performed.

In the setting-suggestion effect in the outlier variation pattern 25, a effect is executed in which the three players play rock-paper-scissors game and become in love with each other. Also, in FIG. 140(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 25 is determined to be sorted only in the low settings (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation pattern 25 is the effect that the low setting is confirmed.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 140 (A), the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 25 is the same value as the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 26 etc. in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is If it occurs, the player may stop the game early, so the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of other set fixed effects in other settings, or the deviation variation pattern 25 itself may not exist.

In the set-suggestion effect in the outlier variation pattern 26, an effect is executed in which all three players pull out scissors in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players and become in love with each other. Also, in FIG. 140(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 26 is determined to be sorted only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation pattern 26 is a effect in which the high setting is confirmed.

In the set-suggestion effect in the loss variation pattern 27, an effect is executed in which all three players get a par in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players. Also, in FIG. 140(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 27 is determined to be distributed only in the even number settings (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation pattern 27 is the effect that the even setting is confirmed.

In the set-suggestion effect in the outlier variation pattern 28, an effect is executed in which the three players put out different moves in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players and become in love with each other. Also, in FIG. 140(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 28 is determined to be distributed only in odd number settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation pattern 28 is the effect that the odd setting is confirmed.

In addition, for example, when the odd number setting and the even number setting have different characteristics, the player's interest in the effect can be attracted by installing the odd number setting confirmed effect or the even number set confirmed effect as described above. .

Specifically, for example, in order of setting 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1, the probability of winning the jackpot in the normal state is high (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), setting 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, In order of 2, the ratio of probability variable jackpots among jackpot winnings is high (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are set in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and probability variation rate in each setting are determined so that the ratio of the total number of game balls put out to the winning number of game balls to the game ball is high (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest).

In this case, compared to the odd number setting, the even number setting has a higher jackpot winning probability in the normal state, but a lower probability variable ratio, that is, the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be smaller. The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in one consecutive game from the beginning tends to be small. On the other hand, compared to the even number setting, the odd number setting has a low jackpot winning probability in the normal state, but a high probability variation ratio, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first win tends to be large, but the first win The total amount of game balls that can be obtained from a single consecutive residence tends to be large. In such a case, there is a possibility that one player prefers an even-numbered ball payout tendency and another player prefers an odd-numbered ball payout tendency. The player's interest in the performance increases. Also, compared to the odd number setting, the even number setting may have a feature such as a higher jackpot winning probability in the normal state, but a larger jackpot with a smaller number of rounds being more likely to be selected.

In the outlier variation patterns 25 to 29 described above, the effect until the setting suggestion effect starts is the same, but the content of the setting suggestion effect is different (the results of the rock-paper-scissors game among three players are different). Incidentally, it is desirable that the three-person rock-paper-scissors game effect be used only in the lost variation patterns 25-29. As a result, when the three-person rock-paper-scissors game performance starts, the player can recognize that the setting suggesting performance has started, and the feeling of exhilaration is heightened.

It should be noted that, for example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect in which the high setting is confirmed is executed, but it may be a variation pattern in which an effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting is high is executed. Specifically, for example, if there is a distribution of the fluctuation pattern 25 even in the low setting, and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the fluctuation pattern 25 in the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the production in the outlier fluctuation pattern 25 is not a production that confirms the high setting, but a production that suggests that the possibility of high setting is high.

In addition to the variation pattern in which the effect that the high setting is confirmed is performed, a variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting as described above is performed may be determined. What has been described above is the same for the low setting confirmation effect, the odd setting confirmation effect, the even setting confirmation effect, the highest setting confirmation effect, and the like.

According to the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(B) (variation pattern table at normal time and jackpot winning), when the special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, the winning variation pattern other than 34 whose maximum setting is fixed The setting suggestion effect of is not executed. In addition, the distribution of variation patterns in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is high compared to the case where the special lottery result is a loss. As a result, the setting suggestion performance becomes a performance mainly executed when the special lottery result is a win, and the player can get a sense of expectation even when the special lottery result is a win.

[11-5. Setting Suggestion Production Using Shortened Variation]
The deviation fluctuation pattern 30 will be described below with reference to FIG. 142 as well. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A).

For outlier variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, shortening variation is performed. The shortened variation is, for example, a variation in which the variation time is shorter than other variation patterns, and after starting the variation of the decorative symbols on the production display device 1600, all the decorative symbols are displayed without developing into a ready-to-win state. is the fluctuation that stops. In the normal variation, the decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600 are stopped in the order of left, right, and middle symbols, for example, but in the shortened variation, all the decorative symbols may be stopped all at once.

Subsequently, in loss fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, after provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be a loss is performed, final display is performed to indicate that the special lottery result is a loss. Descriptions of temporary display and final display are omitted because they are the same as those described above.

The outlier variation pattern 30 has a variation time that is different from the variation times of all other variation patterns such as the outlier variation patterns 1 and 2 for which shortening variation is performed. In the example of FIG. 140(A), the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the variation time of the deviation variation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. . Also, in FIG. 140(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is determined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In addition, the distribution of the deviating fluctuation pattern 30, which is a fluctuation pattern in which shortening fluctuation is executed and suggests setting, is extremely low compared to the distribution of other fluctuation patterns in which shortening fluctuation is executed (for example, the other fluctuation pattern is less than 10% of the minimum allocation of ). Moreover, in each variation pattern in which shortened variation is performed, it is desirable that the execution time of temporary display and final display be the same, and that only the time of shortened variation is different. Also, it is desirable that the difference between the variation time of the outlier variation pattern 30 and the variation time of the variation pattern in which other shortened variation is executed is recognizable by the player (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). .

As a result, when the shortened variation is executed, the player assumes a variation time such as the often-distributed outlier variation patterns 1 and 2, but when the outlier variation pattern 30 is executed, the variation time does not match the assumed variation time. You can recognize the difference and enjoy the production that the highest setting is fixed. In particular, in the example of FIG. 140(A), since the variation pattern including the shortened variation is selected only when the reach is out of reach, the player's expectation is reduced when the shortened variation is executed, and the interest in the shortened variation is reduced. I can't have it. However, by executing the setting suggestion effect using the shortened variation in this way, the player can have expectations for the shortened variation that is selected only when the reach is out of reach, and suppresses the decline in interest. can do.

Also, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, although the content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is the same, only the shortening fluctuation time is different. As a result, the player can concentrate on the performance so as not to miss the highest setting fixed performance.

Note that the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is a fluctuation pattern in which the maximum setting is confirmed and the shortened fluctuation is executed. Patterns may exist. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the variation time of each of the variation patterns is different from the variation time of other deviating variation patterns for which shortening variation is performed.

[11-6. Setting Suggestion Effect Executed Before Temporary Display of Special Lottery Result]
The loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described below with reference to FIG. 143 as well. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). In FIG. 140, the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are determined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, a special movie 1 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the losing variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, that is, an effect in which the highest setting is determined.

In the loss variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be lost is performed, and then final display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is performed. In the winning variation pattern 34, after the special movie 1 ends, temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is winning is performed, and then final display indicating that the special lottery result is winning is performed.

Unlike the loss variation patterns 25 to 30 and the like, the loss variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 start the setting suggesting effect before the provisional display (specifically, for example, at the same time as the variation starts). As a result, the player can get an exhilarating feeling waiting for the notification of the result of the jackpot lottery while the maximum setting is fixed. In addition, when the display time of the special movie 1 is particularly long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and thus the player can The player can feel a sense of superiority over the other player, and the hole can easily appeal to the other player that the highest setting is used.

[11-7. Setting suggestion production that confirms jackpot winning or high setting]
The loss variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described below with reference to FIG. 144 as well. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the winning variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 140(A). In FIG. 140(A), the deviation fluctuation pattern 32 is determined to be distributed only in high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation fluctuation pattern 32 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the loss variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, a special movie 2 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that occurs only with the losing variation pattern 31 and the winning variation pattern 34.

In the loss variation pattern 32, after the special movie 2 is finished, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is highly likely to be lost is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is a loss is performed. In the winning variation pattern 35, after the special movie 2 ends, temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is winning is performed, and then final display indicating that the special lottery result is winning is performed.

Therefore, when the special movie 2 occurs, either the high setting or the big hit in the variation is decided. In other words, if the special lottery result is lost after the special movie 2 occurs, the high setting is confirmed, so the player can suppress the disappointment of the special lottery result being lost, and thus the high setting is achieved. A feeling of elation can be obtained by confirming

In addition, when the display time of the special movie 2 is particularly long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel a sense of superiority over the other players. When the special lottery result is a loser, the hole can easily appeal to other players that the high setting is used.

[11-8. Setting suggestion production in time saving state]
Hereinafter, the variation pattern selected in the game state time saving state will be described. FIG. 145(A) is an example of a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out. FIG. 145(B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

In the example of FIG. 145(A), the higher the setting, the larger the allocation of the loss variation pattern 3 and the smaller the allocation of the loss variation pattern 2 at the time of the loss without reach. Also, the variation time of the error variation pattern 2 is shorter than the variation time of the error variation pattern 3 . For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning a big hit, and if the distribution of each variation pattern is the same for all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win a big win in a short time. There is a risk that the number of game balls to be paid out will increase, leading to a burden on the hole.

However, as shown in the example of FIG. 145(A), the higher the setting, the more variation patterns with longer variation times are distributed, so that the number of game balls paid out by the big hit per unit time in each setting can be equalized. can. In addition, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of the deviating variation pattern 3, which has a longer variation time, among the variation patterns including the shortening variation. Therefore, the deviating variation pattern 3 also functions as a variation pattern that suggests a high setting. can be done.

Similarly, when the reach is not reached, the higher the setting, the larger the allocation of the deviation fluctuation pattern 11 with a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the allocation of the deviation fluctuation pattern 12 with a short fluctuation time. Likewise, when the big win is won, the higher the setting, the larger the allocation of the winning variation pattern 2 with the longer variation time and the smaller the allocation of the winning variation pattern 3 with the shorter variation time.

As described above, for example, if the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning a big hit, and if the distribution of each variation pattern is the same for all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win a big win in a short time. In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the big win, and the more game balls are shot until the big win is won. For example, the lower the setting, the greater the distribution of variation patterns with a long variation time, and the lower the selection rate of variation patterns with a short variation time. It is possible to equalize the number of shots of game balls per unit time in the setting.

It should be noted that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing when the setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. Note that the predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be dedicated ones that are executed only during the setting suggestion effect. In addition, especially in the setting suggestion effect in which the high setting and the maximum setting are confirmed, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect output and a predetermined light emission effect, which are executed only in the setting suggestion effect, are executed.

It should be noted that it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which an effect suggesting that the high setting or the highest setting is confirmed or executed with a high possibility is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns. When the distribution of the variation pattern is high, the player loses expectations and ends up playing the game early if the high setting suggesting effect or the highest setting suggesting effect is not executed even though the player is playing for only a short playing time. This is because there is a risk of discontinuation.

In addition, it is desirable that the distribution of variation patterns in which an effect suggesting that the low setting or the lowest setting is confirmed or executed with a high possibility is extremely low compared to the distribution of other variation patterns. This is because, if the distribution of the variation pattern is high, the low setting suggesting performance and the minimum setting suggesting performance are frequently executed, so that the player loses his sense of anticipation and eventually stops playing the game at an early stage.

Also, the setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting group such as high setting, low setting, maximum setting, odd setting, and even setting has been described, but the setting group in the setting suggesting effect is not limited to these. A setting suggestion effect may be executed for any group consisting of one or more settings. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be grouped as low settings, settings 3 and 4 as medium settings, and settings 5 and 6 as high settings.

[11-9. Other form of pachinko machine with setting function]
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIG. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a dotted line.

In the above description, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974. , the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 , and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974 .

FIG. 146(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without being destroyed once closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the base display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 146(B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In the example shown in FIG. 146(B), on the main control board 1310, a main control MPU 1311, a driver circuit (not shown), a base display 1317, a base display switch 1318 and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted. . In addition, the RAM clear switch 954 may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board) without being mounted on the main control board 1310 . In this case, main control board box 1320 is not provided with hole 954A.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971) are provided in the main control board box 1320 to trigger RAM clear. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 where data is erased differs between when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be made by connecting the boards directly with a connector or by using an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode and a setting display 974 for displaying set or selected setting values are mounted. A setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970 .

Outputs of various switches 971 , 972 , and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to ports of the main control MPU 1311 .

Also, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970 .

Since the main control board box 1320 is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 , the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position that can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 .

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each pachinko machine manufacturer is set in the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads the authentication code set in the setting board 970 and checks it. If the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from starting a game. In other words, the game ball can be shot toward the game area, but the prize ball is not paid out even if it enters the winning hole, and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each pachinko machine model, or may be set for each pachinko machine serial number. The method of setting the authentication code includes, for example, setting the authentication code with a DIP switch, jumper wire, jumper pin, pattern short circuit, etc. provided on the setting board 970, or setting the authentication code in a logic circuit (for example, A small-capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array)) may be mounted on the setting board 970 .

Also, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. FIG. For example, by outputting different signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs +5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). Signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to specific ports of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1311 determines the connected board by the input signal to the port.

In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model), it is possible to prevent the wrong setting board 970 from being mounted on the main control board box 1320 . By setting the authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970 can be prevented.

FIG. 146(C) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A).

As described above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a game performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 related to prize balls won by the player, such as the probability of a big hit in the special symbol variation display game, and the setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 in accordance with the hall business policy. On the other hand, there are halls where conventional pachinko machines without setting functions are sufficient and the setting functions are unnecessary. For this reason, pachinko machine manufacturers must design and produce both pachinko machines without setting functions and pachinko machines with setting functions. There is a demand for efficient design and production of pachinko machines.

For this reason, in the pachinko machine 1 that does not have the setting function, the dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same manner as when the setting board 970 is mounted. to Further, the main control board 1310 can be shared between a pachinko machine without a setting function and a pachinko machine with a setting function.

Dummy board 979 does not have devices mounted on setting board 970 such as setting keys 971 and setting display 974, but may have patterns for mounting these devices. That is, a pattern for mounting a device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, but no device is mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 may be a member (for example, a unit made up of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970 without being made up of a printed board.

Also, since the driver circuit of the setting indicator 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting indicator 974 is neither open nor grounded on the dummy board 979, and is terminated by a dummy resistor. Good. This can prevent damage to the driver circuit due to overcurrent. Also, when the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310 .

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 971A. A setting function is provided by providing a small door in the main control board box 1320 which can be moved to close the hole 971A so as to be operable from the inside of the main control board box 1320 and not operable from the outside. The main control board box 1320 may be made common for a pachinko machine that does not have a setting function and a pachinko machine that has a setting function.

An authentication code for authentication by the main control board 1310 may also be set in the dummy board 979 to be described later. Also, the dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310 and does not need to be set with an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above are summarized as follows.

(1) With a setting change switch 972 and with a setting confirmation switch 973. In this case, insert the key 975 into the setting key 971 and turn it to the setting position (while pressing the RAM clear switch 954), the pachinko machine will start. Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, the setting determination switch 973 is operated.

(2) With the setting change switch 972 and without the setting confirmation switch 973. In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (while the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without setting change switch 972 and with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (while the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select the setting value to be set, the setting determination switch 973 is operated. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the set value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

(4) Without setting change switch 972 and without setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the setting position (while the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine is operated. Operate the power switch 1 to turn on the power. After selecting the set value to be set by operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the set value to be set may be selected by turning the setting key 971 to the right.

147 and 148 are diagrams showing another mounting example of the main control board 1310. FIG. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a dotted line.

The implementation example shown in FIGS. 147 and 148 differs from the implementation example shown in FIG. 146 in that a main control board box 1320 is provided with a small door 1321 .

FIG. 147(A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this implementation example. As described above, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened once closed without breaking. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the base display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode. A hole 976A for manipulating 976 is provided.

The hole 976A is normally covered with a small door 1321. A key unit 1322 is provided on the small door 1321. By inserting a key 975 into the key hole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed. The mode switch 976 becomes operable.

As shown in FIG. 148(A), in a normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the bar 1323 is at the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, and the bar 1323 is inserted into the receiving seat 1324. are engaged to fix the small door 1321 in the closed position. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated as shown in FIG. , the hinge 1325 as an axis, the small door 1321 can be opened. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 148(B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 149 is a diagram showing yet another mounting example of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIG. In the mounting example shown in FIG. 149, a key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980 that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 1 . That is, by inserting the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the back cover 980 is opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (the setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It becomes possible.

That is, in a normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed by closing the back side of the main body frame base 600 , and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980 . On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and rotated, the rear cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the rear cover 980 is exposed to the rear side. The setting mode switch 976 becomes operable.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 147(C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 in a sealable manner with a structure that cannot be opened without being destroyed once closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the base display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode. A hole 976A is provided for manipulating the . The main control board box 1320 accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 . On the main control board 1310, a base display 1317, a base display switch 1318 and a RAM clear switch 954 are mounted in addition to the main control MPU and driver circuit (not shown). In addition, the RAM clear switch 954 may be mounted on another control board (for example, the payout control board 951 or the power supply board) without being mounted on the main control board 1310 . In this case, main control board box 1320 is not provided with hole 954A.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be made by connecting the boards directly with a connector or by using an electric wire. On the setting board 970 are mounted a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying set or selected setting values. A setting change switch 972 for changing the setting value and a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970 .

[11-10. Details of setting change processing]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart illustrating an example of initialization processing. The initialization process shown in FIG. 150 differs from the initialization process described above with reference to FIG. 101 in that RAM clear processing is performed (steps S17 and S30) when the setting key 971 is operated. 21 and 101, the same steps as those of the initialization process described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. The main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 incorporated in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, thereby enabling writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and checks whether a predetermined wait time (time required for activation of the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.)) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has passed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated (step S18).

It should be noted that the RAM clear switch 954 may be detected immediately after power-on (for example, before step S12), the detection result may be stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value may be determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after power-on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after power-on.

If the RAM clear switch 954 has been operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has been operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 has not been operated, it is a normal RAM clearing operation, so the process advances to step S30 to initialize a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 . On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is operated, that is, if the power is turned on while both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the setting mode is entered. That is, since it is necessary to operate the two switches and the power switch to start the setting mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of starting the setting mode.

In the setting mode, first, the set values are displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974 . Then, a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality. Therefore, the hall computer should be notified when the setting mode is entered during business hours.

The security signal may be output for a predetermined period from the start of the setting mode, from the start to the end of the setting mode, or from the start of the setting mode to the predetermined period after the end of the setting mode. good. By outputting the security signal for a predetermined period after the end of the setting mode, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and security can be further enhanced.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting change operation has been performed depending on whether or not the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S62), changes the setting value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes it to the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is configured by a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pushed once, the set value is changed by one step. When the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned right once, the setting value is changed by one step. Then, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for displaying the changed setting value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

After that, it is determined whether the setting mode is terminated and the set value is determined (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting mode is terminated and the process proceeds to step S30. Alternatively, the setting mode may be ended by an operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position. Also, the setting mode may be ended with the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1 as a trigger.

In the above-described process, after the setting mode ends, or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but the process may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting mode is finished, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20), whether the checksum matches (step S22), the power failure flag is not set, and the checksum do not match, a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. If it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30.

After the setting mode ends, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) and the game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving status, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls) are left, other data are erased, and the process proceeds to step S24. It should be noted that the game state data may be erased without being left. In this case, the memory area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation and the memory area erased by the RAM clear operation are the same.

On the other hand, if an operation to end the setting mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62 to detect a setting change operation.

In step S17, if the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data and the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) ) are left, and other data are erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

Also, in step S18, if the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312, and determines whether a power failure flag is set (step S20). .

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. (step S30) and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and checks the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power shutdown. The sum is compared (verified) with the checksum stored in step S48 (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. The stored data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct. proceed to

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 uses the check code to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the main control MPU 1311 erases the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag There are a power failure flag failure (step S20) that is not set, a RAM failure (step S22) in which the RAM checksum does not match, and a base calculation workpiece failure (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area), the set value and the game (For example, variable probability state, time saving state, reserved storage of special symbols and normal symbols, information on prize balls) data are left, other data are cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is not cleared. When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, and in the case of power failure flag abnormality and RAM abnormality, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation) is not cleared. Moreover, in the case of base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

It should be noted that, unlike the illustrated one, in the case of power failure flag abnormality, RAM abnormality, base calculation work abnormality, since the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 You may clear the entire RAM area including If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state will be lost and normal processing cannot be executed. should be initialized only. Also, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared in the same manner as described above, and the base calculation area 13128 is cleared. No need to clear.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are stored for each type of data (game control area 13126 (setting value, game state data), base calculation Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because, if the set values are erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the set values need to be reset for each RAM clear operation, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set values are not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

Either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be employed for the processing after step S28 as required. The difference between FIG. 22 and FIG. 102 is the presence or absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) for calculating and storing a check code from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, and is executed in the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 151 and 152). may be executed. By executing the setting confirmation process in the initialization process, the setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the setting value by careless operation during operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented.

In this case, an operation unit (for example, a push button switch) for setting confirmation is provided separately from the setting key 971 (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of the operation unit for setting confirmation), and when the power is turned on, When the operation unit for confirming the setting is operated, the current setting value is read from the main control RAM 1312 to generate data for displaying on the setting display 974, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 974. do it. Also in this case, it is preferable to output the security signal along with the display of the setting value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear processing even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting mode is completed (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clearing process and executes the RAM clearing process after a predetermined condition is satisfied (end of the setting mode). During the setting mode, it can be said that the main control MPU 1311 controls to store the execution of RAM clear processing. On the other hand, if the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above. Next, the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be described.

After the setting mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control section may be cleared along with this. Moreover, it is not necessary to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952 . Further, it may be switched whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit by an operation. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954 with the setting key 971 turned on, the main control RAM 1312 and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 are cleared, and with the setting key 971 turned on, When the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. Thus, by changing the operation method, it is possible to clear a partial area of the main control RAM 1312 and execute a process in which the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared.

Also, when clearing the RAM of the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952, depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated, there is a difference between the timing of clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the timing of clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952. can occur. That is, when the power is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting mode is completed (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, it immediately clears the RAM. Therefore, depending on the conditions (operations), the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 may not be cleared.

In addition, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310, but also in the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931, when changing the setting value, while operating the RAM clear switch 954 It is preferable that the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared when the power is turned on. That is, the payout control unit 952 does not clear the RAM by the RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, but the payout control unit 952 detects the level of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. It is determined whether or not the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared. If the payout control board 951 is provided with a RAM clear switch, there is an effect that various models can be supported without changing the control program on the frame side.

[11-11. Details of setting confirmation process]
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 151 is different from the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. Object ratio calculation/display processing is deleted. In addition, a setting confirmation process (S802) for displaying a set value indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operating ratio of the condition device) is added. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt process described above in FIGS. 23 and 104 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 to the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the registers (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74), timer update processing (step S76), random number update processing 1 (step S78), and prize ball control processing (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 ( 103) to calculate the base value (step S801, see FIGS. 105 and 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80). .

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step S82), fraud detection processing (step S84), special symbols and special electric auditors control processing (step S86), normal symbols and normal electric auditors control processing ( Step S88) is executed.

After that, a setting confirmation process (S802) for displaying the setting value indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation process, the current setting value is displayed on the setting display 974 by the hall employee performing a predetermined operation. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, output data setting processing (step S90) and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (restores) the register bank. When the above processing is finished, the timer interrupt processing is finished and the processing before the interrupt is resumed.

FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing an example of the pachinko machine setting confirmation process of the present embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 151) and executed.

In the setting confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a setting confirmation operation is in progress (S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers a transition to the setting mode (step S17 in FIG. 150), and if it is operated during operation, it becomes a setting confirmation operation, and the current setting can be displayed.

If no operation of the setting key 971 is detected, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, so data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (S8065).

On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display condition is satisfied (S8062).

As a setting display condition, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 by the output of the frame release switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is open. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected while the outer frame 2 is closed, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 1 has some kind of abnormality (malfunction or fraud). should not be displayed. Further, since the setting display 974 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and there is no need to display the setting.

The setting value may be displayed at any time during operation of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁Also, a set display condition may be provided to enable display at a specific time. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the elapsed time from power-on (or CPU initial setting in step S28), and to display the set value until the timer expires.

Also, a setting display condition may be provided to enable the setting value to be displayed in a specific game state. For example, the set display conditions cannot be displayed during variable display of special symbols or during a jackpot game. That is, a setting display condition is provided to enable the setting value to be displayed during a period other than during the special symbol fluctuation and during the jackpot. It should be noted that the display of the setting value may be disabled in game states other than those described above. In this case, when the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game, the set value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the set display condition is satisfied, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal that is output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to check the settings during a game, and it is a sign of fraud. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours.

The security signal may be output for a specified period of time from the start of setting value display, from the start of setting value display to the end of setting value display, or from the start of setting value display to a predetermined period after the end of setting value display. good. By outputting the security signal for a predetermined period after the setting value is displayed, the period during which an abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and security can be further enhanced.

In the illustrated setting confirmation process, the security signal is transmitted when the setting display condition is satisfied. good.

After that, the setting value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current setting value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974 .

If the set display conditions are not met, the conditions are checked until the set display conditions are met. The confirmation process may end. For example, after it is determined that the set value is not displayed because of the special symbol variation display, when the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the set display condition is set with the termination of the special symbol variation display as an opportunity. and displays the set value. Also, if the setting condition is not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be terminated immediately without repeating confirmation of the setting condition.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, a new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and a new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the set values can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, so that the set values can be confirmed without interfering with other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the setting value is preferentially displayed during setting confirmation, so the base value is not displayed even though the base value is being calculated. In a game state in which a large number of prize balls are paid out in a short period of time, it may be desired to confirm a change in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without interfering with the real-time display of the base value.

[11-12. Security signal output accompanying setting change and setting confirmation]
FIG. 153 is a timing chart of security signals output with setting change and setting confirmation.

As described above, a security signal is output during setting mode and setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 150, S8063 in FIG. 152).

In the setting mode, as shown in FIG. 153(A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined period of time from the start of the setting mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than the time at which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Also, the security signal may be output for a period from the start to the end of the setting mode instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting mode.

Also, in the setting mode, as shown in FIG. 153B, the security signal may be output for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clearing process executed in conjunction with the setting mode.

At the time of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 153(C), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time after the start of setting confirmation. The predetermined time (T seconds) during which the security signal is output may be longer than the time at which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be one second or less or several tens of seconds long.

Also, the security signal may be output for a period from the start to the end of the setting confirmation (the period during which the setting value is displayed) instead of the predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation.

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, as shown in FIG. 153(D), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) after the error is detected. When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error while checking the settings, as shown in FIG. 153(E), a security signal is output for a predetermined time after the error is detected. That is, the security signal resulting from setting confirmation and the security signal resulting from error detection are continuously output over a predetermined time (T seconds) (predetermined time after error detection). Even if an error is detected during setting confirmation, the output time of the security signal may not be extended. That is, even if an error is detected during security signal output, the security signal resulting from the error detection is not output and is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Since the pachinko machine 1 does not detect an error during the setting mode, the security signal resulting from setting confirmation and the security signal resulting from error detection do not overlap. That is, the output time of the security signal is not extended even if an error occurs during the setting mode, but the output time of the security signal is extended if an error occurs during setting confirmation.

[12. Pachinko machine with light guide plate]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine having a light guide plate will be described. A recent pachinko machine has a light guide plate that emits light by illumination on the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and together with the main liquid crystal display device 1600, produces a special symbol variation display game. In this type of pachinko machine, a complex presentation is possible by using a liquid crystal display device and a light guide plate, for example, by superimposing images. In addition, since the light guide plate is provided in front of the liquid crystal display device, a three-dimensional effect is displayed together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In addition, there is a light guide plate that enables stereoscopic vision using the parallax of the left and right eyes, and displays an effect with a greater three-dimensional effect.

However, the performance using the light guide plate has become boring, and it is necessary to improve the interest by a new light emission performance. Furthermore, there is a light guide plate that can display a plurality of patterns on a single plate, and there is a demand for more interesting effects by displaying a wider variety of patterns.

[12-1. structure]
FIG. 154 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory 2500 and the display effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 of the game board, viewed from the front. FIG. 155 is a front view showing a state in which the display effect unit illuminates the first pattern. FIG. 156 is a front view showing a state in which the display effect unit illuminates the second pattern.

The display effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center role 2500 so as to close the frame of the frame-like center role 2500 . The presentation effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁The display effect unit 2600 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center role 2500, and a first pattern substrate 2611 and a second pattern substrate that are attached to the rear side of the center role 2500. 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 capable of emitting light to the right side surface of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 . A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of irradiating are mounted.

The first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are arranged perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 so that the side surfaces of the light guide plate 2610 can be irradiated with light. Therefore, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the sides of the first pattern board 2611 and the second pattern board 2612 can be seen, and the first pattern board 2611 and the second pattern board 2612 can be seen from the player side. This makes the game area 5a look better.

Although the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 will be described in this embodiment, another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the liquid crystal display device 1600 .

The light guide plate 2610 includes a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 155) formed by a number of uneven first reflecting portions that reflect light from above to the front side, and a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 155) that reflects light from the lateral and a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 156) formed by a large number of uneven second reflecting portions that reflect the light. In other words, the display effect unit 2600 can emit light 2613 for the light guide plate of the first pattern substrate 2611, and can emit light to display the first pattern 2621 on the light guide plate 2610. When light is emitted, the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 by light emission. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are desirably full-color LEDs, and are light-emitting sources (lens-equipped LEDs) that irradiate light in a narrow range and have strong directivity. is desirable. By using full-color LEDs, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be projected onto the light guide plate 2610 with any single color or multiple colors (for example, seven rainbow colors).

On the light guide plate 2610, unevennesses forming a plurality of first reflecting portions for reflecting the first pattern 2621 and unevennesses forming a plurality of second reflecting portions for reflecting the second pattern 2622 are minutely formed. When the light guide plate LEDs 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LEDs 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 do not emit light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light, Various decorations of the unit 3000 and effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well. In the light guide plate 2610, even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light emitting state, the liquid crystal display device 1600 provided on the back side can be seen through a transmission region, and the light with which the light guide plate 2610 is irradiated is not reflected. A glass-like processed matte region, a lame region formed with a reflective pattern that reflects light that passes through the light guide plate 2610 regardless of the direction in which the light travels, and a light emitting portion of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( In other words, there is provided a moving area in which a reflective pattern is formed so as to change whether light is emitted depending on the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610 .

As shown in FIG. 155, the first pattern 2621 forms part of the effects of the special symbol variation display game together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 as will be described later. The first pattern 2621 is composed of moving areas 2621a and 2621c, lame areas 2621b and 2621d, and a matte area 2621e. The outside of the first pattern 2621 is a transmissive area 2621f. In the moving areas 2621a and 2621c, part of the light guide plate LEDs 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 is lit, and the moving area 2621a and the moving area 2621c emit light by switching the lit portions. Therefore, by blinking the LED 2613 for the light guide plate, it is possible to make it appear that the size of the first pattern 2621 changes.

In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 155, the moving area and the lame area are arranged so as to be repeated twice, but they may be repeated any number of times. Complicated movements can be represented by the first pattern 2621 by forming the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving region and the lame region a plurality of times. In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 155, moving regions and lame regions are alternately repeated. The moving regions having different light incident positions) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

By causing the light guide plate LEDs 2613 to emit light so that the color of light emitted by the light guide plate LEDs 2613 changes, each moving region 2621a can be illuminated in a different color. Then, by sequentially changing the emission color of the light guide plate LED 2613 (for example, repeating red→orange→yellow→green→blue→indigo→purple→red), the pattern appears to move as the color changes. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 156, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of streaks of light extend obliquely downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed such that the diagonally extending light streaks correspond to the positions of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612 . In other words, when one light guide plate LED 2614 emits light, a light streak extending obliquely downward from the light guide plate 2610 from the portion of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light on the upper side of the light guide plate 2610 emits light.

The second pattern 2622 becomes farther from the light guide plate LEDs 2614 as it goes down the light guide plate 2610 , so the brightness of the light streaks becomes darker as it goes down the light guide plate 2610 . Thus, when the second picture 2622 is viewed from the front (player's side), the lines of light appear to extend backward toward the lower direction of the light guide plate 2610, and the light is emitted three-dimensionally. It is possible to give the illusion that the light guide plate 2610 emits light.

Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the reflectors so that stereoscopic viewing is possible due to parallax between the left and right eyes. For example, focusing on one light streak that constitutes the second pattern 2622, the second reflecting portion that emits the light that forms an image of the light streak on the retina of the player is positioned on the light guide plate 2610 for the left and right eyes. By arranging it at the position, a parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern with depth can be shown.

As shown in FIG. 155, the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment has a first picture pattern 2621 projected by irradiation of light from one direction, a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, or a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light. Instead, it consists of lame regions 2621b and 2621d formed with reflection patterns that reflect transmitted light, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a formed with reflection patterns that reflect light traveling in a specific traveling direction. , the first pattern can be composed of a moving pattern area (dynamic pattern) that appears to move and a still pattern area (static pattern) that appears stationary.

155 and the second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 156 can be projected by using one light guide plate 2610 depending on the difference in the illumination direction. For this reason, a single color light (for example, red light with a single wavelength or white light with multiple wavelengths) is emitted from the side, and multiple colors of light are emitted from above (for example, a group of adjacent LEDs). 2614 emit light at different wavelengths), one light guide plate 2610 can produce a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single color pattern.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the matte area 2621e and the lame areas 2621b and 2621d of the first pattern 2621 are still patterns and the moving patterns appear to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c and 2622a by irradiation of light from the lateral direction. is showing That is, the first pattern 2621, which is irradiated with light from the horizontal direction, produces a light guide plate presentation with both a still pattern and a moving pattern. In this case, the still picture and the moving picture of the first picture 2621 are projected simultaneously.

Unlike the above, the first pattern 2621 may be composed of a matte area and a lame area, and the first pattern 2621 may not include a moving pattern. In this case, the light guide plate presentation is performed with a static pattern of the first pattern 2621 by irradiation of light from the lateral direction and a second pattern 2622 by irradiation of light from above. In this case, the still picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture by the second picture 2622 can be projected at different timings. That is, the moving picture may be projected after the still picture is projected, or the still picture may be projected after the moving picture is projected. In this way, by projecting the still picture and the moving picture at different timings, it is possible to perform various effects. In particular, by displaying a specific character as a still picture after displaying a rainbow picture as a moving picture, it is possible to perform an effect in which the character descends. On the other hand, by displaying a character with a moving picture after displaying a background with a still picture, it is possible to produce an effect in which the character moves to a specific place.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged so as to overlap each other. When the light is irradiated from the horizontal direction and the upward direction, in the area where the two patterns are superimposed on the light guide plate 2610, since the reflection patterns of the two patterns are provided in a mixed manner, the two patterns can be recognized together. . However, when the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that can be viewed two-dimensionally and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic vision may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. When the reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided, and a transmission region 2621f is provided so that the back side (liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen through, and the pattern of the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is played. This allows a person to easily view stereoscopically.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in separate areas without overlapping. When the first pattern 2621 is a pattern that can be viewed two-dimensionally and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic vision may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. By dividing the area in which the reflection pattern of the pattern 2621 is provided and the area in which the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is provided, and by projecting the pattern of the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622, the second pattern can be easily presented to the player in three dimensions. can be seen.

[12-2. Configuration of Light Guide Plate]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflector will be described. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (especially the arrangement of the reflectors).

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 has a transmissive area 2621f through which the rear side (liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen through, and a matte area 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light. Lame regions 2621b and 2621d formed with reflection patterns for reflecting transmitted light and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a formed with reflection patterns for reflecting light traveling in a specific traveling direction are provided.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the structure of the reflector.

The reflecting portion is formed by a concave portion provided on the back side of the light guide plate 2610, and the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 by reflection of light on the boundary surface (reflecting surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light so that the player can visually recognize the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, light incident from the light guide plate LEDs 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain amount of spread (eg ±30 degrees). The streaks of light forming the second pattern 2622 are visible when the light traveling in the direction of the streaks of light is reflected by the reflecting section 2650 described below.

In the reflecting portion of the moving area 2622a shown in FIG. 158(A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along the streak of light. The size of the reflecting part 2650 is desirably several hundred micrometers to several millimeters, which is much smaller than the streaks of light appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown enlarged in the figure.

The reflecting portion 2650 is composed of a reflecting surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflective surface 2651 is arranged at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and such that the vertical line of the reflective surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are approximately 45 degrees. Therefore, the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 and hitting the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650 is reflected toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 158(B).

In addition, the direction perpendicular to the streak of light appearing in the moving region 2622 a , that is, the light traveling parallel to the reflecting surface 2651 along the reflecting surface 2651 does not hit the reflecting surface 2651 and is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650 to reach the light guide plate 2610 . do not exit from the surface of Similarly, a small amount of light traveling in a direction having an angle (especially an acute angle) with the light streak appearing in the moving region 2622a hits the reflecting surface 2651, and only a small amount of light is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650, leading Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610 . For this reason, the light of the wavelengths that reach more can be seen by the player's eyes, and the pattern can be seen in the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light at a specific position.

At this time, by tilting the reflecting surface 2651 a little, the emission direction of the reflected light may be slightly shifted left and right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 . Since the light source that irradiates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment emits light with strong directivity, the reflected light from the reflecting section 2650 also reaches the player as a light beam with directivity. Therefore, a parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern with depth can be displayed. That is, since the reflecting portion 2650 that reflects the light reaching the right eye and the reflecting portion 2650 that reflects the light reaching the left eye are located at different positions, the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye are different. A virtual intersection is not on the light guide plate 2610 . In other words, if the virtual intersection point of the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the pattern appears to be at a deep position, and the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye are visible. If the virtual intersection point with the incoming light is in front of the light guide plate 2610, the pattern appears in front.

The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflective surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 like the reflective surface 2651, and may be arranged so that the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is inclined. may be formed at an angle that does not reflect toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being displayed by light coming from a direction other than a specific direction without strongly reflecting light incident from one direction.

Reflecting portions 2660 of lame regions 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. 159 are configured by spherical concave portions provided on the back side of light guide plate 2610, and travel through light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of directions (that is, The light arriving at the reflecting portion 2660 is reflected (through a plurality of paths) and emitted to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 . Since the reflecting portion 2660 in the lame region reflects the light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614, the lame region 2621b glitters when the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blink at different timings. Also, when the light guide plate LEDs 2614 emit lights of different colors, the lame region 2621b emits a mixture of a plurality of colors. Furthermore, when the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blink in different colors, the lame region 2621b is mixed with a plurality of colors and sparkles.

The matte region 2621e is not provided with a reflecting portion, but is processed to have an irregular shape like frosted glass, so that the light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 is not reflected to the front side.

So far, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first pattern and the second pattern has been described. Next, an example of a light guide plate representing a different pattern will be described. 160 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LEDs and the reflective portions in the light guide plate forming the patterns shown in FIGS. 161 to 163. FIG.

The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 160 is formed on the rear surface thereof, and reflects light incident from any one of the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2630 on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610, and emits the light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. It has a plurality of fine reflecting portions 2670 that The plurality of specific light entrance portions 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 introduce light so that the light travels through the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. As for the plurality of specific light entrance portions 2630, the first specific light entrance portion 2630a, the second specific light entrance portion 2630b, the third specific light entrance portion 2630c, and the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d are illustrated. A specific light entrance section 2630a to a seventh specific light entrance section are provided. This is to repeatedly provide seven specific light receiving portions 2630 (LED group 2614) for a rainbow effect in which the light guide plate emits light in seven colors. The first specific light-entering portion 2630a to the seventh specific light-entering portion (not shown) repeat in order from left to right on the upper surface of the light guide plate 2610 in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) (seventh specific light-entering portion are arranged in the order of the first specific light entrance portion 2630a).

The reflecting portion 2670 extends in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630 (the direction in which the light incident from the specific light entrance portion 2630 travels in the light guide plate 2610) and guides the light. It has an interface inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610 . Reflector 2670 is recessed into a pent-roof-like triangle. Reflecting portion 2670 reflects light incident from corresponding specific light entering portion 2630 and emits the light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of light guide plate 2610 . Also, the reflecting portion 2670 reflects the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light entering portion 2630 and emits the light in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 .

As a result, as indicated by broken lines in FIG. 160, the light incident from the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630 is reflected by the reflecting portion 2670 toward the front side of the light guide plate 2610 (perpendicular to the plane of the paper). A player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees the reflecting part 2670 as emitting light. On the other hand, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 160, the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630 is reflected by the reflection portion 2670 in a direction other than the front of the light guide plate 2610, and the pachinko machine 1 The reflecting part 2670 does not appear to emit light from the player sitting in front of it.

In this embodiment, the reflecting portion 2670 is recessed in a triangular shape and extends in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entering portion 2630. However, this is not the case. , and it may extend in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630 .

The plurality of reflecting portions 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light entering portions 2630, and the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a and second specific light entering portion 2630b corresponding to the first specific light entering portion 2630a. a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b corresponding to the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c corresponding to the third specific light entering portion 2630c; and a plurality of fourth reflecting portions corresponding to the fourth specific light entering portion 2630d including portion 2670d and the like.

Further, the light guide plate 2610 is capable of displaying a plurality of patterns 2623 that can be illuminated in different manners by reflecting light forward from a specific reflecting portion 2670 of the plurality of reflecting portions 2670 . The plurality of patterns 2623 includes a pattern 2623a consisting of a plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a, a pattern 2623b consisting of a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, a pattern 2623c consisting of a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670c. A pattern 2623d made up of a portion 2670d is included.

As shown in FIGS. 161 to 163, the patterns are arranged in order from the center to the outside in a circulating manner.

The second picture board 2612 has a strip-like shape extending left and right, and LEDs 2614 are mounted at positions corresponding to the respective specific light receiving portions 2630 . The plurality of LEDs 2614 includes a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light entrance portion 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light entrance portion 2630b, and a third specific light entrance portion 2630c. A third LED group 2614c corresponding to, a fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d, and a fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light entrance portion (not shown) (illustration omitted), a sixth LED group (not illustrated) corresponding to the sixth specific light receiving portion (not illustrated), and a seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light receiving portion (not illustrated) (not shown). Note that FIG. 160 illustrates the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d, and omits the illustration of the fifth to seventh LED groups. Each LED group is formed by dividing a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the drawing) on the second pattern substrate 2612 in the horizontal direction of the second pattern substrate 2612, and sequentially from left to right. , (the seventh LED group is followed by the first LED group 2614a). In this embodiment, each LED group has six LEDs 2614 each.

Next, the lighting effect by the display effect unit 2600 of this embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the first specific light entrance portion 2630a, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the first reflection portion 2670a, Since the second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect light to a direction other than the front, only the first reflecting portion 2670a appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the pattern composed of the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a can be caused to emit light.

When the second LED group 2614b of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light entrance portion 2630b, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the second reflection portion 2670b, Since the first reflecting portion 2670a, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, etc. reflect light to other than the front, only the second reflecting portion 2670b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the pattern composed of the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b can be caused to emit light.

When the third LED group 2614c of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light entrance portion 2630c, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the third reflecting portion 2670c, Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, second reflecting portion 2670b, fourth reflecting portion 2670d, etc. reflect light to a direction other than the front, only the third reflecting portion 2670c appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the pattern composed of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c can be caused to emit light.

When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second pattern substrate 2612 is caused to emit light, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d, and is reflected to the front of the light guide plate 2610 by the fourth reflection portion 2670d, Since the first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, etc., reflect to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting portion 2670d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the pattern composed of the plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670d can be caused to emit light.

Similarly, when each LED group is caused to emit light from the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group 2614, light enters the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light entrance portion 2630, and the light guide plate 2610 passes through the corresponding reflection portion 2670. The light is reflected to the front, and the other reflecting parts 2670 reflect to other than the front, and only the corresponding reflecting parts 2670 appear to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. You can make the pattern you are holding emit light.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by switching the group of LEDs to emit light, the plurality of patterns 2623 can be caused to emit light. Such light emission production can be performed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 161, in a light guide plate 2610 on which similar patterns are superimposed, a moving effect is produced in which the patterns emit light like an animation that spreads from the center to the outside or shrinks from the outside to the center. can be done.

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in a moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 161, by switching the position of the group of emitting LEDs with the lapse of time, a moving effect is performed in which the size of the pattern changes.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light entrance portion 2630a to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. In addition, in FIG. 161, the position corresponding to each specific light entrance part is represented by the alphabet of the last letter of a code|symbol.

As shown in FIG. 161(A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light enters from the sixth specific light entrance portion 2630f and the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g, the light guide plate 2610 The incident light is reflected by the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

After that, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and the light enters from the fifth specific light entering portion 2630e and the sixth specific light entering portion 2630f, the light entering the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f are reflected, and the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161(B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light enters from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d and the fifth specific light entrance portion 2630e, the light guide plate The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

After that, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and the light is incident from the third specific light entrance portion 2630c and the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the third reflection portion 2670c and the fourth reflecting part 2670d are reflected, and the pattern in which the third reflecting part 2670cd and the fourth reflecting part 2670d are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 161(C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light enters from the second specific light entrance portion 2630b and the third specific light entrance portion 2630c, the light guide plate The light incident on 2610 is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the pattern in which the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

In this way, by changing the position of the group of LEDs (LED elements) to emit light without changing the number thereof, the size of the pattern can be changed, and a moving effect can be achieved in which the pattern emits light so as to move from the center to the outside. At this time, the LED groups may emit a single color, or each group may emit a different color (ie, depending on the position).

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 162, by changing the number of light-emitting LED groups with the lapse of time, a moving effect is performed in which the size of the pattern changes.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light entrance portion 2630a to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. In addition, in FIG. 162, the position corresponding to each specific light entrance part is represented by the alphabet of the last letter of a code|symbol.

As shown in FIG. 162(A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the incident light from the second specific light entrance section 2630b to the seventh specific light entrance section 2630g is reflected by the second reflection section 2670b. The second to seventh reflecting portions 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the second to seventh reflecting portions 2670b to 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

After that, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light entrance section 2630c to the seventh specific light entrance section 2630g is reflected by the third reflection section 2670c to the seventh reflection section 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670c to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 162(B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the incident light from the fourth specific light entrance section 2630d to the seventh specific light entrance section 2630g is reflected in the fourth manner. The part 2670d to the seventh reflecting part 2670g reflect, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting part 2670d to the seventh reflecting part 2670g are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

After that, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light entrance portion 2630e to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflection portion 2670e to the seventh reflection portion 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 162(C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the incident light from the sixth specific light entrance portion 2630f to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g is reflected in the sixth direction. The part 2670f to the seventh reflecting part 2670g reflect, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting part 2670f to the seventh reflecting part 2670g are arranged emits light, which the player can recognize.

In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) that emit light, it is possible to change the size of the pattern (light emission range) and perform a moving effect in which the pattern emits light in a shrinking manner. At this time, the LED groups may emit a single color, or each group may emit a different color (ie, depending on the position).

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 163, by changing the emission color of the LED group with the lapse of time, a moving effect is performed in which the color of the pattern changes.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light entrance portion 2630a to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g. A seventh LED group 2614g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In addition, in FIG. 163, the position corresponding to each specific light entrance part is represented by the alphabet of the last letter of a code|symbol.

As shown in FIG. 163(A), the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the red light incident from the first specific light entering portion 2630a is reflected by the first reflecting portion 2670a, and the first reflecting portion 2670a is arranged. The drawn pattern emits red light, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light entrance portion 2630b is reflected by the second reflection portion 2670b to emit light with an orange pattern. In addition, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light receiving portion 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c to emit a yellow pattern. In addition, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light entering portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d to emit green light. In addition, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light entering portion 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to emit blue light. In addition, the sixth LED group 2614f is lit in indigo blue, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light receiving portion 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflecting portion 2670f to emit light in the pattern in indigo. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the seventh specific light receiving portion 2630g to emit a purple pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 163(B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the color of the pattern changes. After a further period of time, as shown in FIG. 163(C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively. color changes.

In this way, the colors of the LEDs forming the group of LEDs are changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye pays close attention to patterns that emit light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the patterns emit light as if they move inward.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the layout of patterns on the light guide plate 2610 and the layout of the LED group 2614. FIG.

In this embodiment, a plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to a reflecting portion 2670 forming one pattern, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one pattern. Specifically, control is performed such that the light emission pattern of the LED group 2614 (the specific light incident portion 2630) is repeated with a group of seven LEDs as a repeating unit. Moreover, the LED is configured to emit light with directivity and illuminate a predetermined angle range from the front of the LED.

That is, as shown in FIG. 164, the illumination range of the LEDs emitting light in the same pattern (which is the light emitting source of the light forming one picture) is the range shown by the fan shape in the drawing. In the vicinity, there is a range where the light from the LED does not reach.

For this reason, a pattern is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 where light is incident. For example, if the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (full angle at half maximum θ = ±30 degrees), the range where the light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (with the same pattern The pattern is separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length of 0.87 times α).

To generalize, the following relationship is established where α is the length of the repeating unit of the LED group, θ is the illumination angle of the LED, and L is the distance separating the pattern from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 .
L=tan θ×α/2

In this way, when a moving picture that appears to move is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving picture must be placed at a position a predetermined distance away from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 . In other words, the moving pattern area that displays a pattern that appears to move is smaller than the static pattern area that displays a static pattern. If the light guide plate 2610 has the same size as the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 , moving effects can be produced by the light guide plate 2610 in an area narrower than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 . Therefore, in the performance of the variable display game, it is possible to allow the player to recognize the progress of the variable display game without hindering the visual recognition of the special symbols normally displayed near the end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 . . In addition, by performing the moving effect in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 1600 where the player gazes, the excitement of the player due to the moving effect can suppress the decrease in interest.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the center accessory 2500 light guide plate 2610 of the front unit 2000 is attached has been described. An area within a predetermined distance from the edge of the light guide plate 2610 is formed in the visible opening window), and the player can visually recognize the area where the moving effect is not possible. In addition, the area in which the moving effect is possible is narrowed, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000 . In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center accessory 2500, the area where the moving effect is not possible is hidden by the center accessory 2500, and the area where the moving effect is not possible is the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. , and moving effects can be performed in the entire (or most) area of the inner frame of the center accessory 2500 . That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is located outside the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the periphery of the center accessory 2500 .

Since the back unit 3000 includes various decorations (decoration unit 3050, movable effect units 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end of the light guide plate 2610 is positioned behind these decorations. A light guide plate 2610 can be arranged, and a light emitting device (first pattern substrate 2611, second pattern substrate 2612) can be positioned behind the decoration. As a result, the board serving as the light source can be arranged at a position where the player cannot see it, and the decorativeness can be ensured.

Furthermore, the LEDs for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613 and 2614 for the light guide plate) and the LEDs for causing the decoration to emit light may be mounted on one substrate.

In this way, when the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be used as an area where moving effects can be performed, and the player is made aware of the unnaturalness due to the limitation of the moving effect area. You can avoid it.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed in another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 165, by changing the emission color of the LED group with the lapse of time, a moving effect is performed in which the color of the pattern changes.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light entrance portion 2630a to the seventh specific light entrance portion 2630g. Group 2614g is located. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In addition, in FIG. 165, the position corresponding to each specific light entrance part is represented by the alphabet of the last letter of a code|symbol.

As illustrated, the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the first reflecting portion 2670a reflects the red light incident from the first specific light receiving portion 2630a, and the pattern on which the first reflecting portion 2670a is arranged is red. , and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light entrance portion 2630b is reflected by the second reflection portion 2670b to emit light with an orange pattern. Also, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light receiving portion 2630c is reflected by the third reflecting portion 2670c to emit a yellow pattern. In addition, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light entrance portion 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflection portion 2670d to emit green light. In addition, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light entrance portion 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to emit blue light. In addition, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in indigo blue, and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f reflects the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light receiving portion 2630f to emit light in the pattern in indigo. Further, the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the seventh specific light receiving portion 2630g to emit a purple pattern.

After that, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the pattern changes. As time passes further, the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively, and the color of the pattern changes.

In this way, the colors of the LEDs forming the group of LEDs are changed, and the color of the pattern is changed sequentially (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye pays close attention to patterns that emit light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect in which the pattern emits light as if streaks of light in seven colors flow.

Although the detailed description is omitted, even with the light guide plate 2610 having a pattern in which two light lines intersect as shown in FIG. The color of the pattern (light streaks) changes, and it is possible to create a moving effect that makes the pattern emit light so that seven colors of light streaks flow. In addition, by using left-right eye parallax to make the lines of light appear deeper or closer to the viewer as they move away from the light source, it is possible to display a pattern with a three-dimensional effect.

Next, a stereoscopic pattern and a planar pattern by the light guide plate 2610 will be described.

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing how the light guide plate 2610 displays a picture in plan view.

As shown in FIG. 166B, since the reflecting surface of the reflecting portion 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is curved, light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in a plurality of directions. , reach the player's right eye 10R and left eye 10L. Reflecting portion 2660 also reflects light that travels through light guide plate 2610 and arrives at reflecting portion 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, through a plurality of paths), and emits the light to the front side of light guide plate 2610 . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 166(A), the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portion 2660 does not cause parallax between the left and right eyes, so that the player can view the pattern 2621 as a planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610. will be seen as

FIG. 167 is a diagram showing how the light guide plate 2610 displays a picture in plan view.

As shown in FIG. 167(B), the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects the light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 toward the left eye 10L of the player, and the reflecting portion 2650R Light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected toward the player's right eye 10R. However, since the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, within 1 mm), as shown in FIG. The parallax of the eye is small, and it can be said that the pattern for the left eye formed by the reflecting portion 2650L and the pattern for the right eye formed by the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a planar pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610 .

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing how a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by light guide plate 2610 .

As shown in FIG. 168(B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set at an angle to reflect the light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 168(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflecting portions 2650L and 2650R. A right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 168, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at point 2621C on the back side of light guide plate 2610. In FIG. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern behind the light guide plate 2610. FIG.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing how a pattern that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by the light guide plate 2610 .

As shown in FIG. 169B, the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 toward the left eye 10L of the player. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set at an angle to reflect the light traveling through the light guide plate 2610 toward the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 169(A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are shifted by the distance between the reflecting portions 2650L and 2650R. A right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax are recognized. In the state shown in FIG. 169, the light reaching the player's left eye 10L and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at point 2621C on the surface side of light guide plate 2610. In FIG. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610. FIG.

As described above, according to the display effect unit 2600, since a plurality of different patterns can be illuminated by a single light guide plate 2610, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display animation or the like. Therefore, the thickness of the display effect unit 2600 in the front-rear direction can be reduced as much as possible. In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close to the player side as possible, making it easy to secure a wide space behind the light guide plate 2610. can. Therefore, since a wide space can be secured behind the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable production unit 3100, the upper rear movable production unit 3200, the upper front movable production unit 3300, etc. can be arranged behind the light guide plate 2610. By improving the appearance of the game area 5a, the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the players. By performing the movable performance by the upper front movable performance unit 3300 or the like, it is possible to provide the player with various performances, to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, by arranging the light guide plate 2610 in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of semi-transparent patterns due to the light emission of the plurality of reflecting parts 2670 emerge to show the luminous decoration that moves like an animation. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is accustomed to the light emitting effect using the conventional light guide plate, to surprise and amuse the player, and to provide something good to the player. It is possible to make the player think that something might happen, and to heighten the player's sense of expectation for the game, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the luminous display of the pattern by the light guide plate 2610, the luminous display of the pattern 2623 is not visible to other players far from the front. becomes difficult to see, making it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed, so that it is possible to suppress other players from paying attention and To enable a player to play a game without hesitation, to enjoy the game and to suppress the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame of the center role 2500 attached to the center of the front view game area 5a, the patterns 2621 and 2622 are illuminated by the LEDs 2613 and 2614. Also, the light-emitting patterns do not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in a good condition, making it difficult to see the game. To prevent distrust from being given to a player and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

In addition, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, by matching the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500, the periphery of the light guide plate 2610 (first picture substrate 2611, the second pattern board 2612) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it is difficult for the player to notice the presence of the light guide plate 2610, so that the light guide plate 2610 does not exist when the pattern is displayed by light emission. A strong impact can be given to the player who thought that there is no such thing, and the player can be surprised.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the luminous display of a plurality of patterns different from each other by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 are combined. Since the performance can be shown to the player, various performances can be produced by appropriately combining them, and the player can be hardly bored, and the player can be entertained by the performance by the light guide plate 2610 and the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 are different. Therefore, it is possible to display effect images related to the plurality of patterns 2623 that are light-emitting displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and to give the light-emitting patterns 2623 a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect. A performance (display performance) capable of strongly attracting the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Also, the LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be monochromatic LEDs or full-color LEDs. In addition, the number of specific light entering portions, reflecting portions, and the number of LED groups can be appropriately selected according to the number, shape, and size of patterns.

[12-3. Production example]
Next, an example of effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variation display game will be described. 170 to 175 are diagrams showing examples of effects using the light guide plate.

In the effect display shown in FIG. 170, the light guide plate 2610 is caused to emit light so that a predetermined pattern is reflected on the light guide plate 2610, and a movement effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 to move the image toward the predetermined image. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variation display game (for example, as a specific ready-to-win effect or advance notice effect).

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 170A, nothing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and the entire screen turns black (blacks out). This blackout causes the player to gaze at the liquid crystal display device 1600 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 170(B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is reflected on the light guide plate 2610 . This causes the player to gaze at the first pattern 2621 . Then, as shown in FIG. 170(C), a moving effect is performed in which an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 . Also, as shown in FIG. 170(D), the moving effect may move the image 1611 from multiple locations (that is, multiple directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 . An image 1611 that is moved and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 may have the same color as the first pattern 2621 or a different color. Further, the image 1611 moved and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first pattern 2621 as shown in FIG. 170, or may have a different shape as shown in FIG. The image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 that are moved and displayed are images of the same character (the pose and face may be the same or different), or the same characters (for example, the name of the character) with the same font and color. They can be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the light guide plate 2610 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. An image may also be displayed on the back side by the liquid crystal display device 1600 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 170(E), in the moving effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the proportion of the moving images 1611 occupying the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 are measured over time. may be changed according to

The aspect of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 172, the color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. The color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or stepwise (stepwise).

Also, as shown in FIG. 173, the size of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the moving effect. In this case, it is preferable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and use the other light guide plates to project patterns of different sizes. In addition, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. , oblique directions), different sizes (large or small) of the first pattern 2621 may be projected.

After performing the movement effect for a predetermined time, the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is removed from the light guide plate 2610, as shown in FIG. 170(F). Furthermore, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen is blacked out. This blackout makes the player look at the liquid crystal display device 1600 and creates a space for improving the expectation for the next performance.

After that, as shown in FIG. 170(G), an image 1612 different from the first pattern 2621 and the moving image (for example, a character with high hit reliability) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 . Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 170(H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, if the size of the character image 1612 is increased, the player's expectation of winning increases, but if the size of the character image 1612 is decreased, the player's expectation of winning decreases. Note that the color and expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. Also, the character image 1612 is preferably displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the first pattern 2621 . Furthermore, along with displaying the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be illuminated from above to project a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 156).

Note that this character image may be projected on the light guide plate 2610 . As described above, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions. A character image may be projected by irradiating light from the direction). Also, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided and the character image may be projected on other light guide plates. When character images with different sizes and facial expressions are projected on a light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610, an effect display with a sense of depth is possible, unlike the planar liquid crystal display device 1600. FIG.

As described above, in the moving effect in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is projected, but the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves. , the first picture 2621 may be projected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 174, after the blackout (FIG. 174(A)), before the first pattern 2621 is projected as shown in FIG. 174(B), the first pattern 2621 A moving effect is started in which an image moving toward a projected position is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. - 特許庁After that, as shown in FIG. 174(C), the LEDs 2613 mounted on the first pattern board 2611 are turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is reflected on the light guide plate 2610 . After that, as shown in FIG. 174(D), the moving effect of moving the image toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

In this way, the time during which the first pattern 2621 is projected (duration of the light guide plate effect) and the effect time during which the image 1611 moves (the time during which the moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600) The light guide plate effect in which is projected may be started before or after the effect in which the image 1611 moves. Also, the duration of the light guide plate effect in which the first pattern 2621 is projected may be longer or shorter than the effect time in which the image 1611 moves.

Further, as shown in FIG. 175, a variable display game effect may be performed by switching between a moving pattern in which the patterns at which the images gather appear to move and a static pattern in which the patterns appear to not move.

In the light guide plate presentation shown in FIG. 175, when a moving pattern appears, the expectation for a big win is high, and when a static pattern only appears, the expectation for a big win is low. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175(A), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 175(B), the displayed still picture 2621 to display the image 1611 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 to move effect. Further, as the variable display game progresses, the static pattern 2621 is switched to the moving pattern as shown in FIG. 175(C). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 175(D), a moving effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 175(E), a static pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 in accordance with the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. A moving effect is performed in which an image 1611 that moves by pressing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 . Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. good. After that, as shown in FIG. 175(H), the variable display game ends without switching the stationary pattern 2621 to the moving pattern.

In the effect shown in FIG. 175, when a specific display effect (for example, a specific ready-to-win effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, or a specific look-ahead effect) is selected in the special symbol variation display game, the specific display effect is displayed. The specific image 1611 may perform an effect together with the moving effect by the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the first pattern may not perform the moving effect.

As described above, in the effect of the variable display game shown in FIG. 175, the static pattern and the moving pattern are selectively displayed by the light guide plate 2610, so that the player has a sense of anticipation for the development of the variable display game. , it is possible to suppress the decline in game interest.

Next, an example of an effect in which an effect using an operating object is added to the effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variation display game will be described.

176 and 177 are diagrams showing examples of effects using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. FIG.

In the rendering shown in FIG. 176, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing in front of the liquid crystal display device 1600 constitute one pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176A, part of the movable body 3601 appears or disappears from the upper part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 in a short cycle according to the progress of the variable display game. Repeatedly, the player's expectation for a big win is heightened. Then, as shown in FIG. 176B, the entire movable body 3601 appears in front of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 .

After that, as shown in FIG. 176(C), a pattern 2621 superimposed on the movable body is displayed by light emission of the light guide plate 2610, and a movement effect is performed in which an image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. conduct. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 176(D), a moving effect may be performed in which the image is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) on the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 2621. .

The movable body 3601 may emit light at the timing when this moving effect starts or during the moving effect. The light-emitting mode (light-emitting color and light-emitting timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light-emitting mode of the light guide plate 2610 .

Players' expectations for the development of the variable display game can be increased by selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 does not appear as shown in FIG. 170 or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 appears as shown in FIG. The pachinko machine can be enhanced and highly interesting.

In the above example, the movable body 3601 is made to appear in place of the pattern on which the images are gathered. For example, if the body is represented by the movable body 3601 and the face is represented by the light guide plate 2610, the expression of the face can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. FIG. In this way, in addition to effects by the liquid crystal display device 1600, various effects by the light guide plate 2610 can be realized.

In the effect shown in FIG. 177, a light guide plate 2610 is used as a effect suggesting the appearance of a movable body 3601. In FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177(A), according to the progress of the variable display game, the light guide plate 2610 emits light to display a pattern 2621, and as shown in FIG. A moving effect is performed in which an image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 . Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 177(C), a moving effect is performed in which the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621. may Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 177D, movable body 3601 appears from above the display screen of liquid crystal display device 1600 and stops at a position overlapping pattern 2621 of light guide plate 2610 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 177(E), according to the progress of the variable display game, a pattern 1613 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and as shown in FIG. A moving effect is performed in which a moving image 1611 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 . Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 177(G), a movement effect may be performed in which the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 1613. good. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 177(H), the variable display game ends with a loss without the movable object appearing.

Thus, in the effect shown in FIG. 177, the effect suggesting that the movable body is coming out can be performed using the light guide plate.

[13. slot machine]
The arrangement of the programs and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described so far, and the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (rotary game machine) will now be described. Although the outline of the pachinko machine has been described with reference to FIG. 26, programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM in the same manner as the slot machine 4000 described below.

[13-1. structure]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. 178 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

As shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the slot machine 4000 of this embodiment has various devices inside a box-shaped casing 4100 with an open front, and a front member on the front of the casing 4100. 4200 is provided so as to be openable and closable in a one-sided manner. Above the front member 4200, there are provided an image display 4500 for effecting display and information display according to the progress of the game, a speaker for effecting sound, and the like. The image display unit 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays a variety of information in addition to effects display related to the game. Various effects displays and history information displays on the image display 4500 are controlled by the effects control board 4700 . That is, the image display 4500 serves as an effect display means capable of displaying an effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 serves as a display control means capable of controlling the display of the effect display means. Eggplant.

At the center of the front member 4200, there is a front panel on which a pattern or the like for decoration is drawn so that the rear cannot be seen. ) A pattern display window 4401 is formed. It should be noted that the front panel may be composed of a display device, and the reels 4301 are visible when no image is displayed in the symbol display window 4401, and an image that directs the game is displayed mainly around the symbol display window 4401. do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for effecting a game in the symbol display window 4401 .

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), the symbols that are variably displayed by the rotation of the reels 4301 arranged in the housing can be visually recognized. The reel 4301 is configured by horizontally arranging a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c. Strip-shaped sheets on which a plurality of patterns are drawn along the longitudinal direction are wound around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c, so that a plurality of patterns are arranged according to a predetermined arrangement.

Reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b and 4341c (see FIG. 180), which are stepping motors, are provided for the reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c, respectively. It is possible to That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b and 4341c constitute the drive sources for the respective reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c. Further, the reel driving motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c are controlled by a two-phase excitation method, similarly to the payout motor 839 of the pachinko game machine 1 described above, to increase driving torque and static torque. As a result, a small motor can be used as the drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

In the following description, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are referred to as a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c, respectively, as required. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c are called a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to the respective reels are assumed to be a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

In addition, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, the plurality of types of symbols viewed from the symbol display window 4401 are varied so as to circulate, for example, from top to bottom (variation display). On the other hand, when the reels 4301 are stopped, a predetermined number of continuous symbols (for example, 3), that is, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3, are displayed through the symbol display window 4401 for each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the game stop result can be visually recognized.

A predetermined activatable line is set for the 3×3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 . In this embodiment, a line (middle line) that crosses the middle pattern of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a line that diagonally crosses each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the bottom of the left reel 4301a to the middle of the middle reel 4301b to the top of the right reel 4301c ( A line diagonally crossing the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c from the top of the left reel 4301a to the middle of the middle reel 4301b to the bottom of the right reel 4301c (the line going down to the right) is the line that can be activated. Then, the player inserts medals or inputs from the credits (hereinafter referred to as "betting operation") to activate the activatable line, and based on the pattern combinations (lots) formed on the activated line. Establishment/non-establishment of a prize (role) is determined.

When a prize is established, there are cases where three predetermined patterns are lined up on the activated line, and there are cases where three predetermined patterns are lined up on another line visually. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) that crosses the upper pattern of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. In addition, the line (lower line) that crosses the lower pattern of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, and the front part (visible part) facing the pattern display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above The patterns may be visually arranged on the virtual line to be positioned. Below, the lines that can be activated (middle, upward to the right, downward to the right), lines that can align the visible patterns when winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) line).

The upper, middle, lower, right-up and right-down lines are set as activatable lines, and predetermined activatable lines are activated according to the number of bets. role) is established/not established. For example, if the number of bets is 1, the middle line is the valid line, if the number of bets is 2, in addition to the middle line, the upper and lower lines are valid lines. and Also, regardless of the number of bets (whether the number of bets is 1 or 2), all lines may be valid, or may be dedicated to 3-coin stakes.

Around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401, a payout number display LED 4562 for displaying the number of medals to be paid out by the game is provided. A credit display for displaying the number of medals accumulated in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of remaining games during the grand prize may be provided.

Below the pattern display window 4401, a stepped portion is formed to protrude forward, and the upper surface of this stepped portion serves as an operation portion 4202 that slopes downward toward the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, and a one coin insertion button 4205 and a max bet button 4206 as progress operation units for advancing the game.

The medal slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation section 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000 . A game can be executed by a player inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performing a betting operation. An insertion sensor 4207b for detecting the passage of medals is provided on the route through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the information detected by the insertion sensor 4207b.

A single insert button 4205 and a max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000 . The one-card input button 4205 can be input one by one from the credit by pressing it once. The max bet button 4206 can be pressed once to allow input from credits to the maximum bet amount (for example, 3), but if the credit amount is less than the maximum bet amount, the credit amount is input as the bet amount. It's like

Below the operation unit 4202, a payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided. A payout button 4209 is used to pay out medals inserted from the medal slot 4203, medals (bet medals) input as the number of bets from the one-insert button 4205 and the max bet button 4206, or credits that are paid out when a prize is established. It is used when giving a command to return the stored medals (stored medals) to the medal receiving tray 4201 . In addition, when medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 after the automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a replay winning (replay winning), or medals exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as credits are also used for medals via the medal selector 4207. It is returned to the receiving tray 4201 .

The start lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a game in one section. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or when resetting an error (eg, hopper error) condition of the slot machine 4000 . The return button 4208 is used to return the medals inserted from the medal slot 4203 and stuck in the medal selector 4207 to the medal receiving tray 4201 .

The reel stop button 4211 is composed of a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively. and stops the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c according to the stop operation.

A decorative plate (decorative panel) forming the lower region of the front member 4200 is provided below the portion where these operation buttons are provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the lowest part of the front member 4200, a medal receiving tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout port, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided.

A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 180) for controlling the entire slot machine 4000 is arranged in the upper part of the inside of the housing. A character ratio display 1317 and a character ratio display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600 . The character ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. A liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600 may constitute the character ratio indicator 1317 .

The character ratio indicator 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another indicator (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display body 4500) provided on the front of the slot machine 4000, and the payout number display LED 4562 or the character ratio may be displayed on the image display 4500 .

When the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the role ratio is displayed on the role ratio display 1317 . It is preferable to display (print, engrave, seal, etc.) on the printed circuit board near the role product ratio display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100 that it is a switch for operating the display of the role product ratio. The character ratio display switch 1318 is desirably provided near the character ratio display 1317, but even if it is not on the main control unit 1300, if it is a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, an effect (control board 4700, power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. Also, as will be described later, the character product ratio display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the role product ratio display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

In addition, a pattern variation display device 4300 is provided at approximately the center inside the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are placed thereon. An external relay terminal board 4131 for outputting a signal from the main substrate 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000 .

Furthermore, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is arranged in the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the activated line and a prize is awarded, this prize is awarded. or the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the credit due to the addition associated with winning is paid out to the medal receiving tray 4201.例文帳に追加By operating the payout button 4209, the medal payout device 4110 pays out the medals for the credit to the medal receiving tray 4201.例文帳に追加In addition, on the right side of the medal payout device 4110, the medals overflowing from the medal payout device 4110 are stored, and the medals that have flowed in are sent to the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for induction.

[13-2. Internal configuration of the slot machine]
FIG. 180 is a block diagram showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, etc. provided in the slot machine 4000. As shown in FIG. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for overall control of the game progress, and the main board 4600 is mounted with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input/output interface 4604, and the like.

As described above, the main board 4600 is provided with a character ratio display 1317 that displays the character ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and a character ratio display switch 1318 that switches the display of the character ratio display 1317 . The role item ratio display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be of another type. When the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the role ratio may be displayed on the role ratio display 1317 .

All of the above-mentioned single insert button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, payout button 4209, etc. are connected to the main substrate 4600, and these operation buttons are sensors (not shown). is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600 . Specifically, when the starting lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c) is output to the main substrate 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a. , 4211b and 4211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c are output to the main substrate 4600 respectively.

Further, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main substrate 4600, and various signals are input to the main substrate 4600 from these devices. Equipment includes a symbol variation display device 4300, a medal payout device 4110, and the like.

As described above, the variable symbol display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c for respectively rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right reel drive motor 4341b, reel drive motor 4341c). The reel driving motor 4341 is a stepping motor, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c can rotate and stop independently. It is displayed while continuously changing downward.

Position sensors 4331a, 4331b, and 4331c are provided for detecting reference positions for rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. They are provided correspondingly within the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

Inside the medal selector 4207, the above-described solenoid 4207a and insertion sensor 4207b are installed. The insertion sensor 4207 b detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 4600 . When the solenoid 4207a is in the OFF state, inserted medals are detected by the inserted medals sensor 4207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the path to the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out, and insertion of medals cannot be accepted. The medal that flows through the return gutter returns to the medal receiving tray 4201 . At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is invalidated, so that neither betting by inserting medals nor accumulation of medals is performed.

The medal pay-out device 4110 has a pay-out sensor 4110e for detecting paid-out medals one by one in the outlet, and a pay-out medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the pay-out sensor 4110e. . In addition, the game medal auxiliary storage box is provided with a medal full sensor 4111a. output to At this time, the image display 4500, the error lamp 4554, and the like display an error indicating an abnormality in the accumulation of medals, thereby informing the player, hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of the abnormality.

On the other hand, the main board 4600 outputs control signals to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110 . That is, the main substrate 4600 outputs drive pulse signals for controlling the start and stop of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c. In addition, the medal payout device 4110 receives a drive signal from the main substrate 4600 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and upon receipt of this, the medal payout device 4110 pays out medals. At this time, if the medal payout device 4110 does not have enough medals to be paid out, or if there are no medals, the payout sensor 4110e will not be able to detect the number of medals. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the payout sensor 4110e outputs an abnormal medal payout signal to the main board 4600, and the main board 4600 receives the signal to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of medals. is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display 4500, etc., to inform the player, hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of an abnormality.

The slot machine 4000 is provided with an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600. This effect control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, a ROM 4702, a RAM 4703, an input/output interface 4707, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and an AMP (audio amplifier). ) 4705, a sound source IC 4706 and the like are mounted. The performance control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600, and controls the display of the image display 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 4502, etc., and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Furthermore, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 of the game arcade via the external relay terminal board 4131 . The external relay terminal board 4131 has a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, paid-out medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800 .

The power supply unit 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from 24 volt AC (24V AC) power supplied from the island facility. For example, three types of power supplies are created: DC +5V (hereinafter "+5V"), DC +12V (hereinafter "+12V"), and DC +24V (hereinafter "+24V"). Three types of power of +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each component included in the slot machine 4000. is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is attached with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000 and can be operated only when the front member 4200 is opened. The power switch 4112v is for turning ON/OFF the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the settings of the slot machine 4000 (for example, settings 1 to 6). The reset switch 4112u is used to clear an error that has occurred in the slot machine 4000, and is operated together with the setting change key switch 4112t when changing settings.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel driving motor voltage switching circuit 4605 . When the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is rotationally driven to obtain drive torque for rotating the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, HI) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. , the control is performed so that +12V is supplied to the reel drive motor 4341 as the motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining static torque for maintaining the stopped state of the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switching signal (for example, LOW) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. , the control is performed to supply +5V to the reel drive motor 4341 as the motor drive voltage.

The configuration example of the slot machine 4000 has been described above. In the game using the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the starting lever 4210 after determining the number of medals to be wagered, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c rotate, and then the player presses the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c. is operated, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are controlled to stop, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of symbols on the active line, and if necessary Accordingly, the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded.

As described above, each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c is provided with a reel strip on which a pattern is drawn. Then, when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed in the symbol display window 4401 (combination of symbols displayed on the activated line). It is determined whether or not a combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line in the symbol display window 4401 . It is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of activated lines. As a result, when it is determined that a plurality of winning combinations of symbol combinations are displayed, medals are paid out in the amount obtained by adding up the payout numbers corresponding to the displayed winning combinations.

[13-3. Storage area configuration]
Next, storage areas provided by the ROM 4602 and RAM 4603 provided on the main substrate 4600 will be described. The storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 24, but is configured in the same manner as the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. FIG. 181 is a diagram showing details of the access area in the game control of the slot machine 4000 and the ROM area 5100 which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602 in this embodiment.

The storage area in this embodiment is provided by media such as the ROM 4602 and the RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from "0000H" to "FFFFH" are assigned. The access area of this embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I/O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. is Note that each area does not necessarily correspond to the medium that provides the access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

Since the access area of this embodiment is configured as described above, the CPU 4601 can access programs and data by specifying an address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. Details of the access area will be described below.

[13-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be described. ROM area 5100 corresponds to the storage area provided by ROM 4602 . The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains the stored data even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. This is not possible. Note that the ROM 4602 may be a non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updated.

The ROM area 5100 is given addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH". The data stored in the ROM 4602 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "0000H" to "1FFFH".

The ROM area 5100 has a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. Each area has a start address and an end address.

The first control area is a game control area, and stores programs and the like for performing game control. The first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for game control are stored. That is, the program stored in the first control area is executed, and game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. In addition, let the area|region (1st control area, 1st data area) used for game control be the area|region for game control (1st storage area).

The second control area stores a program for debugging (functional inspection) of the control program. The second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (function test). The second data area is not necessarily required, and debugging data may be stored in the second control area. In addition, the area (second control area, second data area) where the program and data for debugging (function inspection) of the game control program without being used for game control are stored is the area for debugging (inspection function) ( second storage area).

The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying the character product ratio. The third control area also stores data for character product ratio calculation. A third data area may be provided for storing data for character product ratio calculation. An area (third control area) in which a program and data for calculating the role product ratio without being used for game control are stored is defined as a role product ratio calculation area (third storage area). Thus, by designing the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a separate area, the role product ratio calculation/display code 13135 is inspected and the game control code 13131 is stored. can be performed separately from the inspection of the slot machine 4000, and the trouble of inspecting the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. In addition, the code 13135 for calculating/displaying the role product ratio can be used in common for a plurality of models without depending on the model.

The first isolation area, the second isolation area, the third isolation area, and the fourth isolation area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and access is prohibited. In the processing by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset processing is forcibly executed. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are areas that are continuous with the preceding and following areas. ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first isolated area is the address ("0AFFH") one before the first data area. In addition, the third isolated area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function test) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the debug (function test) area may be treated as Similarly, the fourth isolated area is arranged between the area for debugging (functional inspection) and the area for character ratio calculation, and is treated as the area for debugging (functional inspection) in FIG. It may be treated as an object ratio calculation area.

[13-3-2. RAM area]
Next, the configuration of the RAM area 5200 will be described. FIG. 182 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 5200 in this embodiment. RAM area 5200 corresponds to the storage area provided by RAM 4603 . The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose stored contents are erased when the gaming machine 1 is powered off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores the programs and data stored in the ROM area 5100, and stores data derived by executing the programs. Note that the RAM 4603 may be a non-volatile storage medium as long as it can read and write data. Also, when a power failure occurs, the data stored in the RAM 4603 can be held for a predetermined period by the backup power supply.

The RAM area 5200 is given addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH". The data stored in the RAM 4603 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying addresses "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 5200 includes a work area for game control, a work area for debugging (inspection function), a save area and an isolation area. Each area has a start address and an end address.

The work area for game control is a work area (temporary area) used when executing game control (first control). The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing program debug control (second control). The role product ratio calculation work area is an area for storing data for calculating the role product ratio and the calculated role product ratio (character product ratio, continuous accessory ratio, advantageous section accessory ratio, etc.). It should be noted that the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the character ratio do not necessarily need to secure a dedicated work area. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating the character ratio may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the control area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the character ratio is reduced. However, if the program configuration does not use the work area for debugging (inspection function) or the work area for calculating the character ratio, it is not necessary to use the work area for debugging (inspection function) or the work area for calculating the character ratio. good too.

The withdrawal area is an area for temporarily storing in order to save data used in game control or debug (inspection function) control or character product ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various CPU registers (calculation registers, flag registers, stack pointers, etc.) are copied to a save area before executing the predetermined process, After the processing is completed, the copied values are returned to various registers of the CPU. The retreat area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and character ratio calculation. Calculation may be divided separately. Thereby, independence can be maintained more by game control, debug (inspection function) control, and role product ratio calculation.

The isolated area is between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the character ratio, and the work area for debugging (inspection function), the save area, and the save area for calculating the character ratio. , and is a continuous area with each area (areas before and after). For example, the start address of the isolated area between the work area for game control and the work area for debugging (inspection function) is the next address ("3076H") after the end address of the work area for game control, and the end address is It becomes the previous address ("307FH") of the work area for debugging (inspection function). The isolated area is an area to which access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute reset processing when accessed during processing by the CPU 4601 .

FIG. 182 shows the details of the role product ratio calculation work area on the right side thereof. The role product ratio calculation work area may include a main area for storing the calculation result of the role product ratio, and a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 for storing a copy of the data stored in the main area. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting data errors is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, is set each time the data in the main area is updated in the character ratio calculation/display process, or is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 185). ) may be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, even if the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 185) good. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code in the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Also, if a predetermined value is set in the power interruption flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area has a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

In the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 185), it is determined whether or not the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal should be copied to the main area. Also, in the power-off processing executed when the power is turned off, the values in the main area may be copied to each backup area.

Unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2 . By providing an unused space between each area, the addresses of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the high-order digits of the address.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the role product ratio calculation work area.

FIG. 183(A) shows the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 183(A), the number of payouts, the number of consecutive payouts, the total number of payouts, the ratio of the prizes, the ratio of consecutive prizes, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section Stores a percentage. The number of prizes paid out is the number of medals paid out while the prize is in operation (for example, during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive award winning balls is the number of medals paid out during continuous award operation (for example, during big bonus). The total number of payouts is the total number of medals paid out in the game. The role ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of payouts by the total number of payouts. The continuous accessory ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of continuous accessory payouts divided by the total number of wins and payouts. The number of games played in an advantageous interval is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the number of medals in hand is less likely to decrease, such as ART (Assist Replay Time)), and the number of games played in a non-advantageous interval. , is the number of games executed in a game state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of games in the advantageous section by (the number of games in the advantageous section + the number of games in the non-advantageous section).

Among the structure of the work area shown in FIG. It corresponds to the cumulative total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data will not be erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is provided so that long-term data can be stored. Also, the role product ratio, continuous role product ratio, and advantageous section ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

The number of bonus payouts, the number of continuous bonus payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous zone games, and the number of non-advantageous zone games are updated in the area update process for calculating the role ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 185), and the role ratio , the continuous role ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the role ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 186).

FIG. 183B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. Stores the number of games played in the advantageous section and the ratio of the advantageous section. Each data storage area is configured by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games). When the number (400) is reached, the write pointers for all data are moved, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the n-th storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers for all data are moved for each predetermined number of winning balls. Further, the read pointer also moves along with the movement of the write pointer. The read pointer points to a storage area one behind the write pointer. This is for calculating the character ratio using data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer. When the ring buffer is cycled and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the character ratio and the continuous component ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared for writing new data, the total cumulative value is calculated including the data in the cleared area.

Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 183(B), the number of replays, the number of prize payouts, the number of award payouts, the number of continuous award payouts, and the number of games in the ring buffer are each a 2-byte storage area. Numerical values up to 65535 in decimal can be stored. The number of replays, the number of winning prizes, the number of payouts, the number of consecutive payouts, and the total number of games are storage areas of 3 bytes each, and can store values up to 16,777,215 in decimal. A large storage area is provided because the cumulative total is, for example, the sum of data for 400 games×n (6000 games when n=15). The number of replays, the number of prize payouts, the number of payouts of the award, the number of consecutive payouts of the award, and the cumulative total of the number of games are each a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not deleted unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is provided so that long-term data can be stored. Also, the sum total and total sum of the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are each a storage area of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. The number of games played in an advantageous section and the number of games played in a non-advantageous section are each a 3-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal. The advantageous interval ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

By increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, the data for the same 6000 games in total can be stored. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

Among the structure of the work area shown in FIG. The description is the same as in FIG. 183(A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The winning payout number is the total number of medals paid out in the game. The number of games played is the number of games played, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of replays, the number of prize payouts, the number of accessory payouts, the number of continuous accessory payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated in the area update process for calculating the role ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 185). ), and the role ratio, continuous role ratio, and advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the role ratio calculation/display process (step S1119 in FIG. 186).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 183(A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the role product ratio calculation work area is deleted in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 185). data is not erased by other triggers. For this reason, the data in the work area for calculating the role product ratio may be erased every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total accumulation in FIG. 183(B) may be erased every predetermined period.

Also, the data in the work area for calculating the character ratio or the calculated character ratio is an abnormal value (for example, the character ratio is over 100%, or the calculation result of the character ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculation value. , number of payouts>total number of payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the role product ratio may be deleted. Further, if the data in the work area for calculating the role product ratio or the calculated role product ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that there is an abnormality. Also, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, and after duplicating the normal data in the backup area to the main area, the character product ratio may be calculated again.

[13-3-3. Configuration of I/O Area]
Next, the I/O area 5300 will be described. An input/output port corresponds to the I/O area 5300, and each input/output port can be accessed by the CPU 4601 accessing the I/O area 5300. FIG. Input/output ports correspond to, for example, ports related to inputs such as switches, and ports related to outputs such as large winning opening solenoids and LED drive signals. Input/output port settings (settings related to use/unuse such as input settings and output settings) are set based on the setting values in the parameter information setting area 5400 .

[13-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be explained. FIG. 184 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 5400 of this embodiment. A parameter information setting area 5400 is an area in which various settings can be made. For example, various settings include the start/end addresses of each control area and data area, as shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 184, the definition of the start address and the end address of each area of the third control area, the work area for calculating the character ratio calculation, and the save area for calculating the character ratio calculation is omitted, but the third control area start setting And the third control area end setting is defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work area start setting for character ratio calculation and the work area end setting for character ratio calculation are the start and end settings of other work areas It is defined in the same manner as the end setting, and the character product ratio calculation save area start setting and character product ratio calculation save area end setting are defined in the same manner as the start and end settings of other save areas. An area other than the area set here is an unused (unset) area. As a result, when the CPU 4601 accesses the unused area, the reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601 . In FIG. 184, the areas are set as continuous areas, but the set areas do not have to be continuous. For example, the parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Further, in this embodiment, when an area other than the setting area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 5100 and the isolated area of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, by intentionally accessing the isolated area and resetting, it is possible to perform the initial activation of the program. Since slot machines execute processes sequentially, by accessing the isolation area after the last game process is completed, the program can be executed from the startup process and the initial settings can be executed again. As a result, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, the normal value can be set again by executing the initial setting again. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, RAM clearing is determined by the power failure flag, but it is possible to forcibly clear the RAM by accessing the isolated area without setting the power failure flag. Become. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, since the game is played in parallel, once the game itself is initialized, it becomes impossible to continue the game. Since it is necessary to initialize the information in the RAM, it is possible to eliminate the processing for initializing the information in the RAM by accessing the isolated area.

The values set in the parameter information setting area 5400 are not set sequentially by user program processing such as initial setting of the CPU 4601, but by setting the address of the parameter area and the set value in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. , the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at startup. As a result, various parameters can be set when the game machine 1 is powered on. Since the set values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[13-4. Game control]
[13-4-1. System reset startup process]
Next, control of the slot machine of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 185 is a flow chart for explaining the procedure of system reset activation processing executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset activation process is a process that is executed when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on or when a power failure occurs.

When the system reset activation process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting values stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area are set in the function setting registers of the CPU 4601, and the addresses of the areas assigned to the access areas are set as the setting values. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is assigned to the RAM area 5200 as a used area, and an area not assigned as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 182) is treated as an unused area. assigned. Also, the work area and the save area are divided into game control and debugging (inspection function) (or other uses). In the ROM area 5100, as in the RAM area 5200, areas for storing programs and data are allocated as used areas, and areas not allocated as used areas are allocated as unused areas.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes security check processing (step S1012). Security check processing is processing for determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, there is a possibility that the ROM 4602 has been replaced with an illegal ROM, so activation of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Furthermore, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check elapses (step S1014).

It should be noted that the processing from power-on of the slot machine to the end of the security check (processing up to step S1014) is not defined by the user program, but is configured by hardware inside the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It has become.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes device initialization setting processing for initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting processing, processing such as startup setting of periodic processing (FIG. 186, timer interrupt processing) for periodically executing predetermined processing is executed. In this embodiment, the parameter setting process executes a function such as a random number function setting that prevents the user program from rewriting the setting related to the game lottery after the security check, and the device initialization setting process for other functions. running with By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom of game control is enhanced and cheating is less likely to occur in the game.

Furthermore, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 or hot start to return to the game with the contents of the backed up RAM 4603 is performed.

When performing a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is "Yes"), the CPU 4601 executes initialization processing to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1020). A cold start is performed when a setting change operation of the game machine 1 is performed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power interruption flag is not set.

On the other hand, the CPU 4601 executes processing for returning to the game based on the backed-up contents of the RAM 4603 when performing a hot start to return to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (result of step S1018 is "No"). (Step S1022). At this time, the process that was interrupted at the time of power failure is restored by the return process. Specifically, in either of steps S1024 to S1042 of the system reset activation process described later or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 186), the process that was interrupted at the time of power failure is resumed.

Note that the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment calculates a checksum based on information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when recovery processing is executed. At this time, only the work area for game control excluding the work area for debugging (inspection function) out of all areas that use the checksum calculation target as work (work area for game control and work area for debugging (inspection function)) may be Calculating the checksum only in the game control work area is because the debugging (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process, and it does not affect the game results. Since it is a process that does not exist, it is possible that some bugs may remain due to insufficient verification.In this case, a work area for debugging (inspection function) that holds information obtained by executing such processing Using it as a checksum calculation target may impair the reliability of normal recovery from a power outage. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is installed in a product with bugs remaining, it will cause a big trouble in the market. Depending on the situation, sales may be discontinued and the product may need to be recalled. This is because the work area for game control is more reliable than the work area for debugging (inspection function) because the verification is performed practically.

When the initialization process ends, or when a series of games ends, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, the information in the RAM 4603, which is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls, is once returned to the initial setting state.

After completing the game initial setting process, the CPU 4601 executes an information signal 1 output process for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting the debugging (inspection function) signal to the initial state is performed. For the information signal output processing, information signal 1 to N output processing is defined, and necessary modules are called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when outputting a debug (inspection function) signal (information on reel rotation start, start lever ON, winning combination) associated with the start of the game in the game start processing, debugging regarding the stop of each reel in the symbol stop processing ( When the inspection function) signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) is output, the debugging (inspection function) signal related to the fixed combination in the winning judgment process (fixed combination stopped on each reel, payout accompanying the fixed combination At the time of outputting the number information, the information of the output signal regarding the payout number at the time of payout (the number of payout medals, etc.), the "information signal N output processing" module necessary for the processing is appropriately called and executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes standby processing for performing processing before the player operates the starting lever 4210 (step S1028). Before the start lever 4210 is operated, for example, it is determined whether or not a replay execution instruction has been given, whether or not medals have been inserted, and whether or not medals have been settled. Confirmation of game setting values and the like are performed.

When the starting lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes game start processing for starting the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for drawing a game is obtained, a winning combination is determined, and the rotation of the reels 4301 is started. After that, the CPU 4601 executes Wait processing for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches the normal rotational speed (step S1032).

When the reels 4301 reach the normal rotational speed, the CPU 4601 makes it possible to receive input from the reel stop button 4211, and executes symbol stop processing until all the reels 4301 are stopped (step S1034).

Furthermore, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, the winning combination is determined, and when the winning combination is determined, the setting corresponding to the winning combination is performed, and the setting for executing the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize medals to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and adds the value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and adds the value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state. 182, see FIG. 183) is updated (step S1038). The processing of step S1038 can be skipped when there are no prize medals to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Note that even when the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and stops the game, the role product ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. Regardless of whether fraud is detected or not, by executing these processes, it is possible to collect data for character product ratio calculation even during fraud notification.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes game end processing for processing at the end of the game (step S1042). In the game ending process, a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if there is no winning or if there is no payout, this process is skipped. When the game ending process ends, the process returns to the game initialization process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[13-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, periodic processing, which is interrupt processing that is activated at predetermined intervals while the main loop processing of the system reset initial activation processing is being executed, will be described. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing the procedure of regular processing.

When the regular processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all registers (step S1110). At this time, the saved data is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. As mentioned above, periodic processing is interrupt processing that is activated while main loop processing is being executed. need to be

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer incorporated in the CPU (step S1112). This allows the watchdog timer to be cleared periodically.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes switch input processing for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Furthermore, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of a driver (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, it performs stepping motor pulse output, origin position detection, and the like.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes timer measurement processing for updating various timers used in game control (step S1118). Since the periodic processing is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic processing times the set number of times.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not the role product ratio display switch 1318 has been operated, and if the role product ratio display switch 1318 has been operated, calls the role product ratio calculation/display process, and The accessory ratio is calculated by referring to the number of payout medals stored in the area. Then, the calculated role product ratio is displayed on the role product ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The role product ratio calculation/display processing is the same as the role product ratio calculation/display processing ( FIGS. 24 and 25 ) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 . Further, the specific calculation method of the character ratio and the specific display method of the character ratio are the same as the methods described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 . In this way, by calling the character product ratio calculation/display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the character product ratio, it is possible to confirm the character product ratio (gambling property of the slot machine 4000) based on the most recent data.

In addition, when the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (character ratio, continuous role ratio, total, total total) may be calculated. Only the displayed value may be calculated for each operation of . Also, regardless of whether or not the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated role ratio is displayed on the role ratio display 1317 when the role ratio display switch 1318 is operated. may

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes LED output processing for controlling the LED (step S1120). The LED to be controlled is the one controlled by the main substrate 4600, and for example, the payout number display LED 4562. It also outputs data for displaying the character ratio on the LED.

CPU 4601 executes information output processing for outputting a signal to external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to hall computer 4800 via external relay terminal board 4131 . Furthermore, CPU4601 outputs the command memorize|stored in the command buffer to the production|presentation control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes random number update processing for updating the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). In random number update processing, random numbers to be generated by software processing are updated. Here, in addition to random numbers generated only by software, update processing of soft random numbers built into the CPU is executed. With the software random numbers built into the CPU, although the count itself is executed by hardware, the trigger for update is determined in this process. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce program processing related to random number update.

When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process to return to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Furthermore, execution of interrupts is permitted (step S1130). During execution of regular processing (timer interrupt processing), even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending, and the interrupt is enabled after the timer interrupt processing that was executed immediately before ends normally. It is now running. Therefore, the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is configured so as not to be executed multiple times.

[13-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Next, information signal output processing executed in system reset start-up processing and the like will be described. The information signal output processing is provided according to each output signal function (1 to N), and is composed of a plurality of modules. For example, there are "conditional device output signal (signal output related to conditional device operation)" and "lottery determination processing (signal output related to lottery)". Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the explanation of each flow is omitted. FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the procedure of information signal output processing of this embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the value set in the register from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure recovery even if it is destroyed), and the values of all registers are saved in the stack area. It is designed to let In addition, the stack area used at this time is assigned to a save area for debugging (inspection function), and is assigned to a different area separated from the save area for game control.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires from the RAM 4603 information referred to for selecting (ON/OFF) an information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) to be output (step S1212). Each information signal output process only refers to the information stored in the RAM 4603, and does not write data to the RAM 4603 in the process. When writing is necessary, information is output to the work area for debugging (inspection function). A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured so as not to be used (including reference) in processes other than the information signal output process. Thereby, even if the program for executing the information signal output process is placed in a different place from the other game control programs, independence from the other game control programs can be ensured without using a common area. .

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Furthermore, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, elapses (step S1218). The information signal output time is predetermined, and by setting a sufficient time, the debugging (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the destination. After that, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process ends.

As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output by the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processing from step S1210 to step S1220 is executed for the debug (inspection function) signals to be output. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each output signal function (1 to N). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processing are defined for each function. Information signal output processing may be made common by preparing two data areas and selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to a function designated by a caller.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a program (signal output program) for executing information signal output processing etc. is stored in an area clearly distinguished from the area for storing the game control program (game control area). By providing the area (debugging (inspection function) area), a program for debugging (inspection function) of the game machine 1 can be arranged independently. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the gaming machine 1, and is a process that does not affect the results of the game and does not impair the fairness of the game. In addition, for purposes other than this (for example, to arrange game control programs and general-purpose programs to compensate for the lack of capacity in the game control area), programs should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program, and at this time, the address of the call destination is specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and protects all registers used in the game control area when called. Also, as mentioned above, when executing the program processing of the game control area, access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and the program processing of the debug (inspection function) area is executed. If it is, it is configured to permit only reference to the work area for game control and prohibit writing. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling modules (including subroutines) placed in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program placed in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in the form of a subroutine, and after the subroutine ends, the return instruction returns immediately after the call. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. By configuring in this way, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (the program placed in the debug (inspection function) area).

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (game control work area, role product ratio calculation work area) may be the same as steps S18 to S26 in FIG. Note that the slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and if the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the game state backup data is deleted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine described above, it is possible to accurately calculate the role ratio of the slot machine in operation, and to enhance the gambling nature of the gaming machine in operation. I can confirm.

Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such specific configurations, but various modifications and equivalents within the spirit of the appended claims. including configuration.

Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, representative aspects of the invention other than those described in the scope of claims are as follows.

(0) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of a game;
and a character ratio indicator that displays information about the given game value,
The character ratio display device has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device,
The main controller is
transmitting data to be displayed on the character ratio display to the driver circuit by serial communication;
The game according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that, after power-on, the synchronization method, communication rate, whether to use parity, and whether to use stop bits are set for serial communication with the driver circuit. machine.

(1) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than communication between the main control device and the peripheral control devices.

As a result, inaccurate display of the character product ratio due to garbled data during communication can be suppressed.

(2) the main controller,
It has a work RAM that holds data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the character ratio even when the power is off,
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the settings for the serial communication are executed after the work RAM is cleared.

As a result, it is possible to prevent display of an erroneous character product ratio by using erroneous RAM data.

(3) the main controller,
has a function of transmitting the data accumulated in the FIFO buffer by serial communication,
The game machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a data storage amount is set to determine the timing of data transmission from the FIFO buffer after power-on.

This allows data to be sent in any number of bits from the FIFO buffer.

(4) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a main controller that executes a program that controls the progress of a game;
and a character ratio indicator that displays information about the given game value,
The character ratio display device has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device,
The main controller, the display device and the driver are arranged such that the length of the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by arranging a circuit.

By lengthening the signal line that connects the main controller and the driver circuit, it is possible to easily detect illegal modifications without arranging parts around the main controller, and furthermore, the signal line that connects the driver circuit and the display device. is shorter than the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the character-object ratio can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main controller and the character product ratio display are housed in one case.

As a result, it is possible to easily detect illegal modifications without arranging other parts around the main controller, and to reduce the influence of noise.

(6) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main controller and the character product ratio display are arranged on a single printed circuit board.

As a result, unauthorized modification can be easily discovered without arranging other parts on the printed circuit board around the main controller, and the influence of noise can be reduced.

(7) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the character product ratio display device is configured by housing the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

This can reduce the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. Also, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit.

As a result, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit can be reduced.

(9) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display orientation of the character ratio indicator is the same as the display orientation of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) the driver circuit has a standby mode in which characters and numbers are not displayed on the display device to reduce power consumption;
The game according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the main controller sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the character product ratio display is in a closed state in which the character product ratio display is not visible in the installed state of the game machine. machine.

As a result, wasteful power consumption of the game machine can be prevented when display of the character product ratio is unnecessary.

(11) A gaming machine that gives prize balls as game value to a player by winning a prize in a predetermined winning hole of a game ball shot toward a game area,
a main control device that controls the progress of a game;
Equipped with a role ratio display that displays information about prize balls,
The winning opening includes a general winning opening whose entrance shape does not change depending on the game state, and an electric winning opening whose entrance opens or expands depending on the game state,
The main controller determines the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player, at least the number of the first prize balls to be paid out triggered by the winning in the general winning opening, and the number of winning balls in the electric winning opening triggered by counted separately from the number of second prize balls to be paid out,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the character ratio display device displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main controller stores the counted number of prize balls in a memory,
the memory stores check code for verifying the stored number of prize balls;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main controller erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

As a result, an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory can be detected, and display of an erroneous role ratio (the ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls) can be suppressed.

(13) The main controller,
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when power is cut off,
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area,
storing the data of the number of prize balls for calculating the character ratio in the second backup area;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

Thus, when at least one of the data for game control and the data on the number of winning balls for calculating the role product ratio is normal, only the abnormal data can be deleted and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main controller,
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when power is cut off,
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area,
storing the data of the number of prize balls for calculating the character ratio in the second backup area;
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the game machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. A game machine described in the item.

When the role product ratio calculation/display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the role product ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed-up character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 is not erased, thereby preventing the erasure of the character product ratio calculation/display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall staff. , It is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the character ratio is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled to a state with a high role ratio, and to prevent concealment of the state with a high role ratio.

(15A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
a display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in response to input/output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) the information about the gaming value is a base;
The control means is
controlling the progress of a game by switching between a special game state in which a player can obtain a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state is the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine). The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of balls, the sum of the number of game balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls.

(15C) The control means receives, as the predetermined signal, a winning detection signal for detecting a winning to a winning opening, a reception confirmation signal for a prize ball payout command or a prize ball payout completion signal, or a timing for receiving a prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of prize balls used to calculate the base to be displayed on the display means is updated at the timing when the prize ball payout command instructing the payout is transmitted.

(15D) The control means
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal game state, when receiving a signal that a game ball has won a prize in a winning hole provided in the game area, calculating the number of prize balls determined corresponding to the winning hole,
updating the total number of prize balls using the calculated number of prize balls;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(15E) comprising payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means is
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal game state, when the winning of game balls into a winning opening provided in the game area is detected, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(15F) provided with a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means is
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal game state, when the winning of game balls into a winning opening provided in the game area is detected, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
receiving confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction for which the receipt confirmation is received;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(15G) a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player;
The control means is
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal game state, when the winning of game balls into a winning opening provided in the game area is detected, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player;
receiving the completion of the payout of the prize balls according to the instruction from the payout control means;
updating the total number of prize balls using the number of prize balls corresponding to the received instruction of completion of the payout;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state.

(15H) The control means includes information updating means for updating information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in response to input/output of a predetermined signal, and updating the updated information on the game value on the display means. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means for processing (statistically processing) and displaying the results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 15A to 15H, it is possible to accurately execute processing related to acquisition of game media.

(16A) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
a display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates the information related to the game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to satisfaction of a predetermined condition in the game situation.

(16B) the information about the gaming value is a base;
The control means is
controlling the progress of a game by switching between a special game state in which a player can obtain a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means
The total number of prize balls used for calculating the base is stored,
In the normal game state, when a winning game ball is detected in a winning hole provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning hole is calculated and stored in a buffer,
At a predetermined timing, the predetermined number is transferred from the buffer to the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the game area). , the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, the sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls) to calculate the base.

(16D) The predetermined timing is timing when the number of winning balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer, adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, and thereby removes the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that the predetermined number is moved to a number.

(16E) The control means includes information updating means for updating information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in response to input/output of a predetermined signal, and updating the information on the updated game value to the display means. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means for processing (statistically processing) and displaying the results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from the game while maintaining the game within the regular restrictions of the main controller.

(17A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
a display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The control means is
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game value information to be displayed on the display means is updated in relation to the fact that the counted number of balls consumed satisfies a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means
controlling the progress of a game by switching between a special game state in which a player can obtain a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the information regarding the game value is calculated at the timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means determines the number of balls to be consumed according to the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, or the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that it counts .

(17D) the information about the gaming value is a base;
The control means is
stores the total number of out balls used for calculating the base;
calculating the number of balls consumed in the normal game state and storing it in a buffer;
A predetermined number is transferred from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing, and the base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(17E) The predetermined timing is timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of consumed balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out balls, thereby The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that a predetermined number is moved to a number.

(17F) The control means
Triggered by winning the start winning slot, a special symbol variation display game for deriving the special game state is executed,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that, when the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is the upper limit value, the number of winning balls is counted without storing the winning to the starting winning hole.

(17G) The control means includes information updating means for updating information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in response to input/output of a predetermined signal, and updating the updated information on the game value on the display means. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means for processing (statistically processing) and displaying the results of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to inventions 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from the game while maintaining the game.

(18A) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
a main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is played is detachably attached;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display means displays the information about the game value even when the body frame is closed.

(18B) the main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to an island facility of a playground;
The game machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided on the back side of the game machine so as to be visible when the body frame is opened.

(18C) the control means is attached to the body frame;
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided in the case of the control means so as to be visible from the back side of the game machine.

According to the inventions 18A to 18C, it is possible to suppress the decrease in hall sales.

(19A)
A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
a display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The control means is
Information updating means for updating information about game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to satisfaction of a predetermined condition in the game;
a game execution means for performing a special symbol variation display game triggered by winning a prize in the starting prize opening,
wherein the game value information is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the special symbol variation display game is being played by the game execution means; The game machine described.

(19B) the information about the gaming value is a base;
The control means, as the predetermined condition, at any timing of detection of winning to the winning opening, transmission of prize ball payout command, reception of receipt confirmation of prize ball payout command, and reception of prize ball payout completion signal The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of winning balls used to calculate the base to be displayed on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has sufficient countermeasures against cheating even during a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a main control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
Effect control means for controlling the effect of a special symbol variation display game that is triggered by winning a prize in the starting port;
a game value information display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The production control means is
controlling the transition to a low power mode in which the power consumption of the game machine is reduced from the normal mode,
The game machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein during the low power mode, the display mode is not changed so as to reduce the power consumption of the game value information display means.

(20B) an effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game and comprising a liquid crystal display means having a backlight;
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value information display means is composed of a light-emitting diode and does not reduce brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) an effect display means for displaying an effect of the special symbol variation display game;
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time elapses after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is consumed,
The game value information display means does not change the display mode so as to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is consumed. The game machine described in each of the preceding items.

According to the inventions 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a substantial energy saving mode.

(21A) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
a display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The control means is
game state control means for controlling the game state to any one of a normal game state and a plurality of advantageous game states more advantageous to the player than the normal game state;
The information regarding the game value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. game machine.

(21B) The control means controls the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, or the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls, The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of balls consumed in the normal game state is counted.

(21C) The control means
When the special symbol variation display game results in a big win, the advantageous game state is derived, and control is performed to open the winning openings from which the player can obtain a large amount of game value,
The advantageous gaming state is defined as the period between the confirmation of the big win in the special symbol variation display game and the start of the next special symbol variation display game, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information on the game value. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(21D) The control means
In the advantageous game state, control is performed to open the winning openings from which the player can obtain a large amount of game value,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of game balls that have entered the winning slot is excluded from the number of game balls that have been launched into the game area, and the number of balls that have been consumed in the normal game state is counted.

According to the inventions 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that provides a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
and display means for displaying information about the given game ball,
In the game area where the launched game balls roll, there are a start port that triggers a special game state that facilitates the acquisition of a large number of game balls, and a trigger that leads the open state from the closed state of the start port. At least a passage opening is provided,
The control means is
It is also possible to control a special game state that makes it easy to derive the open state of the start port,
The number of prize balls given to the player is played by excluding the number of prize balls given and the number of consumption balls consumed by the player while being controlled to either the special game state or the special game state. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the information on the game balls is calculated and updated by dividing by the number of balls consumed by the player.

(22B) The control means selects one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls, The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the number of balls consumed in the normal state is counted.

(22C) The control means determines the number of winning balls and the number of consumed balls during the period from the determination of winning by the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game as the expansion state, and determines the number of the game balls. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that it is excluded from information calculation.

(22D) The control means counts the number of balls consumed in the normal state by excluding the number of game balls that have entered the starting hole from the number of game balls launched into the game area. A game machine described in each item.

According to the inventions 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) a shooting device operable by a player for shooting game balls toward a game area;
prize ball awarding means for awarding a predetermined number of prize balls when the game balls are detected in a winning hole provided in the game area;
a main control means for executing a lottery to decide whether or not to grant an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player when the game ball is detected in a predetermined winning opening among the winning openings;
A gaming machine comprising peripheral control means for determining an effect to appear based on information transmitted from the main control means,
The main control means has an information update means that can update information on the given game ball to increase or decrease,
A first state in which the information on the given game ball can be updated by the information updating means to increase or decrease, and a state in which the information on the given game ball can be updated to increase or decrease by the information updating means There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information on the given game ball is updated to increase is suppressed compared to the first state,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the state has shifted from the first state to the second state.

(23B) the information about the gaming value is a base;
The main control means is
controlling the progress of a game by switching between a special game state in which a player can obtain a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
calculating the base by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect with a timing at which the base is likely to fall as the second state.

(23C) The main control means
Writing information about game balls into a storage area at a predetermined time, every predetermined number of prize balls, or every predetermined number of consumed balls,
comparing the information about the game ball written in the storage area with the information about the game ball stored in the storage area before the writing, and determining the increase or decrease of the information about the game ball;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines appearance of the adversity effect in accordance with the determined increase/decrease.

According to the inventions 23A to 23C, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest even if the state in which the variable display game is interrupted continues for a long time.

(24A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a control means for repeatedly executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
prize ball acquisition means for acquiring the number of prize balls won by the player at a predetermined timing;
Consumed ball detection means for detecting the consumed ball consumed by the player,
The control means is
When the predetermined timing and the detection of the consumed balls by the consumed balls detection means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls obtained at the predetermined timing and the detected number of consumed balls are detected within the same repetition. count with
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the information on the game value is calculated using the counted number of awarded balls and number of consumed balls.

(24B) the information about the gaming value is a base;
The control means is
controlling the progress of a game by switching between a special game state in which a player can obtain a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state;
counting the total number of prize balls in the normal game state and the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state within the same repetition;
The game according to each of the preceding items, wherein the information regarding the game value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. machine.

According to the inventions 24A to 24B, information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
an out-port detecting means for detecting a game ball passing through an out-port provided at the bottom of the game area;
winning ball detection means for detecting a winning ball into a predetermined winning hole,
The control means is
game state control means for controlling to any one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can obtain more game value than in the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls passing through the out port from the output of the out port detecting means;
counting the number of winning balls from the output of the winning ball detection means;
counting the number of balls consumed by the player based on the sum of the counted number of game balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls;
Information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , the game machine described in the preceding items.

(25B) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
a detection means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area,
The control means is
game state control means for controlling to any one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can obtain more game value than in the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls launched into the game area from the output of the detection means, counting the consumption game balls consumed by the player;
Information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , the game machine described in the preceding items.

(25C) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
a detection means for counting the number of game balls discharged from the game machine,
The control means is
game state control means for controlling to any one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can obtain more game value than in the normal game state;
counting the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine from the output of the detection means, counting the number of consumption balls consumed by the player;
Information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , the game machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions 25A to 25C, it is possible to accurately execute processing related to acquisition of game media.

(26A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of a game;
a display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The control means is
game state control means for controlling to any one of at least a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can obtain more game value than the normal game state;
a prize ball counting means for counting the number of prize balls excluding the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball hit toward the right side of the game area enters a prize winning opening;
Consumed ball number counting means for counting the number of consumed balls consumed by the player excluding the number of game balls hit toward the right side of the game area,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates the information on the game value using the counted number of awarded balls and number of consumed balls.

(26B) the information about the gaming value is a base;
counting the number of prize balls in the normal game state, excluding the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball hit toward the right side of the game area enters a prize winning opening, and
excluding the number of game balls hit toward the right side of the game area and counting the number of consumption balls in the normal game state;
Any of the preceding items, wherein the control means calculates the information on the game value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state. game machine.

(26C) The control means detects that the game ball has passed through the gate section provided on the right side of the game area or won a prize in the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the predetermined period is The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls are excluded from counting.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period according to the elapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time to consume a predetermined number of game balls, or the time to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(26E) The control means excludes the number of balls passing through the gate section provided on the right side of the game area and the number of winning balls into the winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of consumed balls is counted.

According to the inventions 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player according to the result of a win-lose lottery in the game;
first data setting means for setting first data according to a game result;
second data setting means for setting second data independent of game results;
third data setting means for setting third data according to game results;
a first conversion means for obtaining first conversion data from the first data set by the first data setting means and the second data set by the second data setting means;
a second conversion means for obtaining second conversion data from the first conversion data obtained by the first conversion means and the third data set by the third data setting means;
and display means for displaying the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display device does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value within a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is multiplication means, and multiplies the first data and the second data at the timing when a predetermined condition is established to obtain the first conversion data, The game machine described in each of the preceding items.

(27D) The second conversion means is division means, and is characterized by dividing the first conversion data by the third data to obtain the second conversion data at the timing when a predetermined condition is established. , the game machine described in the preceding items.

(27E) the first data is a game value given to the player (for example, the number of prize balls);
The third data is the gaming value (for example, the number of out balls) consumed by the player,
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain second conversion data as information about the given game value,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display displays information (for example, base) regarding the game value obtained by the second conversion means.

According to the inventions 27A to 27E, information regarding game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, it is possible to accurately display in real time the base value required for evaluating the gaming machine. Further, by using the second conversion means (division means), it is possible to accurately display the information (for example, the base value) regarding the game value in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a control means for executing regular processing for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
and conversion means for calculating information about the game value,
The control means is
Passing an argument to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, obtaining a result converted by the conversion means based on the argument from the conversion means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the process of passing the argument and the process of acquiring the result of the conversion can be executed within one periodical process.

(28B) The conversion means includes:
It is an arithmetic circuit that performs a division operation,
a divisor register for inputting a divisor, a dividend register for inputting a dividend, and a result register for outputting a quotient of a division operation,
The control means is
writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register;
reading the quotient from the result register after a predetermined time has elapsed since the argument was written;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the process of writing arguments to the divisor register and the dividend register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) prize game medium number counting means for counting the game medium given to the player in a predetermined game state;
Consumed game media number counting means for counting the game media consumed by the player in the predetermined game state;
The control means is
writing a value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game medium count means by 100 into the dividend register;
writing the number of consumed game media counted by the consumed game media count means into the divisor register;
A gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein a base value is read from the result register.

According to inventions 28A to 28C, information on game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of obtaining the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed within one repetition process (timer interrupt process), complication of control can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
a prize-winning opening in which a game ball can win a prize;
a control means for controlling the progress of a game;
display means for displaying information about the given game value;
Consumed ball counting means for counting the consumed balls consumed by the player;
a prize ball counting means for counting the prize balls given to the player;
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state in which game ball winning is easy and a closed state in which winning is difficult,
The control means is
updating the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means based on the counted number of consumed balls and the number of prize balls;
If winning to the specific winning opening is detected even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that there is a winning abnormality, and if the determination is made, the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality. is excluded from the number of balls consumed, and the information on the game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29B) At least one of the winning holes is a starting winning hole that triggers a special game state that facilitates the acquisition of a large number of game balls;
The control means determines that there is a prize winning abnormality when the starting prize winning port is in a closed state and a winning to the starting prize winning port is detected, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , the game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein information relating to game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29C) at least one of the winning openings is a big winning opening opened in a special game state;
The control means determines that there is a winning abnormality when a winning to the big winning opening is detected while the big winning opening is closed, and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , the game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein information relating to game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.

(29D) having consumable ball detection means for detecting consumable balls consumed by the player;
The consumable ball counting means counts the consumable balls consumed by the player by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumable balls detected by the consumable ball number detection means. A game machine described in the item.

(29E) the control means stores the total number of balls consumed to be used for calculating the information on the game value;
The consumed ball counting means adds the number of consumed balls detected by the consumed ball number detection means to the total number of consumed balls, subtracts the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the total number of consumed balls, and calculates the number of consumed balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by counting.

(29F) the control means stores the total number of balls consumed to be used for calculating the information on the game value;
The consumed ball counting means counts the consumed balls by adding a value obtained by subtracting the number of consumed balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls detected by the consumed ball number detecting means to the total number of consumed balls. A game machine according to any of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by:

(29G) The winning port can be switched between an open state in which game ball winning is easy and a closed state in which it is difficult to win,
When a winning to the winning opening is detected in the closed state and no winning balls are dispensed in relation to the winning, the control means determines that there is a winning abnormality, and reduces the number of winning balls related to the winning. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game value information to be displayed on the display means is updated by excluding it from the number of balls consumed.

(29H) When the abnormal winning to the winning opening is detected multiple times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the number of winning balls related to the abnormal winning from the number of consumed balls and displays it on the display means. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that information on game value for playing is updated.

According to inventions 29A to 29H, information on game results can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, by excluding the number of winning balls related to the abnormal winning from the number of out balls, the information (for example, the base value) regarding the game value can be accurately displayed in real time.

(30) A gaming machine that gives a game medium as a prize to a player,
a game area in which a plurality of winning holes are arranged;
a prize granting means for granting a predetermined specific prize out of a plurality of prizes when a game medium is detected in each of the prize winning openings;
Arithmetic processing means for executing a predetermined arithmetic process using the number of game media flowing into the game area and the number of game media given as a prize given by the prize giving means;
a processing means for processing the result of the arithmetic processing executed by the arithmetic processing means;
a display means for displaying the result of arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device;
When a specific prize among the plurality of prizes is generated in the game, the prize giving means gives the specific prize, and the display means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so as not to change. game machine.

According to invention 30, it is possible to accurately and quickly display information about game results. In particular, when a specific prize is generated (for example, a prize ball paid out when a high-value prize is awarded (general prize hole with a large number of prize balls, big prize hole, etc.)) Even if it is awarded, the result of arithmetic processing (calculated base value) can be displayed so that it does not change, and it is easy to judge whether the gaming machine is demonstrating the predetermined performance (for example, whether the set ball payout rate is correct) can.

(31A) A game comprising main control means including a lottery means for executing a lottery related to winning and losing when a specific condition is satisfied, and peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means. machine and
The peripheral control means is
Temporary storage means for storing information based on signals received from the main control means;
information storage means updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means;
and a first information output means for outputting at least part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized in that the status history of the gaming machine can be comprehended.

(31B) Even if it is not in a special game state, it has a general prize winning opening that can win a game ball launched into the game area,
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating winning to the general winning slot,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winning to the general winning slot to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(31C) external output means for outputting information based on a predetermined condition to an external terminal board when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
information storage means for storing information more detailed than the information output to the external terminal board when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
and information presentation means for presenting the information stored by the information storage means.

(31D) comprising first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
The peripheral control means is
a storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means;
and a limited initialization means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storage means even if the information is initialized by the first initialization means. machine.

(31E) first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine;
and a second initialization means for initializing the storage contents of the information storage means,
The information storage means can retain stored contents even when power to the game machine is cut off,
The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the first initialization means does not initialize the storage contents of the information storage means, but initializes the storage contents of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of signal received from the main control means and the time at which the signal is received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signals transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means include a signal relating to a counting event counted according to the progress of the game and a signal relating to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. including
The peripheral control means is
Temporary storage means for storing information based on signals received from the main control means;
information storage means updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means;
a first information output means for outputting at least part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
The peripheral control means is
counting the counting events based on the signal received from the main control means and storing the counting result in the temporary storage means;
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by:

(31H) the signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal relating to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal relating to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine;
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means is
counting signals related to the counting event received from the main control means and storing them in the temporary storage means;
When the signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event and the time when the signal was received are stored in the information storage means, and the counting event stored in the temporary storage means. The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means is added to the counting result of the above.

(31I) the signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal relating to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal relating to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine;
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means is
counting signals related to the counting event received from the main control means and storing them in the temporary storage means;
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The game machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions 31A to 31I, it is possible to know how the number of balls released has changed. In particular, according to inventions 31D and 31E, it is possible to properly store information about games.

(32) A gaming machine that gives prize game media as game value to a player,
a control means for executing regular processing related to the progress of the game;
Consumed game media counting means for counting the consumed game media consumed by the player;
prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player;
calculation means for calculating information about the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media;
a first light-emitting element group including a plurality of light-emitting elements for displaying game-related information including variable display of symbols;
a second light-emitting element group including a plurality of light-emitting elements that display information about the given gaming value;
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and
the first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output drive means,
Although the control means outputs a selection signal to the first terminal and the third terminal at a common timing, at least one of the first light emitting element groups is output during the period in which the selection signal is output. a signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting one light emitting element and a signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element in the second light emitting element group; are output at different timings to control the display of the first light emitting element group and the second light emitting element group within one periodical process.

According to invention 32, it is possible to simply configure a circuit for displaying information (for example, base value and role ratio) about the game value to be given, and to quickly and accurately display the information about the game value.

(33) A gaming machine that gives a prize game medium as game value to a player,
a control means for executing regular processing related to the progress of the game;
Consumed game media counting means for counting the consumed game media consumed by the player;
prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player;
calculation means for calculating information about the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media;
a first light-emitting element group including a plurality of light-emitting elements for displaying game-related information including variable display of symbols;
a second light-emitting element group including a plurality of light-emitting elements that display information about the given gaming value;
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected, and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are commonly connected, and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminals of the plurality of light emitting elements are respectively connected. and
A selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group, and at least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group corresponding to the selection signal output to the first terminal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal The signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group in response to is output within the same periodical processing, but is output in the same periodical processing, a process of outputting a selection signal output to one terminal and a signal output to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal; a selection signal output to the third terminal and the selection signal; The processing of outputting the signals to be output to the corresponding plurality of fourth terminals is outputting signals at different timings within the periodic processing by different processing within the same periodic processing. .

According to invention 33, a circuit for displaying information about the game value to be given can be configured simply. Therefore, it is possible to quickly and accurately display the information on the game value.

(34A) A gaming machine that gives a prize game medium as a game value to a player,
a control means for controlling the progress of a game;
Consumed game media counting means for counting the consumed game media consumed by the player;
prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player;
calculation means for calculating information about the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media;
a calculation result display means for displaying information about the game value calculated by the calculation means;
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
timing means for generating a signal (e.g., a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device;
an output drive means controlled by the control device and outputting at least a control signal for display by the calculation result display means;
In the substrate on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction as seen from the control device, the output drive means and the calculation result display means are arranged in the other direction different from the one direction, and the The game machine is characterized by being arranged apart from the timing means.

(34B) A connection line between the control device and the timing means and a connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to cross each other. The game machine described in each preceding item.

(34C) the timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal that is input to the control device; and an oscillator circuit that generates a clock signal that is input to the control device;
On a printed circuit board on which the control means is implemented, the reset circuit is arranged in the same direction from the processor as the oscillator circuit, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged apart from the reset circuit and the oscillator circuit. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized by:

According to the inventions 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress interference between the signal regarding game control and the signal for displaying information regarding the game. Therefore, the influence on the game control can be suppressed, and the information regarding the game value can be quickly and accurately displayed.

(35A) A gaming machine that gives prize gaming media as gaming value to a player,
a control means for controlling the progress of a game;
Consumed game media counting means for counting the consumed game media consumed by the player;
prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player;
calculation means for calculating information about the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media;
display means for displaying information about the game value under the control of the control means;
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
a memory that is accessed by the control device when executing the process and stores at least information about the game value;
The game machine is provided with input means for instructing initialization of the memory,
The control means is
a first initialization means for determining whether or not the data stored in the memory is normal at a predetermined timing, and initializing a predetermined first area of the memory when it is determined to be abnormal; ,
a second initialization means for determining whether or not the input means is being operated when the power is turned on, and initializing a predetermined second area of the memory when it is determined that the input means is being operated; have
The first area initialized by the first initialization means and the second area initialized by the second initialization means are the same as the second initialization means by the first initialization means. including overlapping regions that are also commonly initialized by the initialization means;
at least the first region includes a region that does not overlap with the second region;
A gaming machine, wherein the information about the game value is stored in the first area other than the overlapping area.

(35B) the first area stores data used for calculating information about the game value;
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game,
The control means is
when the data stored in the first area is determined to be abnormal, initializing the first area;
when the data stored in the second area is determined to be abnormal, initializing the second area;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) the first area stores data used for calculating information about the game value;
The second area stores data used to control the progress of the game,
The control means is
when the data stored in the first area is determined to be abnormal, initializing the first area and the second area;
when the data stored in the second area is determined to be abnormal, initializing the first area and the second area;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein when it is determined that the input means is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35D) Each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time periodic processing is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals. The gaming machine described in .

(35E) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal each time the information regarding the game value is calculated. .

(35F) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether the data stored in the first area is abnormal when the power of the game machine is turned on.

According to the inventions 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory that stores the information (base value and role ratio) about the game value to be given. Therefore, the information regarding the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A gaming machine that gives a prize game medium as a game value to a player,
a control means for controlling the progress of a game;
Consumed game media counting means for counting the consumed game media consumed by the player;
prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player;
calculation means for calculating information about the given game value using the counted number of consumed game media and the number of prize game media;
display means for displaying information about the game value;
and an electric accessory operated by the control means,
Under certain conditions, when a plurality of game media wins during the operation of the electric role product triggered by one winning, some of the winning game media have information about the game value. A gaming machine characterized in that any game medium can trigger a variable display game, although the game medium is used for calculation and is not used for calculation of the information relating to the game value with respect to other game media.

(36B) The control means includes:
executing a variable display game when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first game state (shorter working hours, high probability state, big hit, etc.) advantageous to the player and a second game state (normal state) lower in advantage than the first game state. and control to either
When a plurality of game media wins during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won in the second game state are used to calculate the information on the game value, and the first game media The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein any game medium that has won a prize in a state is not used for calculating the information on the game value, but any game medium can trigger a variable display game.

(36C) The control means includes:
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in game machines,
When a plurality of game media wins during one operation of the electric accessory, the game media won while the predetermined type of error is detected are not used for calculating the information on the game value. First, game media that have won a prize in a state in which the predetermined type of error has not been detected are used to calculate the information on the game value, but any game media can be a trigger for a variable display game. The game machine described in the preceding items.

According to the inventions 36A to 36C, it is possible to quickly and accurately display the information on the game value because the use of the game medium for calculating the information on the game value is switched according to the state of the gaming machine.

(37A) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main body frame supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and provided with a game board, and a setting change operation section for changing a setting state related to a game. hand,
Difficulty in setting change making it difficult to operate the setting change operation unit when the body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame, compared to when the body frame is in an open state with respect to the outer frame A game machine characterized by having a conversion means.

(37B) an outer frame, a main body frame supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and provided with a game board; A gaming machine comprising a setting state display unit for displaying,
A game machine, comprising: visibility making means for making the display content of the setting state display unit difficult to see when the body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) an outer frame, a main body frame that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame and on which a game board is provided, and a setting determination operation section for performing a setting determination operation for determining a setting state related to a game. A game machine that
A gaming machine comprising decision making means for making it difficult to operate the setting decision operation section when the body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine comprising an outer frame, a main body frame supported to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame and having a game board provided thereon, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game. hand,
The setting change operation unit has a setting key insertion unit into which a setting key is inserted,
A specific portion of the outer frame prevents insertion of the setting key into the setting key insertion portion when the body frame is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame. game machine.

According to the inventions 37A to 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to illegally change the setting state, thereby increasing the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37E) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined game profit when performing variable display of symbols based on establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbols,
variation time determination means for determining the variation time of the pattern;
a setting information determination unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding a game based on an operation on the specific operation unit;
The variable time determining means is capable of determining the specific variable time when the setting information is determined as the specific information based on the operation on the specific operation unit.

(37F) A gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game profit when performing variable display of symbols based on establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbols,
variation time determination means for determining the variation time of the pattern;
a probability determining unit that determines one of a plurality of probabilities that the winning result will be derived based on an operation on the specific operation unit;
The game machine, wherein the variable time determination means can determine the specific variable time when the probability determined based on the operation on the specific operation unit is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined game profit when performing variable display of symbols based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbols,
variation time determination means for determining the variation time of the pattern;
a setting information determination unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding a game based on an operation on the specific operation unit;
The variable time determining means may determine a common variable time regardless of the setting information, or may determine a different variable time according to the setting information,
A gaming machine, wherein a probability that the different variable time is determined according to the setting information is set lower than a probability that the common variable time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that provides a predetermined game profit when performing variable display of symbols based on the establishment of a starting condition and deriving a winning result as a result of the variable display of the symbols,
variation time determination means for determining the variation time of the pattern;
a setting information determination unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information regarding a game based on an operation on the specific operation unit;
A production control unit that performs a predetermined production,
The variable time determination means can determine different variable times according to the setting information,
When a specific variable time is determined by the variable time determining means in correspondence with specific setting information of the setting information, the effect control unit performs variable display of the symbol within the specific variable time. A gaming machine characterized by sequentially performing a result suggesting effect suggesting a result and a setting suggesting effect suggesting the content of the setting information determined by the setting information determining section.

According to the inventions 37E to 37H, it is possible to make the player perceive the setting state in a new manner, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control unit for controlling games, a separate control board connected to the main control board and provided with a control unit different from the game control unit, and the game control A gaming machine comprising a setting-related operation unit for changing the setting state related to the game performed by the unit,
The game control unit has setting change allowable state generation means for allowing an operation related to changing the setting state to the setting related operation unit,
The gaming machine characterized in that the setting change permission state generation means allows an operation related to the change of the setting state when the information transmitted from the separate control board to the main control board is specific information. .

According to the invention of 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent person to illegally change the setting state, thereby increasing the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game control unit for controlling a game, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to the control performed by the game control unit. A gaming machine that provides a game profit by winning a game ball fired toward a predetermined winning hole,
It is characterized by comprising a firing disabling means that disables the shooting of the game ball by operating the shooting operation unit for a predetermined period when the setting change operation unit is operated and the setting state is changed. game machine.

According to the invention of 37J, the act of illegally changing the setting state can be suppressed.

(38A) A gaming machine comprising a game control unit for controlling a game, and a setting operation unit for changing settings related to the control performed by the game control unit,
A gaming machine, wherein a game control board forming the game control section and a setting board forming the setting operation section are accommodated in one case.

(38B) The above-described items, wherein the case can accommodate a dummy unit that cannot be operated to change settings in place of the setting operation unit together with the game control unit. game machine.

(38C) The setting operation unit
a first operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed;
a second operation unit for confirming the setting and ending the setting state;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, further comprising a setting display for displaying the contents of settings.

(38D) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the dummy unit has none of the first operating section, the second operating section, and the setting display.

According to the inventions 38A to 38D, the specifications of a game machine with a setting function and a game machine without a setting function can be made common to enable efficient design and production.

(39A) a game control unit having a processor that executes a program for controlling a game and a memory that the processor accesses;
a clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory;
A gaming machine comprising a setting operation unit for changing settings related to control performed by the game control unit,
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed,
The game control unit is
when the game machine is powered on, detecting the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation unit;
A gaming machine, wherein the setting state is started when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation section is operated.

(39B) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit initializes the first area of the memory after the setting state is completed.

(39C) The game control unit, when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is not operated, in the second area at least partially different from the first area, the The game machine according to each of the preceding items, characterized in that the memory is initialized.

According to inventions 39A to 39C, erroneous operations for changing settings can be prevented.

(40A) A gaming machine comprising a game control unit for controlling a game, and a setting operation unit for changing settings related to the control performed by the game control unit,
The game control unit has game value display means for displaying information about the given game value,
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed, and a setting display unit for displaying the content of the setting,
The gaming machine, wherein the game control unit displays the game value display means and the setting display means in the setting state so as not to be confused.

(40B) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game control unit and the setting operation unit are accommodated in one case.

(40C) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game value display means and the setting display means are configured by one display.

(40D) the game value display means displays information about the given game value on the display without delay according to the progress of the game;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information about the setting on the display instead of information about the given game value in the setting state.

(40E) The game machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the game value display means and the setting display means are configured by separate displays.

(40F) The game value display means
Except for the setting state, information about the given game value is displayed without delay according to the progress of the game,
displaying, in the setting state, any of characters, numbers, or figures that are not displayed in the setting state;
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The game value display means
Except for the setting state, information about the given game value is displayed without delay according to the progress of the game,
In the setting state, extinguished or all lit,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding items, wherein the setting display means displays information regarding the setting in the setting state.

According to the inventions 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent confusion of a plurality of displays arranged on the substrate.

(41A) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player according to the result of a win-lose lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling effects in games based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device in which effect display is performed under the control of the peripheral control means;
a display panel that displays a performance pattern;
a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel through the display panel;
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflectors that reflect light traveling along specific paths in the display panel toward the front side of the game machine, and and a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect to the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means is
displaying a dynamic pattern on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting section;
A gaming machine characterized in that a static pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting section.

(41B)
The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the sides of the display panel,
The peripheral control means changes the emission colors of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time so that light of different colors travels along different paths in the display panel, thereby causing the plurality of first reflections to occur. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that the color of the picture pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed over time by emitting light of different colors from the portions.

(41C)
The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the sides of the display panel,
The peripheral control means switches lighting of the plurality of light emitting elements over time, controls a path of light within the display panel, and emits light from at least a portion of the plurality of first reflecting portions. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that the color of the pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed according to the lapse of time by causing the plurality of first reflecting portions to change.

(41D)
The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that emit light from a plurality of positions to the sides of the display panel,
The peripheral control means switches the number of light emitting elements that emit light among the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light in the display panel, and controls the light path of the plurality of first reflecting portions. The game machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that the color of the pattern reflected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed over time by emitting light from at least a portion thereof.

According to the inventions 41A to 41D, a moving picture and a static picture can be displayed on a single light guide plate, thereby suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(42A) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player according to the result of a win-lose lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling effects in games based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device in which effect display is performed under the control of the peripheral control means;
a display panel that displays a performance pattern;
a light-emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel through the display panel;
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflectors that reflect light traveling along specific paths in the display panel toward the front side of the game machine, and and a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect to the front side of the gaming machine,
The first reflector includes a plurality of first right-eye reflectors for reflecting light traveling along a specific path in the display panel in a direction to reach the player's right eye, and a player's left eye. and a plurality of first left-eye reflectors that reflect in a direction reaching the
the plurality of first right-eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
The plurality of first left-eye reflective parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at a position different from the right-eye pattern,
The peripheral control means is
The pattern for the right eye and the pattern for the left eye are caused by causing the light emitting device to emit light so that the light emitted in the same pattern reaches the first reflector for the right eye and the first reflector for the left eye. is displayed on the display panel to make the player recognize a stereoscopic pattern that causes parallax between the left and right eyes,
A gaming machine characterized in that a planar pattern free from parallax between left and right eyes is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting section.

(42B) The second reflecting section directs the light traveling through a plurality of paths in the display panel to the front side of the gaming machine in the direction of reaching the player's right eye and the direction of reaching the left eye of the player. The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the light on the display panel.

(42C) The second reflector includes a plurality of second right-eye reflectors that reflect light traveling along a specific path in the display panel in a direction to reach the player's right eye, and the player's and a plurality of second left-eye reflectors that reflect in a direction reaching the left eye,
the plurality of second right-eye reflective parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right-eye pattern,
The plurality of second left-eye reflective parts are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at the same position as the right-eye pattern,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by the light reflected by the second reflecting section.

According to the inventions 42A to 42C, a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern can be displayed on a single light guide plate, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

(43A) A gaming machine that provides a game value to a player,
main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player according to the result of a win-lose lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling effects in games based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device in which effect display is performed under the control of the peripheral control means;
a display panel for displaying a performance pattern;
a light-emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel through the display panel;

The peripheral control means is
A dynamic pattern and a static pattern can be displayed on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light;
A game machine characterized by performing an effect suggesting the result of the win/lose lottery by combining the display of the dynamic picture and the display of the static picture.

(43B) The display panel includes a plurality of first reflectors that reflect light traveling along specific paths in the display panel and emits the light toward the front side of the game machine, and a plurality of paths in the display panel. and a plurality of second reflecting parts that reflect the traveling light and emit it to the front side of the game machine,
The peripheral control means is
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, changing the path of light traveling in the display panel and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting section, the changing pattern is displayed on the display panel. display in
displaying a static pattern on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting portion;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display of the changing pattern and the display of the stationary pattern are combined to produce an effect suggesting the result of the win-lose lottery.

According to the inventions 43A to 43B, a moving picture and a static picture can be displayed on a single light guide plate, thereby suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(44A) A gaming machine that gives a game value to a player,
main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player according to the result of a win-lose lottery in the game;
Peripheral control means for controlling effects in games based on instructions from the main control means;
a display device that displays an effect image under the control of the peripheral control means;
a display panel that displays a performance pattern;
a light-emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and emits light from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel so as to travel through the display panel;
The display panel has a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel toward the front side of the gaming machine,
The peripheral control means is
displaying a target pattern on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light;
A gaming machine, wherein an image moving toward the target pattern is displayed on the display device.

(44B) The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the pattern displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or letter.

(44C) The game according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that the peripheral control means displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device after displaying the target pattern on the display panel. machine.

(44D) The game according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that said peripheral control means causes said target pattern to be displayed on said display panel after displaying an image moving toward said target pattern on said display device. machine.

According to inventions 44A to 44D, a plurality of patterns or patterns of different modes can be displayed on a single light guide plate, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in games.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 930 Power board box 951 Payout control board 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1311 Main control MPU (CPU)
1312 RAM
13121 arithmetic circuit 1313 ROM
1314 Main control I/O port 1317 Character ratio indicator (base indicator)
1510 peripheral control board 1600 main liquid crystal display device 2002 first start port 2004 second start port 4000 slot machine (gaming machine)
4210 starting lever 4211 reel stop button 4300 symbol variation display device 4301 reel 4341 reel drive motor 4500 image display body 4600 main substrate (game control device)
4601 CPU
4602 ROMs
4603 RAM
4700 Production control board 5100 ROM area 5200 RAM area 5300 I/O area 5400 Parameter information setting area

Claims (1)

A game control means for controlling a game;
A storage means capable of storing and holding set values related to control performed by the game control means;
power-on means for powering on;
external output means capable of outputting various signals to the outside;
setting state generation means for generating a setting state in which the setting value can be set based on a first administrator operation being performed when the power is turned on by the power-on means;
When the power is turned on by the power-on means, a confirmation state is generated for generating a confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed based on a second administrator's operation different from the first administrator's operation being performed. means and
with
A signal is output from the external output means not only when the setting state is started but also when the confirmation state is started,
Further, the predetermined display section for displaying the set values is provided on the back side of the gaming machine and is also used for displaying predetermined error information,
The display of the set value and the display of the error information are different in display mode ,
Further, when the power is turned on again by the power-on means after the setting state is stopped due to occurrence of a specific abnormality during the setting state, the previous set value is set when the power is turned on again. Therefore, after the power is turned on again, an unset state occurs in which the setting values are not set by the administrator.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images